MINERALS OF “BAKHRIJA PLOT-4”...

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT AND ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN (EIA/EMP)

(ToR LETTER NO.HR/SEAC/208/527 DATED 27.01.2016) FOR

MINING OF STONE ALONG WITH ASSOCIATED MINOR MINERALS OF “BAKHRIJA PLOT- 4”

AT VILLAGE- BAKHRIJA, TEHSIL- NARANAUL,

DISTRICT- MAHENDERGARH, HARYANA MINE LEASE AREA- 34.64 HA.

MINE LEASE PERIOD- 10 YEARS PRODUCTION CAPACITY–75.24 LAKHS TONS PER ANNUM

STUDY PERIOD: 1ST DECEMBER 2015 TO 29th FEBRUARY 2016 MONITORING DONE BY MANTECH ENVIRONMENTAL LABORATORIES, NOIDA;

NABL ACCREDITATION No. T-1417 (Category “B1”, 1(a), as total lease area is more than 25 hectares and less than 50 hectares)

APPLICANT M/S GRADIENT BUSINESS CONSULTING PVT. LTD.

6/92, VIDHYADHAR NAGAR, JAIPUR-302039, RAJASTHAN

FINAL REPORT Rev.01_2016

ENVIRONMENT CONSULTANT

VARDAN ENVIRONET (QCI/NABET ACCREDITED NO. NABET/EIA/1316/IA001)

D-142, SECTOR 57,GURGAON (HARYANA) E-Mail: [email protected]

Contact: 0124-4291036, 09899651342

Document No. 2016_VM_10117_Final EIA

(June 2016)

Mining of Stone (Minor Mineral) at Bakhrija Plot-4 (Area 34.64 Ha.) Cat. B1 Final EIA/EMP Report Village-Bakhrija, Tehsil-Narnaul, District-Mahendergarh, Haryana by M/s Gradient Business Consulting Pvt. Ltd.

Document No. 2016_VM_10117_Final EIA Page i | (Revision History)

REVIEW AND REVISION HISTORY History of revisions of the present report:

Table I: History of the Revisions S.No. Rev. Date Modifications Remarks

1. Rev.00 Draft 21.03.2016 Draft EIA /EMP Report Report has been prepared by team Vardan and all comment of reviewers has been incorporated in Draft EIA/EMP Report.

2. Rev.01 Final 15.06.2016 Final EIA /EMP Report Report has been prepared by team Vardan and all comment of reviewers has been incorporated in Final EIA/EMP Report.

Document No. 2016_VM_10117 Table II: Record of Review

Rev. Date Description Review-1 Review-2 Approval Rev.00 21.03.2016 Draft EIA/EMP

Report Dr. Ashok K.

Rathoure Mr. S.K. Sharma Mr. R.S. Yadav

-

-

-

Rev. Date Description Review-1 Review-2 Approval

Rev.01 15.06.2016 Final EIA /EMP Report

Dr. Ashok K. Rathoure

Mr. S.K. Sharma Mr. R.S. Yadav

-

-

-

This Report has been prepared by Vardan EnviroNet on behalf of and for the use of the M/s Gradient Business Consulting Pvt. Ltd with due consideration and skill as per our general terms and conditions of business and terms of agreement with the M/s Gradient Business Consulting Pvt. Ltd. DISCLAIMER Vardan EnviroNet has taken all reasonable precautions in the preparation of this report as per its auditable quality plan. Vardan EnviroNet also believes that the facts presented in the report are accurate as on the date it was written. However, it is impossible to dismiss absolutely, the possibility of errors or omissions. Vardan EnviroNet therefore specifically disclaims any liability resulting from the use or application of the information contained in this report. The information is not intended to serve as legal advice related to the individual situation.

Document No. 2016_VM_10117_Final EIA Page ii (Table of Contents)


TABLE OF CONTENTS

Chapter Title Page i Review and Revision History i

ii Table of Content ii-vii iii List of Tables viii-ix iv List of Figures ix-x v Abbreviations x-xii vi Decleration of Consultant xiii-xiv vii TOR Compliance xv-xxxiii

VOLUME 1 1-152 1 INTRODUCTION 1-7

1.0 Prelude 1 1.1 Details of Mining activity, LoI and Consultant 1 1.2 Identification of Project and Project Proponent 1

1.2.1 Identification of Project Proponent 1 1.2.2 Identification of the Project 2

1.3 Brief Description of Nature, Size, Location of the Project 2 1.3.1 Location and Accessibility 4 1.3.2 Basic Amenities 4

1.4 Scope of the Study 5 1.4.1 Preparation of EIA 5

1.5 Laws Applicable To This Project 6-7

2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION 8-25 2.0 General 8

2.1 Type of the project 8 2.2 Need for the project 8 2.3 Description of mine lease area 8

2.3.1 Location of lease hold area 8 2.3.2 Site History 9 2.3.3 Proposed project Near By Project Site 10

2.4 Mining area 11 2.4.1 Topography of the area 11 2.4.2 Geology 12

2.4.2.1 Regional geology 12 2.4.2.2 Local Geology 13

2.4.3 Physiography and Drainage 14 2.4.4 Climate 14 2.4.5 Rainfall 14

2.5 Seismicity of the area 14 2.5.1 Largest Instrumented Earthquake in Haryana 15 2.5.2 Conclusion 16

2.6 Floods 16 2.7 Exploration and Reserves 17

2.7.1 Exploration & Method of Estimation of Reserve 17 2.7.2 Reserve Estimation 17 2.7.3 Geological Reserves 18 2.7.4 Mineable Reserves 18 2.7.5 Targeted Production 18 2.7.6 Life of mine 18

2.8 Mining Methology 18 2.8.1 Use of Equipment of Mining Project 18 2.8.2 Drilling & Blasting 18

Document No. 2016_VM_10117_Final EIA Page iii (Table of Contents)


2.8.3 Types of Explosives 19 2.8.4 Storage of Explosive 19 2.8.5 Year Wise Production detail with Benches Height 20

2.9 Transportation 21 2.10 Loading of Minerals 21 2.11 Mine Drainage 21 2.12 Disposal of Waste 22

2.13 Use of Mineral 22 2.14 Land Use Pattern of Mining Area at Various Stages 22 2.15 Utilities and Site Facilities 22 2.15.1 Water Requirement 22 2.15.2 Man Power 23 2.15.3 Power 23 2.15.4 Infrastructure/Site Services 23 2.16 Aspect and Impact Analysis 24 2.17 Litigation 25 2.18 Summary 25

3 ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES

(TECHNOLOGY & SITE) 26-27

3.0 Introduction 26 3.1 Alternative for Mine Lease 26 3.2 Alternative for Technology and other Parameters 26 3.3 Summary 27

4 DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT 28-66

4.0 General 28 4.1 Land Environment 28

4.1.1 Data Used 28 4.1.2 Methodology 28 4.1.3 Observation of Land Use Study 29

4.1.4 Topography 29 4.1.5 Drainage 29

4.2 Seismicity of the area 29

4.3 Floods 29 4.4 Meteorology 31

4.4.1 Climate of the Area 31 4.4.2 Rainfall of the Area 31 4.4.3 Meteorological Status at the Project Site 31 4.4.4 Relative Humidity 32 4.4.5 Wind Speed/Wind Rose Diagram 32

4.5 Ambient Air Quality 33 4.5.1 Selection of Sampling Station 33 4.5.2 Baseline Data 33

4.5.2.1 Sampling and Analytical Techniques and Instruments Used for Sampling 33 4.5.3 Interpretation 34

4.6 Water Environment 36 4.6.1 Methodology adopted for Selection of Sampling Station 36 4.6.2 Interpretation 39

4.7 Soil Environment 39 4.7.1 Soil Profile of District Mahendergarh 39 4.7.2 Soil Quality and Characteristics 39 4.7.3 Methodology adopted for Selection of Sampling Station 39

Document No. 2016_VM_10117_Final EIA Page iv (Table of Contents)


4.7.4 Interpretation 40

4.8 Noise Environment 41 4.8.1 Noise Analysis within the Study Area 41 4.8.2 Methodology adopted for Selection of Sampling Station 41 4.8.3 Interpretation 42

4.9 Traffic Study 43 4.9.1 Conclusion 45 4.10 Baseline Status for Flora and Fauna 45

4.10.1 Introduction 45 4.10.2 Baseline Study Area and Period 45 4.10.3 Methodology for Terrestrial Ecology 45 4.10.4 Terrestrial Floral and Faunal Components of the Study Area 47 4.10.5 Floral Diversity of the Study Area 50 4.10.6 Cultivated Plants in the Study Area 52 4.10.7 Rare and Endangered Flora in the Study Area 53 4.10.8 Endemic Plants of the Study Area 53 4.10.9 Status of the Forest, Their Category in Study Area 53

4.10.10 Faunal Biodiversity of Study Area 53 4.10.11 Conclusion 58

4.11 Socio-Economic Survey 58 4.11.1 Introduction 58

4.12 Summary 65

5 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT AND ITS MITIGATION MEASURES

67-85

5.0 Introduction 67 5.1 Construction Phase 67 5.2 Operation Phase 67 5.3 Air Quality Models 67

5.3.1 Model Setup 68 5.3.1.1 Emission of PM10 68 5.3.1.2 Loading of Material 68 5.3.1.3 Emission of PM10 due to Transportation 68 5.3.1.4 Emission of CO from Vehicles 68 5.3.1.5 Summary of calculated Emission Rates 68 5.3.2 Meteorological Data 68 5.3.3 Input Parameters 69 5.3.3.1 ISCST3 Model Input Parameters 69 5.3.3.2 CALINE4 Input Parameters 69 5.3.3.3 Interpretation 69 5.3.4 Conclusion 72 5.4 Impacts of Air and Mitigation Measures 72 5.4.1 Conclusion 73 5. 5 Impacts of Water and its mitigation measures 73 5.5.1 Conclusion 75 5.6 Impacts on soil environment and Mitigation measures 75 5.7 Impacts of Noise/Vibrations And Mitigation Measures 76 5.7.1 Conclusion 77 5.8 Impacts on land use and Mitigation Measures 77 5.8.1 Conclusion 78 5.9 Impacts on hydrology 78 5.9.1 Conclusion 78 5.10 Impacts on Geology and Mitigation 79 5.11 Impacts due to Solid Waste/Overburden and Mitigation Measures 79

Document No. 2016_VM_10117_Final EIA Page v (Table of Contents)


5.12 Impacts on Occupational Health and Safety 79 5.13 Measures Impact on Ecology and Biodiversity and its Mitigation Measure 80 5.14 Impacts on Socio-Economic Environment and Mitigation Measures 83 5.15 Summary 84-85

6 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM 86-90

6.0 Introduction 86 6.1 Environmental management cell 86

6.1.1 Responsibilities for environmental management cell (EMC) 87 6.2 Environmental monitoring and reporting procedure 87 6.3 Monitoring methodologies and parameters 87 6.4 Monitoring schedule 89 6.5 Locations of monitoring stations 89 6.6 Budget allocation for monitoring 89 6.7 Summary 89-90

7 ADDITIONAL STUDIES 91-135

7.0 General 91 7.1 Public consultation 91

7.1.1 Public Hearing Advertisement 91 7.1.2 Photographs of Public Hearing 92 7.1.3 Minutes of Public Hearing 93

7.2 Mine Closure Plan 104 7.2.1 General 104 7.2.2 Reason for Closure 104 7.2.3 Phase-Wise Plan of Restoration of Land Degraded by Mining 104 7.2.4 Statutory Obligations 105 7.2.5 Disposal of Mining Machinery 106 7.2.6 Safety and security 106 7.2.7 Time Scheduling for Abandonment 106 7.2.8 Financial Assurance 106

7.3 Hazard identification and risk assessment methodology 106 7.3.1 Blasting 106 7.3.2 Vibration 107 7.3.3 Risks due to Inundation 107 7.3.4 Risks Due to Failure of Pit Slope 107 7.3.5 Risks due to Handling of Overburden and Heavy Machinery 107 7.3.6 Risks of Accidents due to Trucks and Dumpers 107 7.3.7 Storage and use of Explosive Materials 108 7.3.8 Hazard Analysis 109 7.3.9 Controls and Action Plans 110

7.4 Disasters Management Plan 116 7.4.1 Disaster Management Plan: Structure 116 7.4.2 Policy 116 7.4.3 Planning 116 7.4.4 Implementation 117 7.4.5 Setting up of Emergency Infrastructure 119 7.4.6 Fire Fighting 119 7.4.7 Emergency Preparedness for Electrical Shock / Accident 120 7.4.8 Natural Disasters 120 7.4.9 First Aid 120

7.4.10 DMP Audit, Non Conformance and Corrective Action and Preventive Action

121

Document No. 2016_VM_10117_Final EIA Page vi (Table of Contents)


7.4.11 Training and Human Resources Development 121

7.5 Rain Water Harvesting 122 7.6 Occupational Health Hazards 122

7.6.1 Physical Hazards Due To Mining Operations 122 7.6.2 Medical Examination Schedule 123

7.7 Conservation Plan For Scheduled Fauna 123 7.7.1 Conservation plan for Indian Peafowl (Peacock) 123 7.7.2 Conservation plan for Indian Cobra (Naja naja) 126 7.7.3 Conservation plan for Golden Jackal (Canis aureus) 130 7.7.4 Conclusion 131 7.7.5 Green Belt Development 131 7.7.6 Plantation in the Buffer zone 132 7.7.7 Financial Projection for Conservation 132

7.8 Socio Economic Impact of the project & safety measures 133 7.8.1 Impact on Demographic Composition 133 7.8.2 Employment Opportunities 133 7.8.3 Increased Supply of Stone in the Market 133 7.8.4 Impact on Agriculture 133 7.8.5 Impact on Road Development 134 7.8.6 Income to Government 134 7.8.7 Impact on Law and Order 134 7.8.8 Impact on Health 134

7.9 Rehabilitation & Resettlement (R&R) 134 7.10 Environment Social Responsibility 134 7.11 Summary 135

8 PROJECT BENEFITS 136-137

8.0 General 136 8.1 Physical benefits 136 8.2 Social Infrastructure 136 8.3 Ecological Benefits 136 8.4 Summary 137

9 ENVIRONMENTAL COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS 138

9.0 Project cost 138 9.1 Environment cost analysis 138 9.2 Summary 138

10 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN 139-146

10.0 Introduction 139 10.1 Land use pattern 139 10.2 Air environment management 140

10.2.1 Control of gaseous pollution 140 10.2.2 Control of dust pollution 140

10.3 Noise and vibration environment 141 10.3.1 Noise abatement and control 141 10.3.2 Vibration Abatement 141

10.4 Water management 142 10.4.1 Surface water management 142 10.4.2 Ground water management 142 10.4.3 Waste water management 142 10.4.4 Water conservation 142

10.5 Solid waste management 142

Document No. 2016_VM_10117_Final EIA Page vii (Table of Contents)


10.6 Green belt development 142

10.6.1 Plantation program 142 10.7 Socio-economic environment 145

10.7.1 Management plan for socio-economic environment 145 10.8 Occupational health and safety 145 10.9 Cost of EMP measures 146

10.10 Rehabilitation and resettlement (R & R) 146 10.11 Summary 146

11 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSION 147-151

11.0 General 147 11.1 Introduction 147 11.2 Project description 148 11.3 Analysis of alternatives 148 11.4 Description of the environment 148 11.5 Anticipated environmental impacts and mitigation measures 149 11.6 Environmental monitoring program 150 11.7 Additional studies 150 11.8 Project benefit 151 11.9 Environmental cost benefit analysis 151

11.10 Environmental management plan 151 11.11 Conclusion 151

12 DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANT ENGAGED 152

12.0 Introduction 152 12.1 Declaration

152

12.2 List of Functional Area Experts 152

VOLUME 1 (ANNEXURES) 153-410 I LETTER OF INTENT 153 II COPY OF LETTER OF APPROVAL OF MINING PLAN INCLUDING

PROGRESSIVE MINE CLOSURE PLAN 159

III TOR LETTER 161 IV NOC FROM DFO 169 V NABL CERTIFICATE AND MOEF CERTIFICATE 171 VI AIR REPORTS 178 VII WATER REPORTS 369 VIII NOISE REPORTS 381 IX TRAFFIC STUDY 389 X SOIL REPORTS 392 XI AUTHENTICATED LIST OF FLORA AND FAUNA BY DFO 396 XII ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY 402 XIII PUBLIC HERAING PROCEEDING 404

LIST OF TABLE Table Title Page

1.1 Identification of Project Proponent 1 1.2 Brief Description of the Project 2-4 2.1 Details of Mining 11 2.2 Stratigraphic Sequence of the Delhi Super group of rocks in Haryana 12

Document No. 2016_VM_10117_Final EIA Page viii (Table of Contents)


Table Title Page

2.3 Details of Site Elevation 14 2.4 Loss Estimation at State Level 14 2.5 Loss Estimation at District Level 14 2.6 Major Earthquake in Haryana 15 2.7 Geological Reserves Estimation 17 2.8 Five Years Proposed Production Details (Tons/annum) 18 2.9 List of Machineries 18

2.10 Land Use Pattern at Various Stages 22 2.11 Employment Details 23 2.12 Aspect and Impact Analysis 24 3.1 Alternative for Technology and other Parameters 31 4.1 Land Use Pattern of the Study Area 29 4.2 Monthly Average Rainfalls for Year 2009-2013 (mm) 31 4.3 Meteorological Condition of the Study Area 31 4.4 Monthly Average Relative Humidity (%) 32 4.5 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Sampling Stations 33 4.6 Testing Procedure Used for Determining Various Air Quality Parameters 33 4.7 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Results in µg/m3 (1st December, 2015to 31st

January, 2016) 33

4.8 Ground Water Sampling Stations 36 4.9 Surface Water Sampling Stations 36

4.10 Physico-chemical and microbiological Analysis of Ground Water 37 4.11 Physico-chemical and microbiological Analysis of Surface Water 38 4.12 Soil Monitoring Station Details 39 4.13 Physico-chemical and microbiological Analysis of Soil 40 4.14 Noise Monitoring Sampling Stations 41 4.15 Noise Levels in Study Area 41 4.16 Roads and Highways in the Study Area 43 4.17 No. of Vehicles per Day 44 4.18 Existing Traffic Scenario and LOS 44 4.19 Modified Traffic Scenario and LOS 44 4.20 List of Villages for Baseline study 46 4.21 Mode of data collection and parameters considered during the Survey 46 4.22 Trees in the Study area 50 4.23 Lists of Shrubs in the Study Area 51 4.24 List of Herbaceous species observed in the study area 51 4.25 Schedule –I Bird(s) of Study Area 53 4.26 Systematic Lists of Birds in the Study Area with Its Distribution and Migratory

Status 54

4.27 Butterflies in the Study Area 56 4.28 Reptiles and Amphibian in the Study Area 56 4.29 Mammals in Study area 57 4.30 Domestic Animals in Study area 57 4.31 List of Schedule –I and Ii Fauna observed During the Study 57 4.32 List of the Villages for Field Survey of Socio-economic Environment 61 4.33 Summarized Demographic Structure of the Study Area 62 4.34 Demographic Structure of the Study Area 62 4.35 Occupational Structure of the Study Area 64 5.1 Emissions Rates 68 5.2 Predicted GLC of PM10 at Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Stations 70 5.3 Impact on Ecology and Biodiversity due to Mining Activity 82 6.1 Monitoring Methodologies and Parameters 87

Document No. 2016_VM_10117_Final EIA Page ix (Table of Contents)


Table Title Page

6.2 Monitoring Schedule 89 6.3 Locations of Monitoring Stations 89 7.1 Action Plan of the issues raised during Public Hearing and reply given by Project

Proponent 94

7.2 Hazards faced in stone mining operations 108 7.3 Hazards ranked by Risk level 109 7.4 Cause analysis for level 1 & level 2 hazards 109 7.5 Control and Action Plan 110 7.6 Suggested Items in First Aid Kit 120 7.7 Medical Examination Schedule 123 7.8 Budget for Conservation/Management Plan 132 7.9 Financial Projection (yearly) 132

7.10 Year Wise Plan and Budget (Rs.) 132 7.11 Budget for Environment Social Responsibility 134 9.1 Financial Pattern 169 9.2 Environmental Cost Analysis 169

10.1 Plan for Afforestation 144 10.2 List of Species for Greenbelt Development 144 10.3 Budget for Occupational Health and Safety of the workers (Lakhs) 146 10.4 Budget for EMP 146 11.1 Details of the Project 147 11.2 Baseline Environment Status 148

LIST OF FIGURE

Figure Title Page

1.1 Key Plan showing the Environmental Settings of the Study area on Toposheet (OSM) of survey of India (1:50000)

4

2.1 Location Map of the Project Site 8 2.2 Digitized Key Plan of the Project Site 9

2.3(a) Google Image (Short View) of the Project Site 9 2.3(b) Google Image (Long View) of the Project Site 10

2.4 Map of the Proposed Mining Project are present in 10 Km Radius 10 2.5 Geomorphology of Haryana 13 2.6 Geological and Mineral Map of Haryana 13 2.7 Map of Likelihood of Deaths in Haryana 15 2.8 Flood Hazard Map of Haryana 17 2.9 Process Flow Chart of Mining 20

2.10 Water Balance 23 4.1 Land Use Pattern of the Study Area (10 Km Radius from the Mine Site) 30 4.2 FCC Map of the Study Area (10 Km Radius from the Mine Site) 30 4.3 Wind Rose Diagram of Study Area 33 4.4 Key Plan of Air Monitoring Stations 34 4.5 PM10 Concentration in µg/m3 35 4.6 PM2.5 Concentration in µg/m3 35 4.7 SO2 Concentration in µg/m3 35 4.8 NO2 Concentration in µg/m3 36 4.9 Key Plan of Water Sampling Stations 37

4.10 Key Plan of Soil Sampling Stations 40 4.11 Key plan of Noise Monitoring Station 42 4.12 Noise Monitoring Result 43 4.13 Showing the Typically Haul Road which is Connected to Highways for 45

Document No. 2016_VM_10117_Final EIA Page x (Table of Contents)


Figure Title Page

Transportation of Sand 4.14 Aquatic Habitat of the Study area 48 4.15 Agriculture Land of Study area 48 4.16 Lease area for Stone mining 49 4.17 Scrub Area 49 4.18 Vegetables in the study area 50 4.19 Climbers in the study area 52 4.20 Peafowl in the study area 54 4.21 Nesting of Birds in the Study area 56 4.22 Administrative Map 59 5.1 Incremental Concentration v/s Distance Graph 69 5.2 Graphical representation of model results 70 5.3 Spatial distribution of predicted GLCs of PM10 due to Mining 71 5.4 Spatial distribution of PM10 GLC due to transportation 71 5.5 Site Specific Ground Water Table along with Schematic Diagram of Water Table 74 5.6 Design of Septic Tank/Soak pit 75 7.1 Notice from Haryana State Pollution Control Board regarding Public Hearing 91 7.2 Members of SPCB, Haryana for Public Hearing 92 7.3 Environment Consultants along with Project Proponent at Public Hearing 92 7.4 Local Public present for Public Hearing 93 7.5 Rainwater Harvesting Pit 122

10.1 Flow Chart of EMP 139

ABBREVIATIONS AAQM Ambient Air Quality Monitoring amsl Above Mean Sea Level bgl Below Ground Level CPCB Central Pollution Control Board dB Decibel DG Diesel Generator E East EIA Environmental Impact Assessment EMC Environmental Management Cell EMP Environmental Management Plan ENE East of North- East EPA Environmental Protection Agencies ESE East of South East FCC False Colour Composite GIS Geological Information System GPS Global Positioning System HP Horse Power Hr Hour IMD Indian Meteorological Department IRS Indian Remote Sensing Satellite ISCST Industrial Source Complex, Short Terms ISO International Organization Of Standardization ISS Indian Standard Specification KLD Kilo Litre Per Day Km Kilometer KW Kilo Watt

Document No. 2016_VM_10117_Final EIA Page xi (Table of Contents)


ABBREVIATIONS

LOS Level of Service m Meter MCDR Mining Conservation & Development Rules mg Milligram MoEF&CC Ministry Of Environment Forest and Climate Change N North NE North-East NNE North of North-East NNW North of North-West NO2 Nitrogen Dioxides NTU Naphelo Turbidity Unit NW North-West OB Over Burden OH&S Occupational Health and Safety PCU Passenger Car Unit PM Particulate Matter PPE Personal Protective Equipment PPM Part Per Million Pvt. Private R&R Rehabilitation and Resettlement RDS Respirable Dust Sampler SE South- East SEIAA State Level Environmental Assessment Authority SO2 Sulphur-di-Oxide SOI Survey of India SOPs Standard Operating Procedures SPCB State Pollution Control Board SPM Suspended Particulate Matter SSE South of South-East SSW South of South-West TDS Total Dissolve Solid TOR Terms of Reference TPA Ton s Per Annum TPA Tone Per Hour TPH Tons Per Hour TS Total Solid US EPA United State Environmental Protection Agencies w.e.f. With Effective From w.r.t. With Reference To W/W Weight By Weight WNW West of North-West WSW West of South-West

QCI-NABET Scheme for accreditation of EIA Consultant Organisations/Version 3/June 2015

Declaration Page | xiii

DECLARATION OF CONSULTANTS

NABET Annexure–VII

Declaration by Experts contributing to the EIA of “Bakhrija Plot-4” by M/s Gradient Business Consulting Pvt. Ltd.

I, hereby, certify that I was a part of the EIA team in the following capacity that developed the above EIA.

EIA Coordinator: Mr. S.K. Sharma

Signature

Date: 15.06.2016

I, hereby, certify that I was a part of the EIA team in the following capacity that developed the above EIA.

Team Member: Mr. Ansul Yadav

Signature

Date: 15.06.2016

D-142, Sector-57, Sushant Lok-III, Golf Course Extension Road,

Gurgaon (Haryana)

Contact: 09953147268

Email: [email protected]

Functional Area Experts (FAEs):

S.No. FAs Name of Expert/s Involvement (period)

Signature

1. AP Mr. S.K.Sharma Feb.2016-June 2016

2. SHW Mr. S.K.Sharma Feb.2016-June 2016

3. WP Mr. S.K.Sharma Feb.2016-June 2016

mailto:[email protected]

QCI-NABET Scheme for accreditation of EIA Consultant Organisations/Version 3/June 2015

Declaration Page | xiv

Dr. Ashok Kumar Feb.2016-June 2016

4. SE Mrs. Shilpa Mishra Feb.2016-June 2016

5. EB Dr. Ashok Kumar Feb.2016-June 2016

6. HG Mr. R.S Yadav Feb.2016-June 2016

7. GEO Mr.R.S Yadav Feb.2016-June 2016

8. AQ Mr. Asif Hussain Feb.2016-June 2016

9. NV Mr. Asif Hussain Feb.2016-June 2016

10. LU Mr. Joshua Anand Feb.2016-June 2016

11. RH Mr. Kuldipak Ahuja Feb.2016-June 2016

12. SC Mr. S.K. Sharma Feb.2016-June 2016

TM and FAA are included in chapter 12 as Team for EIA preparation.

Declaration by the Head of the accredited consultant organization/ authorized person

I, R.S. Yadav, hereby, confirm that the above mentioned experts prepared the EIA for sand mine of M/s Gradient Business Consulting Pvt. Ltd. I, hereby, certify that I was a part of the EIA team in the following capacity that developed the above EIA.

I also confirm that I shall be fully accountable for any mis-leading information mentioned in this statement.

Name: R.S.Yadav

Signature

Designation: Managing Director

Name of the EIA Consultant Organization: M/s Vardan Environet, QCI/NABET Accredited Environment Consultancy.

NABET Certificate No. & Issue Date: NABET/EIA/1316/IA001 valid upto 08.11.2016.

Mining of Stone (Minor Mineral) at Bakhrija Plot-4 (Area 34.64 Ha.) Cat. B1 Compliance to ToR Conditions Village-Bakhrija, Tehsil-Narnaul, District-Mahendergarh, Haryana by M/s Gradient Business Consulting Pvt. Ltd

Document No. 2016_VM_10117_Final EIA Page | xv ToR Compliances

COMPLIANCE TO TOR CONDITIONS

Point wise compliance of ToR points issued by SEAC, Panchkula, Haryana vide F. No. HR/SEAC/208/527 dated 27.01.2016 for the project Stone along with associated minor mineral of “Bakhrija Plot-4”, Tehsil- Narnaul, District- Mahendergarh, Haryana (Area 34.64 Ha.) Capacity 75,24,225 TPA by M/s Gradient Business Consulting Pvt. Ltd., 6/92, Vidhyadhar Nagar, Jaipur-302039, Rajasthan.

ToR Description Reply Citation

1 Year-wise production details since 1994 should be given, clearly stating the highest production achieved in any one year prior to 1994. It may also be categorically informed whether there had been any increase in production after the EIA Notification, 1994 came into force w.r.t. the highest production achieved prior to 1994.

This is a fresh Mining Lease area auctioned by Govt. of Haryana & LoI was issued vide letter DMG/Hy/ML/Bakhrija Plot-4/2015/8564 dated 21.10.2015 attached as Annexure I, no production is started yet. Production will be commenced only after obtaining Environmental Clearance from MoEF&CC, New Delhi and CTE from State pollution Control Board, Haryana. Hence, this is not applicable for the proposed Mining Project.

Annexure-I.

2 A copy of the document in support of the fact that the Proponent is the rightful lessee of the mine should be given.

The copy of letter of intent (LOI) of mining lease issued by Director of Mines & Geology Department, Haryana, vide letter no. DMG/HY/ML/Bakhrija Plot-4/2015/8564 dated 21.10.2015 and PP has applied for Environmental Clearance enclosed as Annexure-I.

Annexure-I.

3 All documents including approved mine plan, EIA and public hearing should be compatible with one another in terms of the mine lease area, production levels, waste generation and its management and mining technology and should be in the name of the lessee.

Contents in all documents are synchronizing with one another in terms of mine lease area, production levels, waste generation, its management and mining technology. Both the mining plan and ML area in the name of M/s. Gradient Business Consulting Pvt. Ltd., who is the lessee of this project. Copy of LoI and the Approval Letter of Mining Plan is enclosed as Annexure I and II.

Annexure-I. Annexure-II.


Document No. 2016_VM_10117_Final EIA Page | xvi ToR Compliances

4 All corner coordinates of the mine lease area, superimposed on a High Resolution Imagery/ toposheet should be provided. Such an Imagery of the proposed area should clearly show the land use and other ecological features of the study area (core and buffer zone). Lease area should precisely marked in survey of India Toposheet of 1:50000.

All corners of the coordinates of ML area are superimposed on topo sheet of 1:50000 of survey of India Toposheet (OSM) No. 45M/13, 54A/1, H43/W4 .Coordinates of the mine lease area.

Pillar Latitude Longitude 1 27054'43.50'' 76003'14.21'' 2 27054'43.69'' 76002'49.25'' 3 27054'42.91'' 76002'49.10'' 4 27054'41.95'' 76002'51.36'' 5 27054'39.02'' 76002'50.63'' 6 27054'39.35'' 76002'47.60'' 7 27054'35.09'' 76002'47.21'' 8 27054'34.19'' 76002'47.77'' 9 27054'34.11'' 76002'58.92'' 10 27054'30.25'' 76002'58.88'' 11 27054'30.23'' 76003'01.53'' 12 27054'31.03'' 76003'01.89'' 13 27054'32.02'' 76003'02.44'' 14 27054'32.81'' 76003'03.06'' 15 27054'33.44'' 76003'03.79'' 16 27054'33.64'' 76003'04.41'' 17 27054'33.58'' 76003'05.34'' 18 27054'33.41'' 76003'06.42'' 19 27054'32.86'' 76003'07.05'' 20 27054'32.39'' 76003'07.49'' 21 27054'31.12'' 76003'07.63'' 22 27054'31.13'' 76003'07.31'' 23 27054'30.84'' 76003'08.00'' 24 27054'29.49'' 76003'08.46'' 25 27054'27.51'' 76003'11.00'' 26 27054'28.56'' 76003'10.89'' 27 27054'28.41'' 76003'11.62'' 28 27054'27.39'' 76003'11.58'' 29 27054'27.37'' 76003'12.28'' 30 27054'25.95'' 76003'12.47'' 31 27054'25.78'' 76003'12.84'' 32 27054'27.02'' 76003'13.52'' 33 27054'26.51'' 76003'15.92'' 34 27054'28.54'' 76003'17.82'' 35 27054'29.94'' 76003'18.02'' 36 27054'29.99'' 76003'18.79'' 37 27054'27.38'' 76003'19.31''

Chapter-1, Figure 1.1 and Page No-4 Chapter-4, Figure 4.1 & 4.2 and Page No. 30


Document No. 2016_VM_10117_Final EIA Page | xvii ToR Compliances

38 27054'26.55'' 76003'20.82'' 39 27054'27.52'' 76003'21.89'' 40 27054'30.30'' 76003'22.14'' 41 27054'30.90'' 76003'22.78'' 42 27054'32.42'' 76003'22.54'' 43 27054'33.32'' 76003'22.64'' 44 27054'33.98'' 76003'22.87'' 45 27054'35.30'' 76003'23.22'' 46 27054'35.63'' 76003'22.67'' 47 27054'37.12'' 76003'22.31'' 48 27054'37.14'' 76003'23.46'' 49 27054'38.57'' 76003'23.38'' 50 27054'39.75'' 76003'21.73'' 51 27054'40.52'' 76003'19.91'' 52 27054'41.06'' 76003'18.26'' 53 27054'41.17'' 76003'15.59'' 54 27054'41.40'' 76003'14.19''

Land use and High resolution Imagery FCC maps are prepared with use a RS–GIS technique and also incorporate.

5. Does the company have a well laid down Environment Policy approved by its Board of Directors? If so, may be spelt out in the EIA report with description of the Prescribed operating process/procedures to bring into focus any infringement/deviation/violation of the environmental or forest norms/ conditions? The hierarchical system or administrative order to the company to deal with the environmental issues and for ensuring compliance with the EC conditions may be given. The system of reporting of non-compliances/ violations of environmental norms to be Board of Director of the Company and/ or shareholders or stakeholders at large may also be detailed in the EIA Report.

Yes, The company has formulated Environmental policy which is approved by M/s. Gradient Business Consulting Pvt. Ltd. The operating process or the implementation of policy will be as follows:

Compliance with all applicable environmental laws and regular maintenance of their records.

Acquaintance of all employees and contractors with their environmental responsibilities.

Focus on continuous improvement. Continuous review of environmental achievements. Half yearly submission of Compliance reports. Internal audits and non-conformances report.

The Policy contains the hierarchical system of the company to deal with the environmental issues and for ensuring the compliance with EC conditions. All the non compliances/violations of environmental laws will be reported as per QMS.

Chapter 6, Item 6.1.1, Page 87 Annexure XII


Document No. 2016_VM_10117_Final EIA Page | xviii ToR Compliances

6 Issues relating to Systematic Mine Development, Mine Safety and stability in case of open cast working, blasting study etc. should be detailed. The proposed safeguard measures in each case should also be mentioned. Daily explosive consumption and its legitimate storage are to be assessed. Adequate mitigating measures based on scientific studies in respect of blast induced ground vibration flying fragment and air blast are to be taken along with requisite precaution.

Mines safety for workers working at the site has been taken care of Safety measures related to risks during mining activity, natural disasters, etc has been proposed. This is an open cast mechanized mining. There will be no underground mining. Blasting Study The control blasting will be done. The blasting details are incorporated in

Chapter 7, Item 7.3, Page 106 Chapter 2, Item 2.8.2,

7 The study area will comprise of 10 km zone around the mine lease from lease periphery and the data contained in the EIA such as waste generation etc should be for the life of the mine/ lease period.

Study area comprises of 10 Km radius around the mine lease boundary. Map showing 10 Km radius of the ML area has been furnished in the EIA report & 10 Km radius of mine lease. All the data contained in the EIA/EMP Report are for lease period of mine. There is no generation of waste material in this mining. Only little amount of soil will generated from joints and cracks, which will stack separately and used for plantation. Lease period is 10 years.

Chapter-1, Figure 1.1 and Page 4 Chapter-2, Item 2.12 and Page 22

8 Land use of the study area delineating forest area, agricultural land, grazing land, wildlife sanctuary, national park, migratory routes of fauna, water bodies, human settlements and other ecological features should be indicated. Land use plan of the mine lease area should be prepared to encompass preoperational, operational and Post-operational phases and submitted. Impact, if any, of change of land use should be given.

Land Use of the study area delineating forest area, agricultural land, grazing land, wildlife sanctuary, National park, migratory routes of fauna, water bodies, human settlements and other ecological features has been incorporated.

Landuse Area (Hectares) % Area Agriculture Land 20092.14 59.03 Dense Forest 2164.05 6.36 Settlement 1127.6 3.31 Open Scrub 8092.26 23.78 Barren Land 2559.96 7.52 Total Area 34035.67 100

Land use plan of the mine lease area showing the preoperational, operational and post operational phases is incorporated in the EIA/EMP Report.

Chapter-4, Item 4.1.3, Table 4.1, Figure 4.1 and Page 30 Chapter-2, Item No. 2.14, Table-2.10 and Page 22


Document No. 2016_VM_10117_Final EIA Page | xix ToR Compliances

9 Mineral resources and reserve in terms of UNFC are to be given duly supported by adequate representative plans and sections. Ultimately mineable limit should be marked over geological plan and sector. Details of the land for any Over Burden Dumps outside the mine lease, such as extent of land area, distance from mine lease, its land use, R&R issues, if any, should be given.

The detail of Mineral resources and reserve in terms of UNFC are given approved mine plan of Bakhrija Plot 4. There is no generation of Overburden/waste material in this mining. The land of stone (minor mineral) mining lease area is a government land on Gair Mumkin Pahar. There is no human settlement in lease area and total mining lease area is Gair Mumkin Pahar (Govt. Waste Land). The rehabilitation and restoration for human is not applicable. The restoration plan for mining and environment is discussed in Chapter 5.

Chapter-2, Item 2.12 and Page 22 Chapter 7, Item 7.2.3, Page 104

10 A Certificate from the Competent Authority in the State Forest Department should be provided, confirming the involvement of forest land, if any, in the project area. In the event of any contrary claim by the Project Proponent regarding the status of forests, the site may be inspected by the State Forest Department along with the Regional Office of the Ministry to ascertain the status of forests, based on which, the Certificate in this regard as mentioned above be issued. In all such cases, it would be desirable for representative of the State Forest Department to assist the Expert Appraisal Committees.

The Mining Lease area does not involve any forest land. The land of the Mining lease area is Government land (Gair Mumkin Pahar) and this area is free from any reservation of forest department Haryana Government. NOC from DFO, Mahendergarh vide letter no. 3639 dated 10.12.2015 is attached as Annexure IV.

Annexure-IV

11 Status of forestry clearance for the broken up area and virgin forestland involved in the Project including deposition of net present value (NPV) and compensatory afforestation (CA) should be indicated. A copy of the forestry clearance should also be furnished.

The land of the Mining lease area is Government land (Gair Mumkin Pahar) and this area is free from any reservation of forest department Haryana Government. NOC from DFO, Mahendergarh vide letter no. 3639 dated 10.12.2015 is attached as Annexure IV.

Annexure-IV

12 Implementation status of recognition of forest rights under the Scheduled Tribes and other Traditional Forest Dwellers (Recognition of Forest Rights) Act, 2006 should be indicated. Other Traditional Forest Dwellers (Recognition of Forest Rights) Act, 2006 should be indicated.

There are no any forest dwellers in the study area.


Document No. 2016_VM_10117_Final EIA Page | xx ToR Compliances

13 The vegetation in the RF/ PF areas in the study area, with necessary details, should be given.

Detail of RF/PF within 10 Km radius of mine site Panchnota Protected Forest, 5.2 Km in SW, Minaka Nangal PF, 8.4 Km in S. Balupura PF, 8.1Km in NW

The vegetation cover in RF/PF is enclosed as Annexure XI

Chapter-1, Item 1.3, Table 1.1, Page 3 Annexure XI

14 A study shall be got done to ascertain the impact of the Mining Project on wildlife of the study area and details furnished. Impact of the project on the wildlife in the surrounding and any other protected area and accordingly detailed mitigative measures required, should be worked out with cost implications and submitted.

EB Study has been carried out by the Ecology and Biodiversity Expert (NABET/QCI Approved) in and around the lease area to study the wild life of the area. 1 species of Schedule I and 2 species of Schedule II species were recorded. The conservation plan has been prepared along with budgetary provision of Rs. 10.00 Lakhs to conserve wildlife. The proper mitigation measures have been proposed to mitigate negative impacts.

Chapter 4 Item 4.10.10, Table 4.25and Page 53 Chapter 5, Item 5.4 to Item 5.14 and Page. 72

15 Location of National Parks, Sanctuaries, Biosphere Reserves, Wildlife Corridors, Tiger/ Elephant Reserves/lease should be clearly indicated, supported by a location map duly authenticated by Chief Wildlife Warden. Necessary clearance, as may be applicable to such projects due to proximity of the ecologically sensitive areas as mentioned above, should be obtained from the State Wildlife Department/ Chief Wildlife Warden under the Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972 and copy furnished.

No National Parks, Sanctuaries, Biosphere Reserves Wildlife Corridors, Tiger/Elephant Reserves/ Critically Polluted areas/ Aravali are falling within 10 Km of the study area.

--


Document No. 2016_VM_10117_Final EIA Page | xxi ToR Compliances

16 A detailed biological study of the study area [core zone and buffer zone (10 km radius of the periphery of the mine lease)] shall be carried out. Details of flora and fauna, duly authenticated, separately for core and buffer zone should be furnished based on such primary field survey, clearly indicating the Schedule of the fauna present. In case of any scheduled-I fauna found in the study area, the necessary plan for their conservation should be prepared in consultation with State Forest and Wildlife Department and details furnished. Necessary allocation of funds for implementing the same should be made as part of the project cost.

A detailed biological study (of 10 Km radius study area) was conducted by Ecology and Biodiversity Expert and the details are incorporated in the EIA/EMP Report. Authenticated List of Flora and Fauna was obtained from District Forest Officer and is enclosed as Annexure XI with the EIA/EMP Report. 1 species of Schedule I and 3 species of Schedule II species were recorded within 10 Km distance from the boundary of project site hence conservation plan will be submitted to APPCF Panchkula.

Chapter 4, Item 4.10 and Page 45 Annexure XI Chapter 7, Item 7.7 and Page 123

17 Proximity to Areas declared as ‘Critically Polluted’ or the Project areas likely to come under the ‘Aravali Range’, (attracting court restrictions for mining operations), should also be indicated and where so required, clearance certifications from the prescribed Authorities, such as the SPCB or State Mining Dept. Should be secured and furnished to the effect that the proposed mining activities could be considered.

The project site is neither falling in proximity to area declared as Critically Polluted. The proposed mining area of Stone mining is located on Govt. waste land (Gair Mumkin Pahar). NOC from DFO, Mahendergarh vide letter no. 3639 dated 10.12.2015 is attached as Annexure IV. stating that the mine lease area is neither falling under Aravali Plantation nor in forest under section 4 and 5 PLPA 1900 as per record of Forest Department, Govt. of Haryana.

Annexure-I Annexure-IV


Document No. 2016_VM_10117_Final EIA Page | xxii ToR Compliances

18 R&R Plan/compensation details for the Project Affected People (PAP) should be furnished. While preparing the R&R Plan, the relevant State/ National Rehabilitation & Resettlement Policy should be kept in view. In respect of SCs /STs and other weaker sections of the society in the study area, a need based sample survey, family-wise, should be undertaken to assess their requirements, and action programmes prepared and submitted accordingly, integrating the sectoral programmes of line departments of the State Government. It may be clearly brought out whether the village located in the mine lease area will be shifted or not. The issues relating to shifting of Village including their R&R and socio-economic aspects should be discussed in the report.

Proposed mining lease area is part of Gair Mumkin Pahar, so there is no habitation found in project area. Hence, there is no need of R and R Plan. However, as per the point xiv of LoI the lease holder will deposit 10% of the annual contract money i.e. Rs 3.25 Crores per annum approx. to the Mines and Minerals Development, Restoration and Rehabilitation Fund. This amount will be spent by lease holder for the protection of environment in the nearby surrounding area. The officers of the State Government Haryana will strictly monitor the compliance of lease holder in this regard.

Chapter 7, Item 7.2.3 and Page 104

19 One season (non-monsoon) primary baseline data on ambient air quality (PM10, SO2 and NOx)

Baseline data of study area within 10 Km radius of the project site was collected during Winter season, 2015 (1st December to 29th February, 2016).

Chapter 4, Item 4.5 to Item 4.11 and Page 65


Document No. 2016_VM_10117_Final EIA Page | xxiii ToR Compliances

water quality, noise level, soil and flora and fauna shall be collected and the AAQ and other data so compiled presented date-wise in the EIA and EMP Report. Site-specific meteorological data should also be collected. The location of the monitoring stations should be such as to represent whole of the study area and justified keeping in view the pre-dominant Downwind direction and location of sensitive receptors. There should be at least one monitoring station within 500 m of the mine lease in the pre-dominant downwind direction. The mineralogical composition of PM10, particularly for free silica, should be given.

Ambient Air Quality PM 10 – 44.0 µg/m3 and 81.0 µg/m3 PM 2.5 – 15.0 µg/m3 and 33.0 µg/m3 SO2 – 5.0 µg/m3 and 11.8 µg/m3 NO2 – 11.0 µg/m3 and 32.0 µg/m3

Ground Water: pH (7.48 to 8.03), TDS (.00 to 589.00 mg/L), Total Hardness (192.00 to 264.00mg/L) Fluoride varies from 50 to 79 mg/L Chloride varies from 1.97 to 12.10 mg/L EC varies from 634 to 906 µmhos/cm are found within the permissible limits. Surface Water: pH (6.97 to 7.41), TDS (215.00 to 265.00 mg/L), Total Hardness (148.00 to 168.00 mg/L) EC varies from 327 to 405 µmhos/cm Fluoride varies from <0.01 to <0.001 mg/L Chloride varies from 18.00 to 27.00 mg/L COD varies from 64 to 80 mg/L BOD varies from 21 to 26mg/L are found within the permissible limits. Noise Level Noise Level During Day Time – 46.00 Leq dB and 50.4 Leq dB Noise Level During Night Time – 35.1 Leq dB and 40.7 Leq dB Soil Quality pH – 6.67 to 7.87, Texture – Silty Loam. Organic Matter – 1.1 % to 1.81 %. Nitrogen- 14.2 kg/hec to 17.8 mg/100gm Phosphorus-0.62 kg/hec to 0.98 mg/100gm Potassium-5.8 kg/hec to 7.6 mg/100gm

Chapter 4, Page 33-43 Annexure-VI Annexure-VII Annexure-VIII Annexure-X

Site specific meteorology data was collected and incorporated in EIA/EMP Report.

Chapter 4, Item 4.3.3, Table 4.3 & Page 31


Document No. 2016_VM_10117_Final EIA Page | xxiv ToR Compliances

The location of Air Monitoring stations was selected to represent the whole mine lease area (10 Km radius). One Location is also selected in 500 m of dominant downwind direction.

Chapter 4, Item No 4.5, Table 4.5 and Page 33, Figure 4.4

Mineralogical composition of PM10 particularly for Free silica is incorporated in the EIA/EMP Report.

Chapter 4, Table 4.7 (Winter Season Results) Page 3

20 Air quality modeling should be carried out for prediction of impact of the project on the air quality of the area. It should also take into account the impact of movement of vehicles for transportation of mineral. The details of the model used and input parameters used for modeling should be provided. The air quality contours may be shown on a location map clearly indicating the location of the site, location of sensitive receptors, if any, and the habitation. The wind roses showing predominant wind direction may also be indicated on the map. This should also be complied with if the excavated material is stacked outside the mining lease area.

The predominant wind direction recorded during study period was from W to E Direction. The area earmarked for the stacking the soil mixed finer material of stone is 300 m2 (Plate no 5-9 of approved mine plan) which can accommodate at least 1000 Tons of material. In the present case, soil generated contains fine powder of quartzite; the same will be sorted out and stacked in separate dump yards at mine site. Yearly generation of soil/fines which only 200 tones will be used for plantation and as an upper layer on the dumps. The dump may attain a maximum height of 6 mtr with gentle slopes of 300. Tow walls and drains around dumps are proposed to safeguard the dump.

Chapter 5, Item 5.3 and Page 68 Chapter 4, Figure 4.3 and Page 32

21 The water requirement for the Project, its availability and source should be furnished. A detailed water balance should also be provided. Fresh water requirement for the Project should be indicated.

Water requirement in this project site is 40 KLD. Water will be taken from existing water sources from nearby villages or tanker supplier. The details are incorporated in Chapter-2. Total Water Requirement= 40.0 KLD Dust Suppression = 21.0 KLD Plantation= 15.0 KLD Domestic Purpose= 4.0 KLD

Chapter 2, Item 2.15.1, Figure-2.10 and Page-22

22 Necessary clearance from the Competent Authority for drawl of requisite quantity of water for the Project should be provided.

Not Applicable Water will be taken from existing tube bell of Village Bakhrija through tankers.


23 Description of water conservation measures proposed to be adopted in the Project should be given. Details of rainwater harvesting proposed in the Project, if any, should be provided.

The project do not consume any process water except for drinking, dust suppression and plantation. Plantation is proposed, which will increase the water holding capacity and help in recharging of ground water. Artificial rainwater harvesting is proposed for the present project and detail was given in the EIA/EMP Report.

Chapter 10, Item 10.6 , Table 10.1 and 10.2 Page 142-144 Chapter 7, Item 7.5, Figure 7.5, Page 122


Document No. 2016_VM_10117_Final EIA Page | xxv ToR Compliances

24 Impact of the project on the water quality, both surface and groundwater, should be assessed and necessary safeguard measures, if any required, should be provided.

Surface Water No permanent infrastructure will be developed which may intersect water table hence there will not be any adverse impact on the surface water. Ground Water The ground water quality will not be changed because mining activity will not intersect the ground water table as the ultimate depth of pit upto 92m bgl and water table is between 100m bgl below the surface level of 290m RL. Impact of the project on the water quality and its mitigation measures has been incorporated in the EIA/EMP report.

Chapter 5, Item 5.6, Figure 5.6 Page No.110

25 Based on actual monitored data, it may clearly be shown whether working will intersect groundwater. Necessary data and documentation in this regard may be provided. In case the working will intersect groundwater table, a detailed Hydro Geological Study should be undertaken and Report furnished. Necessary permission from Central Ground Water Authority for working below ground water and for pumping of ground water should also be obtained and copy furnished.

Maximum working depth: upto 92m General Ground water table: 100m bgl. Mining operations will be only upto 92m bgl from top level at the end of 5th year. So mine working will not be intersecting the ground water table. So mining depth will not intersect the ground water table. Hence permission is not required from CGWA. Systematic diagram of mining depth also incorporated in Chapter-5. Water will be sourced from the hired tankers; hence permission from CGWA is not applicable.

Chapter 5, Item 5.5, Figure 5.5 Page No.74

26 Details of any stream, seasonal or otherwise, passing through the lease area and modification /diversion proposed, if any, and the impact of the same on the hydrology should be brought out.

There is no stream modification/ diversion. It is opencast mechanized mining of stone along with associated mineral and mining is permitted only up to depth of 92 meter; hence there will be no stream diversion/ modifications.

----

27 Information on site elevation, working depth, groundwater table etc. Should be provided both in AMSL and bgl. A schematic diagram may also be provided for the same.

Maximum Working Depth: 92m at the end of 5th year Ground water Table: 100-110m bgl Site elevation: 290 to 308 m amsl Schematic diagram of mining depth also incorporated in Chapter-5.

Chapter 2, Table 2.3 and Page 14 Chapter 5, Item 5.5, Figure 5.5 Page No.74


Document No. 2016_VM_10117_Final EIA Page | xxvi ToR Compliances

28 A time bound Progressive Greenbelt Development Plan shall be prepared in a tabular form (indicating the linear and quantitative coverage, plant species and time frame) and submitted, keeping in mind, the same will have to be executed up front on commencement of the project.

A suitable combination of trees that can grow fast and also have good leaf cover shall be adopted to develop the greenbelt. It is proposed to plant 642 number/annum of native species along with some fruit bearing and medicinal trees during the plan period. Schedule of Plantation for the Five Years

Year Saplings to be planted

Survival Species Place of Plantation

I 515 512 Neem, Peepal, Ber, Shisham, Sirish, Babool, Gulmohar etc.

Along the roads, in schools and public building and other social forestry program.

II 618 495 III 638 511 IV 642 515 V 642 515

Total 3055 2548

Source: Mine Plan

Chapter 10, Item 10.6 , Table 10.1 and 10.2 Page 142

29 Impact on local transport infrastructure due to the Project should be indicated. Projected increase in truck traffic as a result of the Project in the present road network (including those outside the Project area) should be worked out, indicating whether it is capable of handling the incremental load. Arrangement for improving the infrastructure, if contemplated (including action to be taken by other agencies such as State Government) should be covered.

Impact on local transport infrastructure due to the project has been assessed. There will not be much impact on local transport. 627 PCU/hr will be increased in current traffic Scenario. Traffic density from the proposed mining activity has been incorporated in the EIA/EMP report and traffic study detailed enclosed as Annexure-IX.

Chapter 4, Item 4.9, Figure- 4.13 Page No. 43-45 Annexure-IX

30

Details of the onsite shelter and facilities to be provided to the mine workers should be included in the EIA report.

Adequate infrastructure and other facilities will be provided to mine worker. Information about onsite shelter and facilities for workers has been incorporated in Chapter-2.

Chapter 2, Item 2.15.3 and Page 23

31 Conceptual post mining land use and Reclamation and Restoration of mined out areas (with plans and with adequate number of sections) should be given in the EIA report.

Conceptual post mining Land use is incorporated in the EIA/EMP Report. The soil is also generated from joints and cracks due to mining and will be stacked in a temporary stack yard and will be used for plantation simultaneously.

Chapter 2, Item No 2.14, Table 2.10 and Page- 22 Chapter 2, Item 2.12 and Page 22

punit

Typewritten Text

punit

Typewritten Text

punit

Typewritten Text

punit

Typewritten Text

And

punit

Typewritten Text

as per DFO Mahendergarh.

punit

Typewritten Text

punit

Typewritten Text

punit

Typewritten Text

punit

Typewritten Text

punit

Typewritten Text

punit

Typewritten Text


Document No. 2016_VM_10117_Final EIA Page | xxvii ToR Compliances

32. A time bound Progressive Mine Closure Plan shall be prepared in a tabular form (indicating the linear and quantitative coverage plant species and time frame) and submitted. Keeping in mind, the same will have to be executed up front on commencement of the project. Phase-wise plan of restoration of land degraded by mining and compensatory afforestation should be charted clearly indicating the area to be covered under plantation and the species to be planted. The details of plantation already done should be given.

Chapter-7, Item 7.2, page 104

33 Occupational Health impacts of the Project should be anticipated and the proposed preventive measures spelt out in detail. Details of pre-placement medical examination and periodical medical examination schedules should be incorporated in the EMP.

The impact on OHS of employee and proper mitigation along with budgetary provision incorporated in Chapter-10. Person protective measures, pre-placement medical examination and periodical medical examination schedules, management plan have been furnished in the EIA report.

Chapter 5, Item 5.12 and Page 79 Chapter 10, Table 10.3, Page 146 Chapter-7, Item 7.3 Table 7.5, Page 106

34 Public health implications of the Project and related activities for the population in the impact zone should be systematically evaluated and the proposed remedial measures should be detailed along with budgetary allocations.

Public health implication like respiratory disorder, noise induced problems are major issues which will be addressed properly. Study has been performed which includes to gain an understanding of the source, identification of exposure pathway and determination of likely receptor. The impact will not be concentrated and confined to particular zone. Periodic health camps will be undertaken under CSR activities in the villages. Rs 26.00 Lakhs per year will be spent on Health check up camps, Surveillance program for the Public, Sanitation and drinking water facilities under ESR Cost. The budgetary allocations of for public health implication are incorporated in the EIA/EMP Report.

Chapter-7, Item 7.3 Table 7.5, Page 106


Document No. 2016_VM_10117_Final EIA Page | xxviii ToR Compliances

35 Measures of socio economic significance and influence to the local community proposed to be provided by the Project Proponent should be indicated. As far as possible, quantitative dimensions may be given with time frames for implementation.

Socio economic measures for the local people have been proposed under the component of the Corporate Social Responsibility along with the budgetary allocation have been incorporated in the EIA report. Proposed project will provide the employment opportunity to the local community hence project will have positive impact on the surrounding local community. An amount of Rs. 33.00 Lakhs per year is allocated for ESR activities. Detailed break up is incorporated in the EIA/EMP Report.

Chapter 7, Item 7.10, Table 7.11 Page 134

36 Detailed environmental management plan to mitigate the environmental impacts which, should inter-alia include the impacts of change of land use, loss of agricultural and grazing land, if any, occupational health impacts besides other impacts specific to the proposed Project.

Environmental management plan to mitigate the environmental impacts which inter-alia included the impacts of change of land use, loss of agricultural and grazing land, occupational health, air, water soil, noise, Socioeconomic and ecology; incorporated in the EIA/EMP Report.

Chapter-10, Item 10.8, Table 10.4 , Page 145-146

37 Public hearing points raised and commitment of the project proponent on the same along with time bound action plan to implement the same should be provided and also incorporated in the final EIA/EMP Report of the Project.

The Public Hearing was conducted on 03.06.2016 at 11.00 am at Mine Site in village-Bakhrija (Mahendergarh) and the Minutes of Public Hearing is enclosed as Annexure-XIV. The action plan with budget has been revised accordingly and incorporated at appropriate place in EIA/EMP Report.

--

38 Details of litigation pending against the project, if any, with direction /order passed by any Court of Law against the project should be given.

There is no court case against this project, however there is a court case in the matter of Mr. Rajbir Singh v/s State of Haryana and others [CWP No. 27700 of 2013], wherein the petitioner had challenged the conditions of the auction notice and the rules relating to payment of rent and compensation to the land owners. The State Government (Dept. of Mines and Geology) has issued LoI subject to the outcome of this case. The above mentioned case is dismissed by Hon’ble Punjab and Haryana High Court vide order dated 19-10-2015. The Project Proponent has not filed any court case against any department neither he is a party in this case.

---


Document No. 2016_VM_10117_Final EIA Page | xxix ToR Compliances

39 The cost of the project (capital cost and recurring cost) as well as the cost towards implementation of EMP should clearly be spelt out.

Head Cost Capital cost Rs.22.00 Crores EMP Rs. 35.00 Lakhs/ year ESR Rs. 33.00 Lakhs/ year OH&S Rs. 15.00 Lakhs/year Wildlife Conservation

Rs. 10.00 Lakhs

Chapter 11, Item 11.0 and Page 147

40 Details of Transportation of mined out materials as per the Indian Road Congress for both the ways (loaded as well unloaded trucks) load and its impact on Environment.

The details of Transportation are incorporated in the EIA/EMP Report and traffic study is enclosed as Annexure IX.

Chapter 4, Item 4.9, Page 43 Annexure IX

41 Details of excavation schedule & sequential mining plan to be indicated including depth of mining on year to year basis in terms of MSL.

The details of excavation schedule and sequential of mining are included in the EIA/EMP Report.

Chapter 2, Item 2.8.5, Page 20

42 Riverbed mining proposal should be in consonance with the sand mining guide line given by Ministry of Environment & Forest of Climate Change of Govt. of India. Annual Excavation proposed should never exceed the replenishment rate.

Not Applicable

43 The base line data shall be collected so as to represent the whole mine lease area.

The base line data has been collected from lease area along with 06 locations from 10 Km radius to represent the whole mine lease area and the also incorporated in the EIA/EMP Report.

Chapter 4

44 Letter from State Govt. of Forests Department that the Mining Lease Area (MLA) does not fall under forests land category and Aravali Plantation.

NOC from DFO, Mahendergarh vide letter no. 3639 dated 10.12.2015 is attached as Annexure IV.

Annexure IV

45 Details of continuous monitoring stations for Ambient Air Monitoring to be carried out in each block in the core zone area.

The continuous monitoring has been done for Ambient Air quality. Detailed Report has been annexed as Annexure VI.

Annexure VI

46 Disaster Management Plan. The Disaster Management Plan has been prepared and incorporated in EIA/EMP report.

Chapter 7, Item 7.4 and Page 116


Document No. 2016_VM_10117_Final EIA Page | xxx ToR Compliances

47 Project proponent shall furnish all the analysis/testing reports of water, air, soil, noise etc. using the MoEF/NABL accredited laboratories. All the original analysis/testing reports should be made available during appraisal of the project.

All the analysis/testing has been done by Mantech Environmental Laboratries which is MoEF&CC Recognized and NABL Accredited, Certificate No. T-1417 is enclosed as Annexure V.

Annexure V

48 Details of outcome of the court case in CWP No. 27700 of 2013 before the Hon’ble High Court of Punjab & Haryana as mentioned in the LoI letter issued by the Mines & Geology Department of State Govt. of Haryana.

The mentioned case is dismissed by Hon’ble Punjab and Haryana High Court vide order dated 19-10-2015.

49 Impact of all existing mines on the present land use in the study area.

The impact of all existing mines on present land use in the study area has been incorporated in Chapter 5.

Chapter 5,

50 Details of other Associated minor minerals need to provided.

Only Stone (minor mineral) will be excavated during mining activity.

1. Besides the above , the below mentioned general points are also to be followed:-

a) All documents to be properly referenced with index and continuous page numbering. Compiled b) Where data are presented in the Report especially in Tables, the period in which the data were collected and the sources should be

indicated. Indicated

c) Project Proponent shall enclose all the analysis/testing reports of water, air, soil, noise etc. using the MoEF&CC/NABL accredited laboratories. All original analysis/testing reports should be available during appraisal of the project.

Enclosed

d) Where the documents provided are in language other than English, an English translation should be provided. Provided

e) The Questionnaire for environmental appraisal of mining projects as devised earlier by the Ministry shall be filled and submitted. Enclosed

f) While preparing the EIA report, the instructions for the proponents and instructions for the Consultants issued by MoEF vide O.M. No. J-11013/41/2006-IA.II(I) dated 4th August, 2009, which are available on the website of this Ministry, should be followed.

Followed

g) Changes, if any made in the basic scope and project parameters (as submitted in Form-1 and the PFR for securing TOR) should be brought to the attention of MoEF&CC with reasons for such changes and the permission should be sought, as the TOR may also have to be altered. Post Public Hearing changes in structure and content of the draft EIA/EMP (other than modifications arising out of the P.H. process) will entail conducting the PH again with the revised documentation.

No Modifications done

h) As per the circular no. J-11011/618/2010-IA.II(I) dated 30.05.2012 certified report of the status of compliance of the conditions stipulated in the environment clearance for the existing operations of the project, should be obtained from Regional officer of Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change, as may be applicable.

Included


Document No. 2016_VM_10117_Final EIA Page | xxxi ToR Compliances

i) The EIA report should also include (i) surface plan of the area indicating contours of main topographic features, drainage and mining area, (ii) geological maps and sections and (ii) sections of the mine pit and external dumps, if any, clearly showing the land features of the adjoining area.

Included

2. The prescribed ToRs would be valid for a period of two years for submission o f the EIA/EMP reports, as per the O.M. No. J-11013/41/2006-IA.II(I) dated 22.03.2010.

Noted

3. After preparing the draft EIA (as per the generic structure prescribed in Appendix-III of the EIA Notification, 2006) covering the above mentioned issues, the proponent will get the public hearing conducted and take further necessary action for obtaining environmental clearance in accordance with the procedure prescribed under the EIA Notification, 2006.

4. Detail calculation of water requirement for various purposes with permissions.

Total Water Requirement= 40.0 KLD Dust Suppression = 21.0 KLD Plantation = 15.0 KLD Domestic Purpose = 4.0 KLD Detail calculation of water requirement is given in Chapter 2. This water will be supplied from the existing tube well of Village Bakhrija Tehsil Narnaul, District- Mahendergarh through hired tankers.


5. Permission of Competent Authority (DGMS) regarding mine safety. After grant of EC & CTE/CTO from HSPCB and before start of mining after the necessary permission from DGMS will be obtained.

6. Impact of vibration due to use of explosive on surround area along with mitigating measures.

Impact and mitigation measures of vibration due to use of explosive is given in Chapter 5.

Chapter 5, Item 5.7, Page 76

7. No mining activity shall be conducted within 500 meters from any hydraulic structure, bridges, pumping stations etc.

As per Part-II ‘Restrictions as to the exercise of the liberties by the lessee’ in Minor Mineral Concession Rule, 2012, the mining activity will not conducted within a distance of 75m meters from any hydraulic structure, bridges, pumping stations etc.

Will be complied

8. Impact of movement of transportation for carrying mined material on Ambient Air and surrounding area including traffic congestion on roads.

The details of Transportation are incorporated in Chapter 4 of this EIA/EMP Report and traffic study is enclosed as Annexure IX.

Chapter 4, Item 4.9, Page 43 Annexure IX


Document No. 2016_VM_10117_Final EIA Page | xxxii ToR Compliances

9. No mining activity shall be conducted within 250 meters from outer periphery of major district roads, national highway, state highway and defined village abadi.

-- Will be complied

10. Impact on Ambient Air and mitigative measures for the same along with appropriate plan.

The overall impact on air quality due to proposed mining project is expected to be low extending to close vicinity of mining lease area and in proximity of unpaved haul roads only. The Impact on Ambient Air and mitigative measures are given in Chapter 5.

Chapter 5, Item 5.4 , Page 72

11. Plan for controlling water pollution especially from domestic effluent.

Waste water will be generated through domestic use only which will be disposed off in septic tank /soak pit. Detail given in Chapter 5.

Chapter 5, Item 5.5 and figure 5.6, Page 74-75

12. Rain water harvesting proposal to be given in detail. Rainwater harvesting detail is given in Chapter 7. Chapter 7, Item 7.5, Figure 7.5, Page 122

13. Replenishment study report in case of river sand gravel mining proposal.

Not Applicable

14. Mining activity shall not change course of river/canal/other water bodies.

Not Applicable

15. NOC from forest department for project site. NOC from DFO, Mahendergarh vide letter no. 3639 dated 10.12.2015 is attached as Annexure IV.

Annexure IV

16. The PP shall comply with all guidelines of MoEF&CC and any orders passed by Hon’ble Supreme Court/High Court/ NGT.

- Complied

17. NOC from wildlife. Not Applicable as no Ecological Sensitive Area, National Park, Wildlife Sanctuary, Biosphere reserve are present in the 10 Km radius of the study area.

-

18. Permission from Irrigation Department for sand mining from river/ canal bed and band area.

Not Applicable -

19. Width of Bench shall never be less than bench height. Will be complied 20. No mechanized mining shall be done in river bed in view of orders

of Hon’ble NGT. No mining shall be done in river bed during monsoon period.

Not Applicable

21. PP shall not exceed the production of mineral than the production figures mentioned in approved mining plan.

-- Will be complied


Document No. 2016_VM_10117_Final EIA Page | xxxiii ToR Compliances

22. Replenishment and drainage study from the reputed institution. Replenishment study was Not Applicable for this project. Drainage Study was conducted by Shri Arun Kumar Yadav, Mining Engineer who is Registered Qualified Person from Indian Bureau of Mines for prepare the mining plan and Mine closure plan for all kind of mineral throughout India. His license no. is RQP/AJM/346/2013/B. He conducted detailed drainage study of lease area and he also submitted this study in the Mining Plan and Mining Closure Plan of this area which is duly approved by the DMG Haryana vide letter no. DMG/HY/ML/Bakhrija-4/2015/8564 dated 21/10/2015. Same Result incorporated in this EIA/EMP

23. Impact of mining activity on adjacent agricultural and with particular reference to run off, soil erosion and loss of top soil due to change in topography.

Impact and mitigation measure for soil due to mining is incorporated in the EIA/EMP Report.

Chapter 5, Item 5.6, Page75

24. Details of Transportation of mined out materials as per the Indian Road Congress for both the ways (loaded as well as unloaded trucks) load and its impact on Environment.

The details of Transportation are incorporated in the EIA/EMP Report.

Chapter 5, Item 5.4, Page 72

25. Impact of all existing mining on the present land use in the study area.

The impact of all existing mines on present land use in the study area has been incorporated in the EIA/EMP Report.

Chapter 2, Item 2.3.3, Page 10

26. Details of excavation schedule & sequential mining plan. The details of excavation schedule and sequential of mining are included in the EIA/EMP Report.

Chapter 2,

Document No. 2016_VM_10117_Final EIA Page | 1 (Chapter-1)


CHAPTER-1

INTRODUCTION 1.0 PRELUDE EIA is different from other decision-making tools like environment audit, which is conducted on existing projects, while the EIA is applied to new projects and the expansion of existing projects. EIA uses the techniques of science, economics, sociology, geology etc while assessing the project because it is dealing with events, which have not yet occurred, may not occur, but whose chances of occurrence may be strong in future. There are various other tools like energy analysis, cost-benefit analysis, environment management systems and risk analysis. EIA is by far the most suitable tool for any proposed project. It is also one of the most popular decision-making tools and has been integrated in the regulatory system of many countries. We have collected data for one season i.e. from 1st December to 29th February 2015. The ToR was issued on date 27.01.2016 by SEAC Panchkula, Haryana vide letter no. HR/SEAC/208/527. The lessee has submitted EIA report for conducting public hearing to Haryana State Pollution Control Board. Accordingly Haryana State Pollution Control Board has conducted public hearing on 03rd June, 2016 and a copy of the public hearing minutes and compliance of the management on the issues raised during public hearing is incorporated in the Final EIA/EMP Report. 1.1 DETAILS OF MINING ACTIVITY, LOI AND CONSULTANT In the e-Auction held on 07.10.2015 and 08.10.2015 on the State Government Web Portal, M/s Gradient Business Consulting Pvt. Ltd., 6/92, Vidhyadhar Nagar,Jaipur-302039, Rajasthan has offered highest bid of Rs.32,50,50,000/- as against the reserve price of Rs. 30,42,00,000/- per annum for obtaining the mining lease of minor minerals mines namely “Bakhrija Plot-4 Stone Block” over an area of 34.64 Ha. falling in Village- Bakhrija, Tehsil- Narnaul, District- Mahendergarh (Haryana). Letter of Intent: The letter of intent (LoI) has been issued by the Director of Mines & Geology department, Haryana vide Memo no. DMG/HY/ML/Bakhrija-4/2015/8564 dated 21.10.2015 in favor of M/s Gradient Business Consulting Pvt. Ltd. for mining of stone (Copy of LOI has been enclosed as Annexure-I). Lease Period: 10 Years Mine Plan & Progressive Mine Closure Plan: Mining Plan & Progressive Mine Closure Plan of proposed mining lease area was approved by the Director General of Mines and Geology Department, Haryana vide letter No. DMG/HY/MP/ Bakhrija-4/2015/431-434 dated 07.01.2016. It is prepared by RQP Sh. Arun Kumar Yadav, M/s Ovearseas Min-Tech Consultants (RQP No. RQP/AJM/346/2013/B) (Copy of Approved letter of Mining Plan & Progressive Mine Closure Plan has attached as Annexure-II). Environment Consultant: Earlier the lessee has hired an Environment consultant, M/s Mantech Consultant Pvt. Ltd., Noida in the month of November, 2015. Due to some technical reason the Project Proponent changed the Environment Consultant and hired M/s Vardan Environet D-142, Sec-57, Sushant Lok-III, Gurgaon, Haryana (QCI/NABET Accreditation Certificate No: NABET/EIA/1316/IA001) on dated 10.02.2016 for preparation of Environment Impact Assessment Report for obtaining Environment Clearance from MoEF&CC/SEIAA. Category “B1”: As per EIA Notification dated 14th September, 2006 and MoEF&CC Notification dated 15.01.2016 this project falls under Category “B1”, 1(a), as lease area is exceeding more than 25 hectares and less than 50 hectares. It is in this context, Environment Clearance application i.e. Form-I and Pre-Feasibility Report has been submitted online to SEIAA, Haryana on 25.11.2015 and requesting for issue of “Terms of Reference” (ToR). The ToR presentation was held on 13.01.2016 in SEAC Haryana. Subsequently the ToR was issued on dated 27.01.2016 by SEAC, Haryana vide F. No. HR/SEAC/208/527 (enclosed as Annexure-III). For baseline data collection the study period as per ToR issued by SEAC, Haryana dated 27.01.2016 is Winter Season i.e.1st December, 2015 to 29th February, 2016. 1.2 IDENTIFICATION OF PROJECT AND PROJECT PROPONENT 1.2.1 Identification of Project Proponent

Name and Address Authorized Person Name Age Designation



M/s Gradient Business Consulting Pvt. Ltd.

Address-6/92, Vidhyadhar Nagar, Jaipur-302039, Rajasthan

Mr. Dal chand Chauhan 48 Authorized

Signatory/ Vice President

1.2.2 Identification of the Project Name of the Project: Stone along with associated minor mineral of “Bakhrija Plot-4”, Mine Lease Area–34.64 Hectares. Location of the Project: Village- Bakhrija, Tehsil- Narnaul, District- Mahendergarh (Haryana). 1.3 BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF NATURE, SIZE, LOCATION OF THE PROJECT

Table1.1 Brief Description of the Project S. No. Particulars Details A. Nature and Size of the

Project Stone along with Associated minor mineral of “Bakhrija Plot-4” Mine Lease Area–34.64 Ha.) for production of 75.24 Lac TPA. (the mining lease area is exceeding more than 25 ha. snd less than 50 ha.).

B. Location Name of Unit Khasra Number Area of Block in ha. Bakhrija Plot-2 89 min, 90, 91, 92, 93, 101 min, 102 min

and 103. 34.64

Total 34.64 ha. Village Bakhrija Tehsil Narnaul District Mahendergarh State Haryana Coordinates

Latitude and Longitude of Bakhrija Plot-4

Pillar Latitude Longitude 1 27054'43.50'' 76003'14.21'' 2 27054'43.69'' 76002'49.25'' 3 27054'42.91'' 76002'49.10'' 4 27054'41.95'' 76002'51.36'' 5 27054'39.02'' 76002'50.63'' 6 27054'39.35'' 76002'47.60'' 7 27054'35.09'' 76002'47.21'' 8 27054'34.19'' 76002'47.77'' 9 27054'34.11'' 76002'58.92'' 10 27054'30.25'' 76002'58.88'' 11 27054'30.23'' 76003'01.53'' 12 27054'31.03'' 76003'01.89'' 13 27054'32.02'' 76003'02.44'' 14 27054'32.81'' 76003'03.06'' 15 27054'33.44'' 76003'03.79'' 16 27054'33.64'' 76003'04.41'' 17 27054'33.58'' 76003'05.34'' 18 27054'33.41'' 76003'06.42'' 19 27054'32.86'' 76003'07.05'' 20 27054'32.39'' 76003'07.49'' 21 27054'31.12'' 76003'07.63'' 22 27054'31.13'' 76003'07.31'' 23 27054'30.84'' 76003'08.00'' 24 27054'29.49'' 76003'08.46'' 25 27054'27.51'' 76003'11.00''



26 27054'28.56'' 76003'10.89'' 27 27054'28.41'' 76003'11.62'' 28 27054'27.39'' 76003'11.58'' 29 27054'27.37'' 76003'12.28'' 30 27054'25.95'' 76003'12.47'' 31 27054'25.78'' 76003'12.84'' 32 27054'27.02'' 76003'13.52'' 33 27054'26.51'' 76003'15.92'' 34 27054'28.54'' 76003'17.82'' 35 27054'29.94'' 76003'18.02'' 36 27054'29.99'' 76003'18.79'' 37 27054'27.38'' 76003'19.31'' 38 27054'26.55'' 76003'20.82'' 39 27054'27.52'' 76003'21.89'' 40 27054'30.30'' 76003'22.14'' 41 27054'30.90'' 76003'22.78'' 42 27054'32.42'' 76003'22.54'' 43 27054'33.32'' 76003'22.64'' 44 27054'33.98'' 76003'22.87'' 45 27054'35.30'' 76003'23.22'' 46 27054'35.63'' 76003'22.67'' 47 27054'37.12'' 76003'22.31'' 48 27054'37.14'' 76003'23.46'' 49 27054'38.57'' 76003'23.38'' 50 27054'39.75'' 76003'21.73'' 51 27054'40.52'' 76003'19.91'' 52 27054'41.06'' 76003'18.26'' 53 27054'41.17'' 76003'15.59'' 54 27054'41.40'' 76003'14.19''

Toposheet (OSM) No. 45M/13, 54A/1, H43/W4 C. Lease Area Details Lease Area 34.64 Ha.

Type of Land Govt. waste Land (Gair Mumkin Pahar) Topography Flat terrain with some undulations, generally stopping and rocky Site Elevation Range 308 m AMSL to 290m AMSL

D. Cost Details Cost of the project Rs. 22.00 Crores

Cost for EMP Rs. 35.00 Lakhs Per Year Cost of ESR Rs. 33.00 Lakhs Per Year Cost of OH&S Rs. 15.00 Lakhs Per Year Cost of Conservation Rs. 10.00 Lakhs E. Details of Environmental Setting Ecological Sensitive

Areas (National Park, Wild Life Sanctuary, Biosphere Reserve, Reserve/ Protected Forest etc.) within 10 Km radius

No Ecological Sensitive Area, National Park, Wildlife Sanctuary, Biosphere reserve are present in the 10 Km radius of the study area. Only protected forest present within the 10 Km of the project area.

Panchnota Protected Forest, 5.2 Km in SW, Minaka Nangal PF, 8.4 Km in S. Balupura PF, 8.1Km in NW

Archaeological Important Place

None within 10 Km radius of the project



Nearest Town Narnaul – 17.7 Km in NE Nearest major city with 200000 population

Mahendergarh- 40.8 Km in NE

Nearest Railway Station Nizampur Railway station – 7.0 Km in NW direction Nearest National Highway

NH -8, 21.3 Km in East, SH-17, 7.7 Km in NW

Nearest Airport Jaipur International Airport, Jaipur – 122.2 Km in SW Seismic Zone Zone III

(Source: Site visit /Baseline Data and Pre-feasibility Report) All corner-coordinates of ML area are superimposed on Toposheet (OSM No.) 45M/13, 54A/1, H43/W4 of survey of India and same has been furnished here in the Figure 1.1.

Figure 1.1: Key Plan showing the Environmental Settings of the Study area along with the Coordinates of Mine Lease area

1.3.1 Location and Accessibility The mine site is located in the revenue estates of Villages Bakhrija in Distt. Mohindergarh, Haryana and is about 17.7 Km from Narnaul, District Mahendergarh, The lease area lies between the latitudinal parallel falling in the survey of India Topo Sheet No. 54-A/1. The lease area is located on the katcha road and then a metalled road connecting Narnaul to Nangal Chaudhary via Dholera- Meghot and is easily approachable from Nangal Chaudhary, Narnaul and other important towns. The site is approachable 21.3 Km from NH-1 in East direction. From the contract area, an unmetalled road joins a metalled road which further joins the NH -8, SH -17 and SH-14. 1.3.2 Basic Amenities • Police Station: The nearest police station is Nangal Chaudhary - which is about 6.00 Km, SE from mining

site. • Post Office: The nearest post office is Dholera Post Office at a distance of 2 Km, N from the mining site. • Medical Facilities: The nearest hospital is Public Health Care, Dholera are situated 1.82 Km, NE from

mining site.



• Availability of water: Water for drinking purpose is brought from nearby village. The water of hand pump and well located nearby area has potable and drinkable quality, the villagers and habitants and labors have been using this water since long period. Water required for dust suppression will also supplied from the well by Water tanker brought on hire basis.

• Electricity: Electrical supply is available in all nearby villages. • Educational Facilities: Most of the nearby villages have secondary schools like Islampura and for higher

education institutes are available at Narnaul, Mahendergarh and other nearby towns. • Mode of transportation of Mineral: From the contract area, an unmetalled road joins a metalled road which

further joins the District road to NH -8 (21.3 Km, E), SH-17 (7.7 Km, NW). Mineral Stone will be transported by trucks. Loaded trucks will travel on Kuccha road made for plying of trucks. No. of such temporary road will provide access to the mine site and the movement of loaded trucks. Mine site has its outlet meeting the tar road on the nearby villages and from where the mineral is sent to various destinations. Similarly, mineral will be transported on the other side through approach roads which finally merge with tar roads for final destinations.

• River/ Canal: Krishnawati River (Dry River), 5.0 Km in East. 1.4 SCOPE OF STUDY The scope of the study includes a detailed characterization of the environment in an area of 10 Km. radius of the Mine Lease Area for various environmental parameters like Air, Water, Noise, and Land, Biological and Socio-economic aspects. 1.4.1 Preparation of EIA The EIA includes the following details:

1) Study of the reports like Geological report, Pre-Feasibility Report (PFR) or mining plan made available by the client.

2) Present Environmental Setting 3) Identification, prediction and evaluation of Anticipated Environmental Impact due to the proposed

mine and related facilities. The environmental impacts would be anticipated in core and buffer zone on:

• Topography and drainage, • Climate, • Water quality (Surface/Ground), • Hydro-geological Regime, • Air quality, • Noise Levels, • Soil Quality, • Flora and Fauna, • Traffic density survey, • Land-Use, • Socio-Economic Conditions, • Habitat, • Health, culture, human environment including public health, occupational health and safety • Sensitive Places/Historical Monuments.

This EIA Report is prepared in accordance with has been divided into twelve chapters (in addition to Executive Summary) as briefed hereunder:

Chapter 1 – Introduction The chapter provides description of project background, site and surroundings, objectives, scope and organisation of the study and format of this report. Chapter 2 – Project Description This chapter provides information on project and capacity; need for the project; location; size or magnitude of operation; technology and process description; maps showing project layout, component of projects etc. Chapter 3 – Description of the Environment This chapter deals with the methodology and findings of field studies undertaken with respect to ambient air, meteorology, water, soils, noise levels, ecology to define the various existing environmental status in the area of the project. This also deals with the infrastructural development as a part of project and sources of pollution from the proposed mining project.



Chapter 4 – Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures In this chapter, the potential impacts of the proposed mining and allied activities, which could cause significant environmental concerns, are identified and discussed. This discussion will form the basis for environmental management activities. Chapter 5 – Analysis of Alternatives (Technology and Site) This chapter will include a comparison of alternatives in this chapter to determine the best method of achieving the project objectives with minimum environmental impacts or indicates the most environmentally friendly and cost effective options, if any. Chapter 6 – Environmental Monitoring Program This chapter will include ascertaining the environmental impacts; state of pollution within the mine lease and in its vicinity; planning for predictive or corrective actions in respect of pollution to keep it within permissible limits. Chapter 7 – Additional Studies This chapter will include outcomes of public consultation, risk assessment, social impact assessment, R&R action plan, biodiversity conservation plan, watershed management etc. Chapter 8 – Project Benefits This chapter deals with improvements in the physical infrastructure, social infrastructure, employment potential and other tangible benefits due to proposed project activity. Chapter 9 – Environmental Cost Benefit Analysis This chapter includes environmental value enhancement (biodiversity, crop productivity, eco tourism etc.) Chapter 10 – Environmental Management Plan This chapter will include the description of administrative aspects of ensuring that the mitigation measures suggested are implemented and their effectiveness is monitored, after approval of the EIA. Chapter 11 – Summary This will constitute the summary of EIA Report. Chapter 12 – Disclosure of Consultant This will includes the names of the consultants engaged in preparation of EIA and nature of consultancy rendered. 1.5 LAWS APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT The Acts, Notifications, Rules and Amendments applicable for setting up a new mining industry or its expansion of an existing mine and for operation of a mine include the following:

The Environment (Protection) Act and Rules, 1986;

• The Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) Notification, 1994 and amendments- for Environmental Clearance – including the Environmental Public Hearing a mandatory for the 30 categories of industries; • Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980;

• The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, Rules and Amendment, 1981, 1982, 1983, 1987;

• The Factories Act and Amendment, 1948, 1987; • The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act and Rules, 1974, 1975; • The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Cess Act and Rules, 1977, 1978, 1991; • The Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991; • The Environmental Standards Notification, 1993, 1996; • The Environmental Audit Notification, 1992; • Hazardous Waste Management and Handling Rules, 1989 and amendment rules 2000; • The Manufacture, Storage and Import of the Hazardous Chemical Rules, 1989 and amendment

rules 2000; and • The National Environment Tribunal Act, 1995.

Note:

1. Some environment, health and safety related aspects are also covered under the Indian Factories Act, 1948.

2. MoEF has stipulated general discharge standards for water effluents and general emission standards for air emissions. These standards limit the concentration and volumes of the effluents



and emissions released to the atmosphere. These standards could be made more stringent by the SPCBs based on the environmental sensitivity of a specific location.

3. The project proponents are required to take Consents (for both air and water) and No Objection Certificates (NOCs) from the relevant SPCBs before initiating any activity.

In addition to the above, CPCB has also specified National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS) for residential, commercial, industrial and sensitive zones for the country as a whole.



CHAPTER-2

PROJECT DESCRIPTION 2.0 GENERAL This chapter gives broad description of the project, location, type of ore deposit(s), quality of reserve, Mining Methodology, various site utilities and infrastructure, etc. The downstream use of mineral for value addition and its importance is also described. 2.1 TYPE OF THE PROJECT The project is proposed for mining of “Stone along with associated minor minerals” over an area of 34.64 ha. with production capacity of 75,24,225 TPA in Village Bakhrija, Tehsil Narnaul, District Mahendergarh, Haryana by M/s Gradient Business Consulting Pvt. Ltd. It is an opencast mechanized mining project to excavate Stone along with associated minor minerals. 2.2 NEED FOR THE PROJECT The said project plays a significant role in the domestic as well as infrastructural market. Achieving a huge infrastructure as being envisaged by Government of India particularly in road and housing sector requires basic building materials. The stone is one of primary building material required for the purpose. The mining activities as proposed are the backbone of all construction and infrastructure projects as the raw material for construction is available only from such mining. The stone extracted will be consumed by the Stone crusher of district Mahendergarh itself and further transported to Stone Crusher Zones of Naurangpur, Shikopur, Rasiena of Dist Gurgaon as well as stone crusher zone of Pali and Mohtabad of Dist Faridabad. The raw stone as well as the crushed material of stone is in high demand in real estate, construction projects as well as in building construction projects. 2.3 DESCRIPTION OF MINE LEASE AREA The project is proposed for mining of “Stone along with associated minor minerals” over an area of 34.64 ha. in Village Bakhrija, Tehsil Narnaul, District Mahendergarh, Haryana. The lease area falls in Survey of India Toposheet (OSM) No. 45M/13, 54A/1, H43/W4 The lease coordinates are listed in Chapter 1. 2.3.1 Location of Lease Hold Area The lease hold area of 34.64 ha lies inside the Riverbed of Yamuna. The general location and project site layout are given below:

Figure 2.1: Location Map of the Project Site

INDIA

Location of Lease Area



Figure 2.2: Digitalized Key Plan showing the Environmental Settings of the Study area along with the

Coordinates of Mine Lease area 2.3.2 Site History Bakhrija plot-4 is a Stone Mining at Mahendergarh Mahendragarh is a town and a municipal committee in Mahendragarh district in the north Indian state of Haryana. It takes only 2 hours to reach Mahendragarh and is 115.0 KM away from Gurgaon and comes underNational Capital Region (India). Mahendragarh is located at 28.28°N 76.15°E. It has an average elevation of 262 metres (859 feet). The allotted area for mining is having flat terrain with some undulations, generally slopping and rocky. The highest point in the lease area is recorded to be 308m AMSL and the lowest point recorded is 290m AMSL. The Mahendergarh district is the domain of dry-land topography throughout. Presence of inland streams, sandy plain, shifting sand dunes devoid of vegetation, fixed or fossil sand dunes, dissected upland tract, and often barren, denuded rocky hill ranges and their outcrops provide an ensemble of terrain features truly associated with semi-arid to arid environment.

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Municipal_committee

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mahendragarh_district

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/India

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/States_and_territories_of_India

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Haryana

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/National_Capital_Region_(India)

https://tools.wmflabs.org/geohack/geohack.php?pagename=Mahendragarh&params=28.28_N_76.15_E_



Figure 2.3(a): Google Image (Short View) of the Project Site

Figure2.3(b): Google Image (Long View) of the Project Site

2.3.3 Proposed project Near By Project Site Three mining project are present in 10 Km radius S.No. Name of Proposed Mining Direction Distance

1. Mining of Stone Along with associated Minor Mineral at Bakhrija Plot-1(ML Area-11.26Ha.)

N Near Mine site

2. Mining of Stone Along with associated Minor Mineral at Bakhrija Plot-2 (ML Area- 21.65 Ha.)

N Near Mine site

3. Mining of Stone Along with associated Minor Mineral at Bakhrija Plot-3(ML Area- 40.62 Ha.)

N Near Mine site



Figure 2.4: Map of the Proposed Mining Project are present in 10 Km Radius

2.4 MINING AREA The proponent has been granted an area of 34.64 Ha. on contract as per LoI. The mining department has taken prior clarification from the Forest department before putting it into the auction. Hence this area is free from the forest. However, The NOC from DFO, Mahendergarh vides his letter no. 3639 dated 10.12.2015 is attached as Annexure IV.

Table 2.1: Details of Mining

2.4.1 Topography of the Area The Mahendergarh district is the domain of dry-land topography throughout. Presence of inland streams, sandy plain, shifting sand dunes devoid of vegetation, fixed or fossil sand dunes, dissected upland tract, and often barren, denuded rocky hill ranges and their outcrops provide an ensemble of terrain features truly associated with semi-arid to arid environment.

S. No. Particulars Details 1. Method of Mining Open Cast Mechanized with Blasting and Drilling.

2. Geological Reserves 7,55,30,043 MT

3. Mineable Reserves 6,93,30,254 MT

4. Proposed Production 75,24,225 TPA

5. Elevation Range of the Mine Site 308 m amsl to 290 m amsl 6. Bench Height 10m

7. Working Bench Width More than height of the bench

8. Depth of pit (end of 5th year) 92m (198m amsl)

9. Bench Slope 490



2.4.2 Geology 2.4.2.1 Regional Geology The rocks of Delhi Supergroup constitute a part of the main Aravalli Range, originating from Gujarat, in the South West to Haryana in the North East. This super group comprises thick pile of meta-sediments having a cumulative thickness of 6000 m, which is divided into an older Alwar Group and younger Ajabgarh Group. The Alwar Group is dominantly arenaceous with argillaceous intercalations while the Ajabgarh Group is dominantly argillaceous with arenaceous and calcareous components. The demarcation between the groups, in the absence of any unconformity, is based on faces variation, structural discontinuity and lithological characteristics in the rocks exposed in the adjacent state of Rajasthan. The rocks of both these groups are intruded by acid and basic intrusives. The rocks of Alwar Group in Haryana are represented by Bayal- Panchnota Formation, which is equivalent to Pratapgarh Formation, the youngest formation of Alwar Group in Rajasthan. The rocks belonging to this group are exposed in two sectors in South Western and South Eastern Haryana. In the South Western sector, these rocks are exposed as linear deposition trending NE - SW ridges, consisting of quartzite. These ridges are exposed in Bayal-Panchnota, Sareli-Tehla- Mukundpura, Ruppursarai - Narhedi, Sohla, Nimbi, Narnaul, Khodana and Kaliana areas. In the South East, prominent exposures are found around Khori Khurd, Khori Kalan and Shikarpur. The regional strike varies from N150 E-S150 W to N 450 ES450 W with vertical to steep dips to the NW or SE. The metapelitic rocks exposed in Tosham area are associated with rhyolite and granite, and are tentatively clubbed under undifferentiated Ajabgarh Group, till further classification. The detailed stratigraphic sequence of the Delhi Super group of rocks in Haryana is given in Table 2.2.

Table 2.2 Stratigraphic Sequence of the Delhi Super group of rocks in Haryana Super Group

Group Formation Lithology

Delhi Supergroup

Ajabgarh Group

Tasing Formation

Slate with minor phyllite Phyllite, carbonaceous phyllite, slate, rhythmite with quartzite Phyllite, slate,quartzite (locally)

Asarwas Formation Current bedded quartzite with

phyllite Sericite quartzite with slate and phyllite Thanaghazi Formation

Carbonaceous phyllite with ash/tuff, bands

Deota-Dantal Formation

Brecciated quartzite interbedded with schist and phyllite

Golwa-Gangutana Formation

F Quartzite, amphibole quartzite and mica-schist

E Impure marble, calc amphibole-schist and amphibole quartzite

D Tremolite marble with quartzite, K-feldspar biotite-schist and magnetite quartzite

C K-feldspar mica-schist

B Garnet-schist, Kyanite- schist, banded marble and calc-silicate

A K-feldspar biotite schist,marble, amphibole quartzite, biotite schist

Alwar Group

Bayal-Panchnota Formation

Cross bedded ripple marked quartzite Massive, Feldspathic, gritty quartzite, amphibolite, amphibole -quartzite, minor Marble, chlorite-schist etc.



Figure 2.5: Geomorphology of Haryana (Source: GSI)

Figure 2.6: Geological and Mineral Map of Haryana (Source: GSI)

2.4.2.2 Local Geology Geologically rocks of the allotted area belonging to Alwar Group. Quartzite is the major litho-unit in the area. The stratigraphic sequence of the litho-unit present in the area is as follows:

Sub Recent-Recent - Alluvium

Alwar Group Bayal-Panchnota Formation

Hard, Black, Banded Haematite Quartzite of varying Thickness

To understand the structural configuration of the allotted area, surface geological mapping has been done on a scale of 1:2000. Geological cross-sections and longitudinal section have been prepared on a scale 1:2000. At present only Quartzite is exposed in the area. (Source: Approved Mine Plan of Bakhrija Plot 4)

Project Site

Project Site



2.4.3 Physiography and Drainage There are two rivers namely Dohan and Krishnawati which passing through the district. Krishnawati River is originated from the the hillocks of Sikar district of Rajasthan and Dohan is originated from the hillocks near Khetri. Both the rivers remaind dry except during rainy days. Physiographicaly the district consists of flat and level plain interrupted from place to place by clusters of sand dunes, isolated hillocks and rocky ridges. A few isolated rocky ridges elevated sharply from the plain occur in the west and south west portion of the district. The lease area does not have any water body. The surface area is stoy terrain in which water flows during rains for a short duration, otherwise they remain dry for the rest of the months. The rain water from this area drains either into local Johars or in agriculture fields. The working faces will be advanced with a mild upward gradient to facilitate the drainage. The water shall be gradually drained from the upper most bench to the lowest bench and then ultimately to the sump. Similarly in the ultimate pit position, large sump will be provided at the pit bottom to accumulate drained water as well as direct rain water. Drainage patter of study area is shown in Fig. 2.4.

Table 2.3: Details of Site Elevation Lowest Elevation

(m amsl) Highest Elevation

(m amsl) Working Depth

Ground Water Table

(bgl) 290 308 92 m (from ground level)

Upto 198 m amsl 110-120m bgl

(Source: Approved Mine Plan of Bakhrija Plot 4) 2.4.4 Climate The climate of Mahendergarh district can be classified as tropical steppe, semi -arid and hot which is mainly dry with very hot summer and cold winter except during monsoon season when moist air of oceanic origin penetrates into the district. There are four seasons in a year. The hot weather season starts from mid-March to last week of the June followed by the southwest monsoon which lasts up to September. The transit ion period from September to October forms the post –monsoon season. The winter season starts late in November and remains up to first week of March. 2.4.5 Rainfall The normal annual rainfall of the district, based on the record for the period 2004-2013 is 170.9-827.5 mm. About 80% of the annual rainfall is recorded during the southwest monsoon from June-September. August is the wettest month of the year with 246.9 mm rainfall. During the period 2004-2013, deficient to scanty Rainfall was recorded in 10 years. 2.5 SEISMICITY OF THE AREA Many parts of the Indian subcontinent have historically high Seismicity. Seven catastrophic earthquakes of magnitude greater than 8 (Richter scale) have occurred in the western, northern and eastern parts of India and adjacent countries in the past 100 years. By contrast, peninsular India is relatively less seismic, suffered only infrequent earthquakes of moderate type. The main seismogenic belts are associated with the collision plate boundary between the Indian and Eurasian plates. The project site falls under seismic zone III which is moderate damage risk zone (MSK VII). The IS code assigns zone factor of 0.16 for zone III. The loss estimation outcome based on the census data of Haryana State, projected deaths and injuries calculated by researcher are tabulated below.

Table 2.4: Loss Estimation at State Level

State Population (Census, 2011) Injuries Deaths Haryana 2,53,53,081 15,04,200 3,23,400

Table 2.5: Loss Estimation at District Level

S.No. District Population (Census, 2011)

Injuries Injuries (%)

Deaths Deaths (%)

1. Panchkula 5,58,890 51,900 9.2 11,400, 2.0 2. Ambala 11,36,784 121,700 10.7 26,200 2.3 3. YamunaNagar 12,14,162 114,000 9.3 25,500 2.1 4. Kurukshetra 9,64,231 85,200 8.8 19,500 2.0 5. Kaithal 10,72,861 93700 8.7 20400 1.9 6. Karnal 15,06,323 125700 8.3 28400 1.8



7. Panipat 12,02,811 85100 7.0 19200 1.5 8. Sonipat 14,80,080 86700 5.8 19800 1.3 9. Jind 13,32,042 91600 6.8 21200 1.5

10. Hisar 17,42,815 88500 5.0 20100 1.1 11. Bhiwani 16,29,109 71100 4.3 15000 0.9 12. Rohtak 10,58,683 55500 5.2 12700 1.1 13. Jhajjar 9,56,907 46200 4.8 9700 1.0

Source: NDMA, Government of India, 2014.

Source: NIDM, Haryana, 2014

Figure 2.7: Map of Likelihood of Deaths in Haryana

2.5.1 Largest Instrumented Earthquake in Haryana The instrumental earthquakes in this region are listed in Table given below. General locations are provided for historical events for which generalized epicentral co-ordinates are available. Some events which were significant for other reasons are also included.

Table 2.6: Major Earthquake in Haryana

S. No.

Date Time Latitude Longitude

Depth (Km)

Magnitude Region

2006 1. February, 15 1:37:47.5

HRS (UTC) 29.1° N 76.6 ° E 05.0 3.2 Sonipat, Haryana

2. March, 31 11:25:39.3 HRS (UTC)

28.7° N 76.8° E 22.0 3.4 Jhajjar, Haryana

3. April, 07 18:56:38.0 HRS (UTC)

29.0° N 77.0° E 11.5 3.0 Sonipat, Haryana

4. May, 01 5:13:47.9 HRS (UTC)

29.0° N 76.7° E 10.0 3.6 Rohtak, Haryana

5. May, 07 16:1:0.5 HRS (UTC)

28.7° N 76.6° E 20.2 4.1 Jhajjar, Haryana

6. December, 09 18:52:03.7 HRS (UTC)

29.0° N 76.7° E 06 2.8 Rohtak , Haryana

2007 7. April, 03 15:35:10.3

HRS (UTC) 29.0° N 76.6° E 8.8 2.8 Rohtak , Haryana

Project Site



8. May, 14 7:22:47.4 HRS (UTC)

29.0° N 76.6° E 5.0 3.2 Rohtak , Haryana

9. November, 20 17:11:5.6 HRS (UTC)

28.0° N 76.6° E 1.2 3.3 Rajasthan- Haryana Border

Region 2008

10. February, 27 11:13:55.2 HRS (UTC)

28.9° N 76.6° E 15.0 2.8 Rohtak , Haryana

11. November, 1 22:34:49 HRS (UTC)

28.9° N 76.8° E 10 2.7 Rohtak , Haryana

12. October, 19 07:56:48 HRS (UTC)

29.1° N 76.9° E 7 3.2 Sonipat, Haryana

2009 13. May, 10 11:02:47.0

HRS (UTC) 30.3° N 76.9° E 11 3.5 Ambala, Haryana

2010 14. February, 24 19:20:52

HRS (UTC) 28.6° N 76.9° E 17 2.5 Rohtak , Haryana

15. March, 03 11:48:18.0 HRS (UTC)

28.8° N 77.0° E 15 2.3 Delhi- Haryana Border Region

16. October, 12 10:27:25 HRS (UTC)

28.2° N 76.0° E 6 3.5 Rajasthan- Haryana Border

Region 17. September, 07 17:58:18

HRS (UTC) 28.6° N 77.0° E 8 4.2 Delhi- Haryana

Border Region 18. November, 24 19:09:22

HRS (UTC) 28.8° N 77.0° E 10 2.5 Delhi- Haryana

Border Region 2011

19. March, 05 07:41:03 HRS (UTC)

28.7° N 76.7° E 10 4.9 Haryana- Delhi Border Region

Source: http://www.imd.gov.in/section/seismo/dynamic/welcome.htm 2.5.2 Conclusion As per outcome of the data collected from IMD, Haryana, only two earthquakes observed during 10 years. First in 7th April, 2006 the magnitude of this earthquake was 3.0 and second was in 19th October 2008 the magnitude of this earthquake was 3.2. These two was observed as low intensity earthquake hence there will be no major impact on the environment due to proposed activity. 2.6 FLOODS Floods have been a recurrent phenomenon in Haryana from time immemorial. Many part of the state of Haryana are prone to flooding. The devastating floods hit Haryana many times. In 1977, 1978, 1980, 1983, 1988, 1993 and 1995, 1996 floods occurred in Haryana. Floods have been causing extensive damage not only to standing crops but also loss of lives and cattle. The floods in Haryana can occur because of some natural reasons such as its physiographic situation which makes a depression saucer shape zone around the Delhi-Rohtak-Hisar-Sirsa axis and it has a poor natural drainage system and sometimes the heavy precipitation becomes a major contributing factor in causing flood as such in case of Rohtak flood, 1995. The state receives an average rainfall of about 650 mm. In flood manual of Haryana, there are 102 vulnerable points in Haryana which need special attention during monsoon.

http://www.imd.gov.in/section/seismo/dynamic/welcome.htm



Figure 2.8: Flood Hazard Map of Haryana

2.7 EXPLORATION AND RESERVES 2.7.1 EXPLORATION & METHOD OF ESTIMATION OF RESERVE In the allotted area mineral Quartzite is exposed in the form of Stone at various places and found worked in Pit No. – 1,2 & 3, mining operation carried out by some other lessee in the past with due permission from the department of Mines & Geology, Haryana, which indicates that the complete area has been mineralized for the mineral Stone along with associated minor minerals. Besides, following points have been considered for reserves calculation.

i. In the allotted area, the mineral is exposed at the top most part of the general surface level at 290 mRL to the lowermost level of 222 m RL. So, the occurrence of mineral is considered for total thickness of mineral exposed under proved category of reserve.

ii. The further 20 m depth is considered for probable category of reserves below the proved category. iii. Similarly, further 10 m depth is considered for possible category of reserves below the proved category. iv. Bulk Density of Stone and associated minor minerals is taken as 2.5 Tones/m3.

Based on the mining of Stone Quarrying in nearby the allotted area, the total recovery of Stone and associated minor minerals as considered 98% and rest 2% as mining loss. 2.7.2 Reserves estimation: Considering the above parameters and exposures observed in the existing pit in the allotted area, the surface geological plan and geological cross-sections & longitudinal section are prepared on a scale 1:2000. Accordingly, the reserves for Stone along with associated minor minerals have been estimated on cross- sectional area method.

Table 2.7: Geological/ Mineable Reserves Estimation Section

Line Cross

sectional area

Length Bulk Density

Proved Probable Possible

R-R1 24448.5 365.6 2.5 22345947.3 5351872.2 2675936.1 5855.4 2927.7

S-S1 25680 249.3 2.5 16005010.1 3837051.1 1918538 6156.5 3078.3

T-T1 21717 365.3 2.5 19832794.5 8157368.2 4078684.1 8932.2

Project Site



4466.1 TOTAL 5,81,83,752 1,73,46,291 86,73,158.2

2.7.3 Geological Reserves = (Proved + Probable) reserve = 58183752 + 17346291 Tons = 75530043 Tons 2.7.4 Mineable Reserves = 98% of Total Geological Reserves i.e. 6,93,30,254 Tons 2.7.5 Targeted Production: Total production = 7524225 Tons/Year

Table 2.8: Five Years Proposed Production Details (Tons/annum) Year Total Production in ROM (TPA)

Ist 75,00,000 IInd 75,12,705 IIIrd 75,19,600 IVth 75,22,502 Vth 75,24,225

2.7.6 Life of Mine The period of contract for mining will be for 10 years commencing with effect from the date of grant of Environmental Clearance or an expiry of a period of 12 months from issuance of LOI. However, the present reserves are sufficient for 10 years at the present rate of production. 2.8 MINING METHOLOGY The method of mining will be open cast fully mechanized means in two production shifts & one maintenance shift, each of 8 hrs under the supervision of qualified 1st class mines manager/ mining engineer. The drilling will be continued in all the three shifts to achieve the total meterage required. For lightening during night shift, portable lightening mast will be put which will be operated by power from DG Set. Mining will be carried out block wise. During the first year, mining will be started from western side of existing pit towards east direction. Top soil will be removed in advance of start of mining operation block wise with excavator from lease area and stacked temperedly in the statuary barrier. The removed top soil will be utilized within the year for plantation so that its fertility does not degraded. In the first year, mining will be done in two blocks of different benches of 10m height and width more than the height of the bench. 2.8.1 Use of Equipment of Mining Project Following equipments are proposed to be deployed for the desired production.

Table 2.9: List of Machineries S. No. Equipment Size Nos

1. Excavator 1.85 m3 10+2* 2. Dozer Crawler Mounted 416 hp 1 3. Dumper 30 Tonne 44+4* 4. Wagon Drill with inbuilt Compressors 100mm dia 2+1* 5. Air Compressor 500 cfm 1 6. Rock Breaker 1.2 m2 3+1* 7. Diesel Operated Pump 5.0 H.P. Motor 2 8. Generator ……. 1 9. Explosive Van …….. 1

10. Mini Bus 30 seater 1 11. Bolero Jeep 7 seater 1 12. Maintenance Van …… 1

* Standby machinery to be used in case of any breakdown. 2.8.2 Drilling & Blasting The mineral is hard and will require drilling & blasting. It is proposed to produce boulders of medium size for which the holes of 100mm diameter will be drilled by wagon drills. The broad blasting parameters are as under: Burden: Burden is defined as the shortest distance to relief at the time the hole is detonated in any blasting operation. It is the most critical parameter. If burden is very little, the rock will be thrown to a considerable distance from



the face, air blast level will be high and excessive fines will be produced. Too much burden will produce severe backbreak, hanging of face and shattering of the rock wall. Subgrade drilling is proposed 10% of the bench height therefore total drilling will be 10 meter (Bench height) + 1 meter (Subgrade) = 11 meter

Spacing 6m Burden 4m Depth of hole 11m No of rows 2 No. of hole per round 23 Charge per hole 38 Kg Wt. of Cartridge 2.5 Kg No. of primary Cartridge/hole 2 No of round per day 1 Tonnage per hole 660 MT Powder factor 15.35 tonnes/kg

The parameters are considered for the variable annual production of stone along with associated minor mineral during the first five years. The deck charging of 2 to 3 deck is proposed for better fragmentation by double row blast and single blast in a day. 2.8.3 Types of Explosives

i. ANFO(AN 94%, FO 6%) ii. Slurry Explosive

iii. Detonating Fuse iv. Electric Delay Detonator

2.8.4 Storage of Explosive The mining Operations will require regularly 1629 Kgs of explosives for blasting of 23 wagon drill holes. Not more than 5 holes will be blasted at a time in one shot. Thus, total quantity of explosives to be blasted in one shot will be 1629 / 23 X 5 = 354 kg. Therefore, the requirement of explosives will be made with permission of Chief Controller of Explosives. There is no proposal to have Magazine of explosives at the mine site because the complete area is mineralized so in the interest of mineral conservation and its full utilization, the proposed explosive magazine will be constructed outside the lease area as approved by the competent authorities. Following precautions will be taken while transporting the explosive in bulk. Transportation of the explosives from the magazine to priming station or the site of blasting will not be done except in the daylight, and in the original packing cases. The quantity of explosives transported at one time, to the site of blasting, will not exceed the actual quantity required for use in one round of shots, and not more than 30 minutes before the commencement of charging of the hole. 2. (a) No mechanically propelled vehicle will be used for the transport of the explosives, unless it is of a type, approved in writing by the Chief Inspector, provided that a Jeep or such type of approved vehicle is to be used for the transport of detonators from the magazines to the ‘priming stations, subject to the following conditions. Not more than 200 detonators are transported in a vehicle at a time;

(i) The detonators are to be packed suitably in a wooden box. (ii) The wooden box, containing detonators, is to be placed inside an outer metal case of a construction

approved by the Chief Inspector. (i) The outer metal case will be suitably bolted to the floor of the vehicle, or otherwise fixed in a wooden

frame, so that the container is not displaced while the vehicle is in motion. (ii) No person will ride on the rear portion of the vehicle. (b) Vehicles, used for transporting explosives, will be substantially constructed, in good working

order and have tight beds, to prevent the explosives from falling off the vehicles. (a) Every vehicle, used for the transport of explosives, will be marked or placarded, on both sides and

ends, with the word EXPLOSIVES in red letters, not less than 15 cm high, on a white background. (b) Every mechanically propelled vehicle, transporting explosives, will be provided with not less than two

fire extinguishers (One of Carbon Tetra Chloride type, for petroleum fire, and other of Carbon Dioxide under pressure type, for electrical fire), suitably placed for immediate use.

3 (a) The vehicle, used for the transport of explosives, will not be overloaded, and in no case will the explosive cases be piled higher than the sides of its body.

(b) Explosives and detonators will not be transported in the same vehicle.



(c) The metal parts of every vehicle, carrying explosives that may come in contact with containers of explosives will be suitably covered with wood, tarpaulin, or other suitable material. (d) Explosives, carried on vehicles, will be so secured /fastened as to prevent any part of the load from becoming dislodged. 4. (a) No person, other than the driver and his helper (not below 18 years of age) will ride on a mechanically propelled vehicle, used for the transport of explosives. (b) A vehicle, loaded with explosives, will not be left unattended. (c) The engine of a vehicle, transporting explosives, will be stopped, and the brakes set securely, before it is loaded or unloaded or left standing. (d) The transfer of the explosives from the magazine will be so arranged that no undue delay will occur between the time the explosives leave the magazine and the time they are properly stored in the designated storage places, or distributed to the point of use. (e) A vehicle, transporting explosives, will not be driven at a speed exceeding 25 km/hr. (f) A vehicle, loaded with explosives, will not be taken into a garage or repair shop, and will not be parked at a congested place. (g) A vehicle, transporting explosives, will not be refueled except in emergencies, even when its engine will be stopped, and other precautions taken to prevent accidents. (h) No trailer will be attached to a vehicle, transporting explosives. 5. (a) Every vehicle, used for transporting explosives, will be carefully inspected once in every 24 hours by a competent person to ensure that: - (i) Fire extinguishers are filled and are in place. (ii) The electric wiring is well insulated and firmly secured. (iii) The chassis, engine, and body are clean and free from surplus oil & grease. (iv) The fuel tanks & feed lines are not leaking. (v) Lights, brakes and steering mechanics are in good working order. (b) A report of every inspection, made under (a) above, will be recorded in a bound paged book, kept for the purpose, and will be signed and dated by the competent person making the inspection. 1. All operations, connected with the transport of the explosives, will be conducted under the personal supervision of a foreman, solely placed in charge of the blasting operations in the mine. 2. The shot firer / blaster will personally search every person engaged in the transport of explosives, and will satisfy himself that no person so engaged has, in his possession, any cigar, cigarette, biri or other smoking material, or any match or any other apparatus of any kind, capable of producing a light, flame or spark.

Figure 2.9: Process Flow Chart of Stone alone along with associated minor minerals

2.8.5 Year Wise Production detail with Benches Height First Year: During first year, the working will be carried out between the sections, P-P’, Q-Q’, R-R’, S-S’ and T-T’ AT 298 and 288m RL .

S. No.

Year Bench mRL

ROM(in MT) Recoverable Mineral 98%(in MT)

Mineral Rejects 2%( in m3)

1.

Ist 308 to 298 7500000 7350000 60000 298 to 288

Blasting

Drilling

Loading

Stone along with associated minor minerals consumed to crusher unit

Use for Plantation Removal of top soil



Second Year: During Second year, the working will be carried out between the sections, P-P’, Q-Q’, R-R’, S-S’ and T-T’ AT 288, 278 and 268m RL .

S. No.

Year Bench mRL

ROM(in MT) Recoverable Mineral 98%(in

MT)


1.

IInd 298 to 288 7512705 7362451 60102 288 to 278 278 to 268

Third Year: During third year, the working will be carried out between the sections ,P-P’, Q-Q’, R-R’, S-S’ and T-T’ AT 268 and 258m RL .

S. No.

Year Bench mRL


MT)


1.

IIIrd 278 to 268 7519600 7369208 60157 268 to 258

Fourth Year: During fourth year, the working will be carried out between the sections ,P-P’, Q-Q’, R-R’, S-S’ and T-T’ AT 258 and 248m RL .

S. No.

Year Bench mRL


MT)


1.

IVth 268 to 258 7522502 7372052 60180 258 to 248

Fifth Year: During fifth year, the working will be carried out between the sections ,P-P’, Q-Q’, R-R’, S-S’ and T-T’ AT 248, 238 and 228m RL .

S. No.

Year Bench mRL


MT)


1.

Vth 258 to 248 7524225 7373741 60194 248 to 238 238 to 228

2.9 TRANSPORTATION The transportation of mineral from pit head / stock yard to the consumer end crushers / traders will be carried out by the trucks deployed by the customer/purchaser and will be generally of 30 MT Capacity. There is all weather metalled road and then a katcha road right up to mines to dispatch the material from mines to the market. Material is proposed to be sold to the customers/ at mine site and transported by them through their own arrangement of trucks. The practice is quite sound in the area and ensure continuous lifting of the material. Customers/purchasers come with transport arrangement of their own. However necessary arrangement of trucks can be done from the nearby truck operators union available at Charkhi Dadri & Mahindergarh. 2.10 LOADING OF MINERALS The productivity of excavator is decided based on the following consideration i.e. two shifts per day working and 300 days in a year. The requirement of HEMM i.e. shovels, dumpers, drill machines and dozers have been estimated based on the adopted productivity norms and workload determined by the calendar plan. For calculation of number of dumpers, it is the lead from the mine to the destination which will determine the no of dumpers. Based on calculation, it is established that total 44 No’s of 30 Tons capacity dumpers would be sufficient to execute the rated production at an average lead of 5 Km. However, including the standby equipment, total requirement of dumper works out to be 44 Nos. of 30 Tons capacity. 2.11 MINE DRAINAGE The allotted area is flat terrain with some undulations and country rock is hard so the runoff water will be fast and percolation of water will be less. All the surface water will flow down towards south direction to its natural slope. During the first five years period the working will go beyond surface level but will not reach the water table. The proposed mining will start from western side of the area of contract period of 10 years, so



there will be accumulation of rain water in the pit , which will be pumped out, and it will not affect the ground water table. The applicant has bored four numbers of bore hole within the lease hold area . There is no water table encountered up to depth of 100m bgl, hence water table may be deeper than 100m bgl. The general ground water table in the area is between 110-120m below the surface level of 290m RL. 2.12 DISPOSAL OF WASTE Nature of Waste Top soil of 0.15m depth mixed with scree is present in the lease area which will be removed before mining activity and stacked separately in boundary barrier .Total volume of top soil removed will be 41580 m3 and this will acquire an area of 2.079 Ha. In statutory barrier having 2.0 m depth it will be used for plantation within the year of commencement of mining activity. There is generation of waste in the form of rejects as soil due to proposed mining; hence no measure will be taken.

Years Rejects (m3) Ist 60000

IInd 60102 IIIrd 60157 IVth 60180 Vth 60194

Total 300633 More parts of the waste will be used by lessee for making the haul road remaining waste will be dumped in the statuary barrier. 2.13 USE OF MINERAL 1. The primary use for stone is in the construction industry. The stone along with associated minor minerals

are commonly used on building projects. These are commonly used to create concrete. 2. The said project plays a significant role in the domestic as well as infrastructural market. Achieving a huge

infrastructure as being envisaged by Government of India particularly in road and housing sector requires basic building materials.

3. The mining activities as proposed are the backbone of all construction and infrastructure projects as the raw material for construction is available only from such mining.

4. The Stone along with associated minor minerals as mined will be used as masonry stone whereas a part of the mineral rejects will be used for preparation of haul road etc.

5. The raw stone as well as the crushed material of stone is in high demand in real estate, construction project as well as building construction project in the real estate industry.

2.14 LAND USE PATTERN OF MINING AREA AT VARIOUS STAGES Table 2.10: Land use at the end of Lease Period

S. No. Particulars Present land use (ha.) Land use after end of Lease Period (ha.)

1. Pits 6.92 31.87 2. Dump 0.0 0.0 4. Plantation 0.0 2.079 5. Infrastructure(Roads, Buildings) 0.0 0.1322 6. Reclamation 0.0 0.5588 7. Un-disturbed 27.72 0.0 Total 34.64 34.64

2.15 UTILITIES AND SITE FACILITIES 2.15.1 Water Requirement Thus total water requirement will be 40 KLD. This water will be supplied from the existing nearby tube well of Village Bakhrija Tehsil Narnaul, District- Mahendergarh through hired tankers.

S. No Head Calculation Water Requirement (KLD)

1 Dust suppression 24657*0.51 700*3*4

21.0

2 Domestic purpose 121*33 4.0 3 Plantation 26107*0.58 15.0

Total 40



Water balance is given in figure below.

Figure 2.10: Water Balance

The water requirement is 150 Liter per day per capita for permanent worker (24 hr.) and 45 Liter per day per capita for visitor. We have some manpower who works permanent and some are visitor (8 hr.), hence we have considered average water requirement i.e. 33.0 Liter per day per capita. 2.15.2 Man Power Requirement of Technical and other supervisory staff will be as follows for the proposed systematic and scientific mining:

Table 2.11: Employment Details S. No. Designation Category

1. Mining Engineer cum 1st class Mines Manager

3

2. Medical Officer 1 3. Mines Foremen 4 4. Mines Mate 3 5. Electrician 3 6. Blaster 2 7. H.E.M. Operators 75 8. Skilled Workers 20 9. Semiskilled Workers 10

Total 121 2.15.3 Power All the activities will be carried out in a mechanized manner. The material will be excavated and loaded directly into, dumpers tractors-trolley etc by the diesel run excavator cum loaders. The operation will be done in two shifts therefore required electricity for lighting arrangement will be made as per Regulation 146 of MMR 1961. 2.15.4 Infrastructure/Site Services The workers are mostly locals living in the close proximity of area and will work in shifts during day time only thus there is no requirement of major infrastructural facilities at the site. The following infrastructure facilities will be made available for the workers. (i) Manager’s Office The activities shall be supervised by one competent person as overall manager. In addition one mining mate cum blaster is proposed to supervise the drilling and blasting operation. Main administrative office is proposed to be set up in nearby locality on rental accommodation. However, at site one office of Manager is proposed of about 5 x 3 mtrs Size which shall also provide accommodation for key supervisory staff as well. (ii) Canteen -cum-rest shelter In order to provide the rest shelter for the personnel working in the mine and also to provide tea/refreshment etc. as per the Mines Act, 1952. The arrangement shall be made to install a rest shelter-cum-canteen as shown in plate no.4 and shall be utilized by the workers. The rest shelter will be for having rest during the lunch hours by the operators/ labor. The size of rest shelter shall be about 15 x 3 meter to accommodate the working labors. (iii) First Aid Room To provide the first aid for any sort of injuries encountered during the mining operation, one small first aid room will be provided at mine site. First aid kit and sufficient stock of material/medicines needed for first aid will be provided as per requirement. As the Mining Engineer/Manager and Mining Mates are qualified first aides, they can provide first aid to the labor on the spot. (iv) Crèche

Total Water Requirement(40.0 KLD)

Dust Suppression(21.0 KLD)

Domestic(4.0 KLD)

Plantation(15.0 KLD)



At present provision of crèche is not provided, however in future if women workers are employed, arrangement for a small crèche shall be made as per the requirement. (v) Water Supply The water supply for drinking purpose proposed will be made available by hired tanker. The water will be taken from the village Public water supply which is just 0.5 km. away from the mine site and is controlled by the public health department of the state Government. The water form supply tube well is used for the entire village Bakhrija. Therefore the same arrangement shall continue for the mines as well. (vi) Store Since the mining operation will involve heavy earth moving machinery, a small storeroom will be provided for day to day operations. No provisions for a separate workshop are being made as the heavy repairs will be carried out elsewhere. (vii) V.T. Center Necessary arrangement shall be made for conducting refresher course as laid down in Mines vocational training rules. (viii) Magazine Magazine of the required sizes will be provided to fulfill the requirement of blasting of mineral as detailed in the chapter of Blasting. The design of the magazine shall be as per approval of the chief controller of Explosives, Govt. of India. The magazine shall be properly fenced and provided with as security guard round the clock. 2.16 Aspect and Impact Analysis The aspects and probable impacts(short term, midterm and long term) for proposed stone mining activity at Bakhrija Block -4, Narnaul, Dist-Mahendergarh Haryana has been presented in table 2.13. Table 2.12 Aspect and Impact Analysis

S.No.

Activity Aspect Impact Legal Regulation Short Term Mid Term Long

Term 1. Drilling a. Dust generation

X The Air (Prevention and Control of

Pollution) Act 1981 EIA Notification, 2006 under EPA Act 1986

b. Noise

X X

c. Vibration X The Mines Act, 1952 Wild Life Protection Act,1972 The Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980. EIA Notification, 2006 under EPA Act 1986

2. Blasting a. Dust generation

X The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 EIA Notification, 2006 under EPA Act 1986

b. Noise X

c. Vibration X Wild Life Protection Act,1972 The Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980 EIA Notification, 2006 under EPA Act 1986

3. Explosive a. Dust generation

X The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act 1981

b. Noise

X The Mines Act 1952

c. Vibration X EIA Notification, 2006 under EPA Act 1986

d. .Accidents Bihar Minor Mineral Concession Rules 1972

4. Loading a. Dust generation X X The Mines Act 1952



and Unloading

b. Noise

X X Mineral Concession Rules, 1960 Bihar Minor Mineral Concession (Amendment) Rules 2014

5. Transportation of Mineral (Stone)

a. Dust generation

X The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act 1981. Bihar Minerals (Prevention of Illegal-Mining, Transportation and Storage) (Amendment) Rules 2014

b. Noise

X X

c. Gaseous Emission

X

d.Accidents Bihar Minor Mineral Concession Rules 1972

6. Water Transportation

a. Dust generation

X X The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act 1974

b. Noise

X X The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act 1981

7. Disposal of Waste Water

a.Ground Water Contamination

X X The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act 1974 EIA Notification, 2006 under EPA Act Separate Corpus Fund(2% of annual contract)

b.Surface Water Contamination

X X

c.Soil Quality 8. Recruitm

ent Social X Bihar Minor Mineral Concession

Rules 1972 The Mines and Mineral (Development and Regulation) Act 1957

From aspect and impact analysis, it is concluded that this stone mining project has short term, midterm as well as long term impacts. Different activities like drilling, blasting, explosive use, loading and unloading, transportation, disposal of waste has both short term and long term impacts. This project has long term positive impact on social aspects. Accordingly, the receptor will be studied and mitigation measures will be discussed in chapter 5. 2.17 Litigation There is no court case against this project, however there is a court case in the matter of Mr. Rajbir Singh v/s State of Haryana and others [CWP No. 27700 of 2013], wherein the petitioner had challenged the conditions of the auction notice and the rules relating to payment of rent and compensation to the land owners. The State Government (Dept. of Mines and Geology) has issued LoI subject to the outcome of this case. The Hon’ble Punjab and Haryana High Court on dated 19.10.2015 dismissed this CWP No. 27700 of 2013 for adjudication. The Project Proponent has not filed any court case against any department neither he is a party in this case. 2.18 SUMMARY The proposed project is for mining of Stone along with associated minor mineral of “Bakhrija Plot-4” by open cast mechanized method over an area of 34.64 Ha. by M/s. Gradient Business Consulting Pvt. Ltd in Village-Bakhrija, Tehsil- Narnaul and Distt-Mahendergarh, Haryana with proposed production capacity of 75,24,225 TPA of Stone (Minor Mineral). The climate of the district is characterized by the dryness of the air with an intensely hot summer and a cold winter. The normal annual rainfall of the district, based on the record is 420 mm. The project site falls under seismic zone III which is a moderate damage risk zone (MSK VII). Many part of the state of Haryana are prone to flooding. The total geological reserve is 7,55,30,043 MT and total mineable reserve is 6,93,30,254 MT. The ultimate depth of pit up to 92 meter (198 m amsl) and general water table in the lease area is at 100m bgl below ground level. Mineral Stone will be transported by trucks. It is widely used in construction, buildings, bridges and other infrastructure. Total water requirement for the project is 40 KLD. Total man power requirement for the project is 121. The site facilities like canteen, rest-shelter, first aid facility, water and electricity supply etc. will be provided as per requirement. There is no litigation pending against this project.

http://www.mines.bih.nic.in/Acts/Mineral-Concession-Rules-1960.pdf

http://www.mines.bih.nic.in/Acts/Bihar-Minor-Mineral-Concession-(Amendment)-Rules-2014.pdf

http://www.mines.bih.nic.in/Acts/Bihar-Minor-Mineral-Concession-(Amendment)-Rules-2014.pdf

http://www.mines.bih.nic.in/Acts/Bihar-Minerals-(Prevention-of-Illegal-Mining)-Amendment-Rules-2014.pdf





CHAPTER- 3

ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES (TECHNOLOGY & SITE)

3.0 INTRODUCTION Consideration of alternatives to a project proposal is a requirement of EIA process. During the scoping process, alternatives to a proposal can be considered or refined, either directly or by reference to the key issues identified. A comparison of alternatives help to determine the best method of achieving the project objectives with minimum environmental impacts or indicates the most environmentally friendly and cost effective options. 3.1 ALTERNATIVE FOR MINE LEASE • Stone along with associated Minor Mineral is site specific. It is present in Village- Bakhrija,

Tehsil- Narnaul and District- Mahendergarh. The mining of the material will be done by opencast mechanized method. The mining will be done as per laid down procedures Haryana Minor Mineral Concession, Stocking, Transportation of Minerals and Prevention of Illegal Mining Rules, 2012. The material crushed will be sold to end users and as such there is no waste product/ tailing waste.

• The proposed Minor Mineral Mining Project of Stone along with associated Minor Mineral is a site specific mining project; therefore no alternate site has been selected. From the nature and extent of the deposit, the reserve and the quality have been proved with adequate degree of reliability.

3.2 ALTERNATIVE FOR TECHNOLOGY AND OTHER PARAMETERS Some alternatives considered during EIA study are discussed below:

Table 3.1: Alternative for Technology and other Parameters S. No. Particular Alternative

Option 1 Alternative Option 2

Remarks

1. Technology Opencast semi mechanized and mechanized mining.

Opencast mechanized mining Involving drilling and blasting.

Opencast mechanized Involving drilling and blasting is preferred Benefits:

• Material is hard so to make it loose and to bring it to appropriate size.

2. Employment Local employment.

Outsource employment

Local employment is preferred Benefits:

Provides employment to local people along with financial benefits

No residential building/ housing is required.

3. Labourer transportation

Public transport Private transport Local labours will be deployed so they will either reach mine site by bicycle or by foot. Benefits:

Cost of transportation of men will be negligible.

4. Material transportation

Public transport Private transport Material will be transported through trucks/trolleys on the contract basis Benefits:

• It will give indirect employment. 5. Water Tanker supplier Ground water/ Tanker supply will be preferred.



requirement surface water supply

Benefits: No change in the surface water or

ground water quality. 6. Road Haul road Metallic road Haul road will be considered for

linking mine site from metallic road for transportation purpose Minimum distance will be measured along with less number of trees for considering optimum haul road roots. Benefits:

Less distance, less fuel used, minimum or negligible no. of trees will be cut in best opted haul road root.

3.3 SUMMARY The proposed Minor Mineral Mining Project of Stone along with associated Minor Mineral is a site specific mining project; therefore no alternate site has been selected.


Mining of Stone (Minor Mineral) at Bakhrija Plot-4 (Area 34.64 Ha.) Cat. B1 Final EIA/EMP Report Village-Bakhrij, Tehsil-Narnaul, District-Mahendergarh, Haryana by M/s Gradient Business Consulting Pvt. Ltd.

CHAPTER-4 DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

4.0 GENERAL The main objectives of describing the environment, which may be potentially affected, are (i) to assess present environmental quality and the environmental impacts and (ii) to identify environmentally significant factors that could preclude Mine development. This chapter discuss about the present scenario of the study area with reference to the prominent environmental attributes. The study area covers 10 Km radius of the mine lease area. Baseline data has been collected out during the Winter Season 1st December to 29th February 2016 by M/s. Mantech Environmental Laboratories, Noida {NABL Accredited Lab, Certificate No. T-1417 (Certificate enclosed as Annexure V)} in accordance with the Guidelines for EIA issued by the Ministry of Environment Forests and Climate Change, Govt. of India and CPCB, New Delhi. The impact identification always commences with the collection of baseline data such as Ambient Air Quality, Micro-Meteorology, Ground and Surface Water Quality, Noise levels, Soil Quality, Land use pattern, Biological Environment and Socio-economic aspects, Solid and Hazardous waste, Risk Assessment, Geology and Hydrology within the study zone of 10 Km. radius. Long term meteorological data recorded at the nearest IMD station, Gurgaon was also collected. Micrometeorological data at site was recorded using automatic weather station. Apart from these, secondary data have been collected from Census Handbook, Revenue Records, Statistical Department, Soil Survey and Land use Organization, District Industries Centre, Forest Department, Central Ground Water Authority, etc. The generation of primary data as well as collection of secondary data and information from the site and surroundings was carried out during study. The EIA study is being done for the Mine Lease (core zone) and area within 10 Km distance from mine lease boundary (buffer zone), both of which together comprise the study area. The following data, through field survey and other sources, has been collected by M/s Mantech Environmental Laboratories, Noida for preparing the EIA/EMP for the proposed mining area with related facilities. Physical environment (Air, Water, Soil and Noise) baseline data. Relevant meteorological data, for previous decades from Indian Meteorological Department (IMD) and

primary data. Land use pattern within core zone and buffer zone (10 Km distance around the core zone) based on Survey

of India Toposheet map, ground truth and satellite image. Identification of water bodies, hills, roads etc. within 10 Km radius. Eco-sensitive places, sanctuaries, biosphere reserves within 10 Km radius. Religious places / historical monuments and tourist places within 10 Km radius. Details of fauna and flora within a distance of 10 Km from the project site and information about forests, if

any. Demography and Socio-economic based on last available Census data for entire study area. Major industries within 10 Km radius. Study of present environmental protection and mitigation measures in nearby operating similar projects, if

any. 4.1 LAND ENVIRONMENT Area statistics of land use classes has been generated within 10 Km radius of mine lease area (Core zone and Buffer zone) and given in Table 4.1. 4.1.1 Data Used Indian Remote Sensing satellite IRS-P6, LISS III, multi-spectral digital data has been used for the preparation of land use/ land cover map of present study. Survey of India reference map on 1:50,000 scales have been used for the preparation of base map and geometric correction of satellite data. Ground truth has been carried out to validate the interpretation accuracy and reliability of remotely sensed data, by enabling verification of the interpreted details and by supplementing with the information, which cannot be obtained directly on satellite imagery. 4.1.2 Methodology The methodology used for the study consists of following components.



(i) Base Map Preparation Base map was prepared using Survey of India reference map on 1:50,000 scale. Interpreted thematic details were transferred on the base map. Besides, other supporting data like project reports and statistical data published by various Government departments have also been used. (ii) Ground Truth Data Collection Ground data on geo-environmental components of the study area was collected for verification of information about the different features on the study areas, which are responsible for the occurrence of specific spectral reflectance behavioral patterns. During the ground truth detailed information on agricultural practices, wastelands, mining, industrial area etc. were collected along with other land features. (iii) Interpretation of Remote Sensing Data A hybrid technique has been used i.e. visual interpretation and digital processing for identification of different land use /land cover classes based on the image characteristics like tone, size, shape, pattern, texture, location and association etc. An image interpretation key was developed based on such image characteristics, which enables interpretation of satellite images for land use/land cover features. Further, the land use / land cover and other baseline layers was put in GIS database for integration, analysis, statistics generation and final out in the form of land use land cover map. 4.1.3 Observation of Land Use Study In the present study, both digital image processing and using visual interpretation technique were used to generate output of Land use/Land cover map of study area on 1:50,000 scale (Figure 4.1). A standard False Colour Composite (FCC) image has also been generated on the same scale (Figure 4.2). Land use Pattern of the Study Area (10 Km distance from the mine site).

Table 4.1 Land Use Pattern of the Study Area Landuse Area (Hectares) % Area

Agriculture Land 20092.14 59.03 Dense Forest 2164.05 6.36 Settlement 1127.6 3.31 Open Scrub 8092.26 23.78 Barren Land 2559.96 7.52 Total Area 34035.67 100.00

Source: Land use map 4.1.4 Topography The allotted area for mining is having flat terrain with some undulations, generally slopping and rocky. The highest point in the lease area is recorded to be 308m amsl and the lowest point recorded is 290m amsl. The Mahendergarh district is the domain of dry-land topography throughout. Presence of inland streams, sandy plain, shifting sand dunes devoid of vegetation, fixed or fossil sand dunes, dissected upland tract, and often barren, denuded rocky hill ranges and their outcrops provide an ensemble of terrain features truly associated with semi-arid to arid environment. 4.1.5 Drainage Drainage of the study area has already been discussed in Chapter-2 4.2 SEISMICITY OF THE AREA The details of the seismicity of the area have been already discussed in Chapter 2 of this EIA report. As per outcome of the data collected from IMD, Haryana, only two earthquakes observed during 10 years. First in 7th April, 2006 the magnitude of this earthquake was 3.0 and second was in 19th October 2008 the magnitude of this earthquake was 3.2. These two was observed as low intensity earthquake hence there will be no major impact on the environment due to proposed activity. 4.3 FLOODS The flood in the area has been discussed in details in the Chapter 2 of this EIA report. Floods have been a recurrent phenomenon in Haryana from time immemorial. Many part of the state of Haryana are prone to flooding. In flood manual of Haryana, there are 102 vulnerable points in Haryana which need special attention during monsoon. The flood hazard map of India and Haryana already given in Chapter-2.



Figure 4.1: Land Use Pattern of the Study Area (10 km Radius from the Mine Site)

Figure 4.2: FCC Map of the Study Area (10 Km Radius from the Mine Site)



4.4 METEOROLOGY Meteorology plays a vital role in affecting the dispersion of pollutants, once discharged into the atmosphere. Since meteorological factors show wide fluctuations with time, meaningful interpretation can be drawn only from long-term reliable data. Such source of data is the India Meteorological Department (IMD), which maintains a network of meteorological stations at several important locations. The nearest IMD station to the study area is located at Gurgaon. The Meteorological parameters obtained from this station are temperature, humidity, rainfall, wind speed, and wind direction etc. A micro meteorological station was installed at site to record micrometeorological parameters on hourly basis during study period to understand the wind pattern, temperature variation, relative humidity variation etc. 4.4.1 Climate of the Area The climate of Mahendergarh district can be classified as tropical steppe, semi -arid and hot which is mainly dry with very hot summer and cold winter except during monsoon season when moist air of oceanic origin penetrates into the district. There are four seasons in a year. The hot weather season starts from mid-March to last week of the June followed by the southwest monsoon which lasts up to September. The transit ion period from September to October forms the post –monsoon season. The winter season starts late in November and remains up to first week of March. 4.4.2 Rainfall of the Area The normal annual rainfall of the district, based on the record for the period 2004-2013 is 170.9-827.5 mm. About 80% of the annual rainfall is recorded during the southwest monsoon from June-September. August is the wettest month of the year with 246.9 mm rainfall. During the period 2004-2013, deficient to scanty Rainfall was recorded in 10 years.

Table 4.2 Monthly Average Rainfall (in mm) (for year 2004-2013) Months/Year 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013

January 2.9 6.2 0 6.8 0 2 0 0 1.4 25 February 0 29.3 0 86.3 0 0 9 35.3 0 68.2

March 0 6.5 15.6 13.5 0 9 0 0 0 0 April 13 0 0 0 30 0 0 5.1 0.1 0 May 11.8 0.7 2.1 16 133.5 14 0 19.5 8.3 0 June 7.4 111.5 11.8 117 266 47.6 8 33.3 3.6 23.4 July 5.9 64.2 104.4 45 121 51.1 121.1 54.0 44 91.1

August 172.9 19 7.1 104.2 140.8 68.4 197.1 144.7 246.9 157.3 September 0 85.7 15.3 64.1 133.9 84.8 163.2 131.9 47.3 41.6

October 50.5 0 7.3 0 0 0 0 0 26 0.1 November 0 0 0 0 2.3 0 23.7 0 0 1.0 December 0 0 7.3 2.5 0 0 0 0 0 0

Total Rainfall 264.4 323.1 170.9 455.4 827.5 276.9 522.1 423.8 377.6 407.7

(Source: IMD http://imd.gov.in/section/hydro/distrainfall/webrain/haryana/mahendragarh.txt ) As we can see that the average annual rainfall of the district from the year 2004-2013 shows a variable pattern. 4.4.3 Meteorological Status at the Project Site Meteorological station was set-up at site to record surface meteorological parameter during study period; Winter Season, 2015-2016. The nearest IMD station is taken at Gurgaon. Climatology during study period (1st December to 29th February, 2015) • Maximum Temperature : 42°C (October) • Minimum Temperature : 9°C (December) • Average Annual Rainfall of the area : 28.9 mm Source: Hydro dynamic IMD, Gurgaon

Table 4.3: Meteorological Condition of the Study Area

Month Temperature °C Relative Humidity % Wind Speed Km/Hr

Max Min Max Min Max Min December, 2015 27 09 80 20 17.5 1.7 January, 2016 29 10 79 22 16.4 1.2

http://imd.gov.in/section/hydro/distrainfall/webrain/haryana/mahendragarh.txt



4.4.4 Relative Humidity The humidity is highest in July, August and September. The annual mean relative humidity of 30 years is furnished in Table 4.4.

Table 4.4: Monthly Average Relative Humidity (%) Months Max Min January 75 48

February 70 44 March 61 34 April 44 25 May 42 27 June 55 38 July 75 64

August 80 69 September 71 56

October 61 40 November 63 41 December 72 47 Average 64 44

(Source: Climatological Table – 1961 to 1990, IMD, GoI, New Delhi) 4.4.5 Wind Speed / Wind Rose Diagram Wind speed and wind direction data recorded during the study period is useful in identifying the influence of meteorology on the air quality of the area. Based on the collected meteorological data, relative percentage frequencies of different wind directions are calculated and plotted as wind roses of Sixteen directions viz., N, NNE, NE, ENE, E, ESE, SE, SSE, S, SSW, SW, WSW, W, WNW, NW and NNW for twenty four hour duration respectively. Maximum and minimum temperatures including percentage relative humidity were recorded simultaneously.The average wind speed recorded was 0.33 m/s and maximum wind is 4.86m/s. Wind rose diagram from the monitored data shows that the predominant wind direction during the study period was mainly from West to East. The meteorological condition of the study area has been tabulated in Table 4.3. The Wind rose diagram has been shown in Figure 4.3.

Figure 4.3: Wind Rose Diagram of Study Area



4.5 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY The ambient air quality with respect to the study area of 10 km radius around the lease area forms the baseline information. The various sources of air pollution in the region are dust rising from unpaved roads, domestic fuel burning, vehicular traffic, agricultural activities, other industries, etc. The prime objective of baseline air quality monitoring is to assess existing air quality of the area. This will also be useful in assessing the conformity to standards of the ambient air quality during the operations. 4.5.1 Selection of Sampling Station The baseline status of the ambient air quality has been assessed through scientifically designed Ambient Air Quality Network. The design of monitoring network in the air quality surveillance program has been based on the following considerations:

a) Meteorological conditions (wind direction and wind speed), b) Representative of likely affected area, c) Representative of regional background air quality for obtaining baseline status, d) Topography of the study area, e) Accessibility and availability of the infrastructure, f) Representative of sensitive receptor.

Keeping in view above mentioned points, 8 nos. of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Stations were established with in the study area. The sampling locations and their distances are shown in Table 4.5 and in Figure 4.4. It can be observed from the wind rose diagram, that the predominant wind direction during the study period was from West. Villages/locations have been selected in downwind direction as well as in the upwind direction for AAQ monitoring from the proposed activity site.

Table 4.5 Concentration Air Pollutants in Ambient Air during Dec. 2015 to Feb. 2016 (µg/m3) Stations Sampling

Locations Coordinates Aerial Distance

(Km) and Direction From Mine Site

Sampling Location Criteria Latitude Longitude

A1 Niaz Alipur 27°54'46.72"N 76°01'12.90"E 2.6 Km in W Upwind A2 Islampur 27°55'09.36"N 76°02'31.70"E 0.95 Km in NW Upwind A3 Bakhrija 27°55'13.30"N 76°03'13.42"E 0.92 Km in N Downwind A4 Jainpur 27°54'33.35"N 76°05'55.37"E 4.1 Km in E Near Village A5 Meghot Binja 27°54'36.64"N 76°03'54.51"E 0.86 Km in E Crosswind A6 Meghot Halla 27°54'01.78"N 76°04'10.68"E 1.56 Km in SE Crosswind A7 Near Mine Site 27°54'40.82”N 76°03'63.42"E Near Mine Site Core Zone A8 Nangal Dargu 27°53'12.69"N 76°02'28.63"E 2.57 Km in SW Near Village

(Source: SOI Toposheet and Field Visit) 4.5.2 Baseline Data Ambient air monitoring at 08 locations was carried out on during 1st December 2015 to 29th February, 2016 (Winter Season) in the study area to assess the ambient air quality at the source. Major air pollutants viz. Particulate Matter (PM10), Sulphur Dioxide (SO2), Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2), representing the basic air quality in the region were identified for Ambient Air Quality Monitoring (AAQM). The ambient air quality results are given in Table 4.7 for each location. 4.5.2.1 Sampling and Analytical Techniques and Instruments Used for Sampling The various instruments used and technique adopted for sampling is given in table below:

Table 4.6: Testing Procedure Used for Determining Various Air Quality Parameters

Parameters Technique Technical Protocol PM10 Gravimetric method IS-5182 (Part-XXIII) Sulphur Dioxide West and Gaeke IS-5182 (Part-II) Nitrogen Oxide Jacob & Hochheiser IS-5182 (Part-VI)

Table 4.7: Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Results in µg/m3 (1st December, 2015to 31st January, 2016)

Station PM10 PM2.5 SO2 NO2 Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max

A1 52 81 21 33 6.8 11.8 18 29 A2 57 81 19 27 6.4 11.8 14 27 A3 46 77 18 26 6.7 11 15 29



A4 61 80 21 27 5 11.5 17 32 A5 46 81 18 28 5.9 12 11 29 A6 44 77 15 30 5.9 11.8 13 30 A7 60 78 20 26 6.7 11.4 16 32 A8 56 75 19 30 6.2 10.8 14 27

Source: AAQ Monitoring Results, December 2015 to February, 2016 * Mineralogical composition of free Silica in PM10 has been analyzed once in a season for each monitoring location. 4.5.3 Interpretation Ambient Air Quality Monitoring reveals that the minimum & maximum concentrations of PM10 for all the 8 AAQM stations were found to be 44.0 µg/m3 and 81.0 µg/m3 respectively and minimum and maximum concentrations of PM2.5 for all the 8 AAQM stations were found to be 15.0 µg/m3 and 33.0 µg/m3 respectively. The minimum and maximum concentrations of SO2 were found to be 5.0 µg/m3 and 11.8 µg/m3 respectively. The minimum and maximum concentrations of NO2 were found to be 11.0 µg/m3 and 32.0 µg/m3 respectively. The prescribed CPCB limit of SO2 and NO2 is 80 µg/m3 for residential and rural areas has never surpassed at any monitoring station. Detailed Air Monitoring Lab report is attached as Annexure-VI. The standards of Ambient Air Quality in India are available online at http://cpcb.nic.in/National_Ambient_Air_Quality_Standards.php.

Figure 4.4: Key plan of Air Monitoring Stations

http://cpcb.nic.in/National_Ambient_Air_Quality_Standards.php



Figure 4.5: PM10 Concentration in µg/m3

Figure 4.6: PM2.5 Concentration in µg/m3

Figure 4.7: SO2 Concentration in µg/m3

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8

Max Min 98 percentile Limit

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8


0102030405060708090

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8




Figure 4.8: NO2 Concentration in µg/m3

4.6 WATER ENVIRONMENT 4.6.1 Methodology Adopted for Selection of Sampling Station The sampling was done both for surface water and underground water. The samples were taken from the identified monitoring locations within the 10 Km radius of the study area. Total of 6 samples were taken (4 for ground water and 2 for surface water).The water quality sampling locations are described in Table 4.8 and 4.9 and shown in Figure 4.9.

Table 4.8: Ground Water Sampling Stations

Station Sampling Location Coordinates Aerial Distance (Km) & Direction From Mine Site Latitude Longitude

GW1 Near Mine Site 27°54'40.82”N 76°03'63.42"E Near Mine Site GW2 Niaz Alipur 27°54'46.72"N 76°01'12.90"E 2.6 Km in W GW3 Bakhrija 27°55'13.30"N 76°03'13.42"E 0.92 Km in N GW4 Meghot 27°54'36.64"N 76°03'54.51"E 0.86 Km in E

Source: SOI Toposheet & Field Visit

Table 4.9: Surface Water Sampling Stations Station Sampling Location Coordinates Aerial Distance (Km) and

Direction from Mine Site Latitude Longitude SW1 Near Mine Site 27°54'40.82”N 76°03'63.42"E Near Mine Site SW2 Niaz Alipur 27°54'46.72"N 76°01'12.90"E 2.6 Km in W

(Source: SOI Toposheet and Field Visit)

0102030405060708090

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8




Figure 4.9: Key Plan of Water Sampling Stations

Table 4.10: Physico-chemical and microbiological Analysis of Ground Water

S. No. Parameter GW1 GW2 GW3 GW4 1. Colour (Hazen) <5 <5 <5 <5 2. Odour Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable 3. Taste Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable 4. Turbidity (NTU) <5 <5 <5 <5 5. pH (at 25 0C) 7.95 7.79 8.03 7.48 6. Temperature ( 0C) 25 25 25 25 7. Conductivity (µmhos/cm) 634 720 906 728 8. Alkalinity as CaCO3 (mg/L) 216 244 298 192 9. Total Dissolved Solids (mg/L) 412 468 589 478

10. Total Hardness as CaCO3 (mg/L) 192 214 264 242 11. Calcium as CaCO3 (mg/L) 106 120 150 162 12. Magnesium as CaCO3 (mg/L) 84 94 114 80 13. Chloride as Cl (mg/L) 50 64 79 56 14. Phosphate as PO4 (mg/L) 0.08 0.14 0.11 0.12 15. Nitrate as NO3 (mg/L) 6.8 4.3 7.6 5.5 16. Sulphate as SO4 (mg/L) 17.3 16.1 22.8 19.4 17. Phenolic Compound (mg/L) <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 18. Copper as Cu (mg/L) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 19. Fluoride as F (mg/L) 0.45 0.71 0.74 0.65 20. Mercury as Hg (mg/L) <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 21. Cadmium as Cd (mg/L) <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 22. Selenium as Se (mg/L) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01



(Source; Mantec Environmental Laboratory) Note: There are more than 60 parameters as per IS 10500:2012, here 34 parameter has been analyzed as per discussed by team. IS 10500:2012

Table 4.11: Physico-chemical and microbiological Analysis of Surface Water

23. Total Arsenic as As (mg/L) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 24. Lead as Pb (mg/L) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 25. Zinc as Zn (mg/L) 0.12 0.12 0.21 0.15 26. Total Chromium as Cr (mg/L) <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 27. Aluminum as Al (mg/L) <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 28. Manganese as Mn (mg/L) <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 29. Boron as B (mg/L) ND ND ND ND 30. Iron as Fe (mg/L) 0.15 0.17 0.2 0.18 31. Sodium as Na (mg/L) 37 43 54 38 32. Potassium as K (mg/L) 3 4 5 4 33. Total Coliform (MPN/100ml) Absent Absent Absent Absent 34. Faecal Coliform (MPN/100ml) Absent Absent Absent Absent

S. No. Parameter SW1 SW2 1. Colour (Hazen) <5 <5 2. Odour Un objectionable Un objectionable 3. Taste Agreeable Agreeable 4. Turbidity (NTU) 2.6 1.9 5. pH (at 25 0C) 7.41 6.97 6. Temperature ( 0C) 25 25 7. Conductivity (µmhos/cm) 405 327 8. Alkalinity as CaCO3 (mg/L) 122 80 9. Total Dissolved Solids (mg/L) 265 215

10. Total Hardness as CaCO3 (mg/L) 168 148 11. Calcium as CaCO3 (mg/L) 46.4 42.4 12. Magnesium as CaCO3 (mg/L) 12.6 10.2 13. Chloride as Cl (mg/L) 18 27 14. Phosphate as PO4 (mg/L) 0.16 0.18 15. Nitrate as NO3 (mg/L) 3.8 3.9 16. Sulphate as SO4 (mg/L) 40.5 36.9 17. Phenolic Compound (mg/L) 0.64 0.45 18. Copper as Cu (mg/L) <0.001 <0.001 19. Fluoride as F (mg/L) <0.01 <0.01 20. Mercury as Hg (mg/L) <0.01 <0.01 21. Cadmium as Cd (mg/L) <0.001 <0.001 22. Selenium as Se (mg/L) <0.01 <0.01 23. Total Arsenic as As (mg/L) <0.01 <0.01 24. Lead as Pb (mg/L) <0.01 <0.01 25. Zinc as Zn (mg/L) 0.08 0.13 26. Total Chromium as Cr (mg/L) <0.05 <0.05 27. Aluminium as Al (mg/L) <0.03 <0.03 28. Manganese as Mn (mg/L) <0.02 <0.02 29. Boron as B (mg/L) ND ND 30. Iron as Fe (mg/L) 0.10 0.04 31. Sodium as Na (mg/L) 7 4 32. Potassium as K (mg/L) 1 1 33. Dissolved Oxygen (mg/L) 5.4 6.1 34. BOD (mg/L) 26 21 35. COD (mg/L) 80 64



(Source; Mantec Environmental Laboratory) 4.6.2 INTERPRETATION Analysis results of Ground water reveal the following; pH varies from to 7.48 to 8.03. Total Hardness varies from 192.00 to 264.00mg/L. Total Dissolved Solids varies from 412.00 to 589.00 mg/L. Fluoride varies from 50 to 79 mg/L Chloride varies from 1.97 to 12.10 mg/L

Analysis results of Surface water reveal the following; pH varies from to 6.97 to 7.41. Total Hardness varies from 148.00 to 168.00 mg/L. Total Dissolved Solids varies from 215.00 to 265.00 mg/L. Fluoride varies from <0.01 to <0.001 mg/L Chloride varies from 18.00 to 27.00 mg/L COD varies from 64 to 80 mg/L BOD varies from 21 to 26mg/L

A review of the above chemical analysis reveals that there is some variation in chemical composition of water tapped from different sources but the ground water from all sources remains suitable for drinking purposes as all the constituents are within the limits prescribed for drinking water standards promulgated by Indian Standards (IS: 10500) Fluoride concentration in all the samples ranged from <0.001 to<0.01 mg/L in surface water and 50 to 79 mg/L ground water in the study area of the mine site. Chloride is important in detecting the contamination of ground water. Its concentration increase rates of corrosion of metals in the distribution system. The permissible limit of chloride in drinking water is 250 ppm. The chloride concentration in water samples from all the locations ranged from 18.00 to 27.00 mg/L in surface water and 50.00 to 79.00 mg/L in ground water. Specific conductivity is a measure of total dissolved solids present in water and it ranges from 215.00 to 265.00 mg/L in surface water 412.00 to 589.00 mg/L in ground water.. Water Quality data is attached as Annexure VIII and Indian standard Drinking water Specification, IS 10500:2012 for water quality is available online at http://cgwb.gov.in/Documents/WQ-standards.pdf. 4.7 SOIL ENVIRONMENT 4.7.1 Soil Profile of District Mahendergarh The soil is generally alluvial in nature which prone to water logging. Also nature of recently alluvial calcareous has been observed. 4.7.2 Soil Quality and Characteristics Assessment of soil quality is an important aspect with reference to tree plantations, percolation of water, ground water impact etc. The information on soils has been collected from various secondary sources and also through primary soil sampling analysis of which is described in this section. 4.7.3 Methodology adopted for Selection of Sampling Station Random soil samples were collected up to depth of 15 cm and homogenized samples were then sent to the laboratory for analysis. The physical and chemical characteristics of the soil of the study area have been assessed by analyzing various parameters as per the methods described in “Soil Chemical Analysis” (Jackson, 1967). The soil quality of the study area has been assessed by collecting samples from 4 different locations. Details of soil sampling locations are presented in Table 4.12and shown in Figure 4.10.

Table 4.12: Soil Monitoring Station Details Stations Sampling Location Coordinates Aerial Distance(Km) and

Direction from Mine Site Latitude Longitude S1 Near Mine Site 27°54'40.82”N 76°03'63.42"E Near Mine Site S2 Niaz Alipur 27°54'46.72"N 76°01'12.90"E 2.6 Km in W S3 Bakhrija 27°55'13.30"N 76°03'13.42"E 0.92 Km in N

36. Total Coliform (MPN/100ml) 265 295 37. Faecal Coliform (MPN/100ml) 37 35

http://cgwb.gov.in/Documents/WQ-standards.pdf



S4 Meghot 27°54'36.64"N 76°03'54.51"E 0.86 Km in E

Figure 4.10: Key Plan of Soil Sampling Stations

Table 4.13: Physico-chemical and microbiological Analysis of Soil

(Source; Mantec Environmental Laboratory) 4.9.4 Interpretation

The analysis results show that soil is basic in nature as pH value ranges from 6.67 to 7.87 with organic matter 1.1 % to 1.81 %. The concentration of Nitrogen ranges from 14.20 to17.80 mg/1oogm. Concentration of Phosphorus ranges from 0.62 to 0.98 mg/100gm. and concentration of Potassium was found to be in range from

S. No. Parameter S1 S2 S3 S4 1. pH 6.67 7.1 6.85 7.87 2. Bulk Density (gm/cm3) 1.21 1.42 1.32 1.21 3. Conductivity (micro mhos/cm) 395 432 395 345 4. Moisture (%) 13 16.1 13.5 11.2 5. WHC 34.5 30.2 30.4 29 6. Texture Sandy Loam Sandy Loam Sandy Loam Sandy Loam 7. Sand (%) 71 75 76 76 8. Clay (%) 10 12 10 14 9. Silt (%) 19 13 14 10

10. Sodium (mg/100gm) 35 39 34 36 11. Potassium (mg/100gm) 7.6 5.8 6.4 5.7 12. CEC (meg/100gm) 1.9 4.1 2.1 2.1 13. Nitrogen (mg/100gm) 17.8 15.2 16.5 14.2 14. Organic Matter (%) 1.81 1.45 1.65 1.1 15. Phosphorous (mg/100gm) 0.98 0.71 0.8 0.62 16. Calcium (meg/100gm) 9.1 8.1 7.2 4.2 17. SAR 2.49 3.27 2.86 3.4 18. Magnesium (meg/100gm) 3.5 1.62 2.1 2.6



5.70 to7.60 mg/100gm has been found to be in good amount in the soil samples. All plants need nitrogen, phosphorus and potassium to grow. Nitrogen (N) – nitrogen is largely responsible for the growth of leaves on the plant. Phosphorus (P) – Phosphorus is largely responsible for root growth and flower and fruit development. Potassium (K) – Potassium is a nutrient that helps the overall functions of the plant performs correctly. Soil texture is Sandy Loam. Soil Quality data attached as Annexure-XI. 4.8 NOISE ENVIRONMENT Noise in general is sound, which is composed of many frequency components of various loudness distributed over the audible frequency range. Various noise scales have been introduced to describe, in a single number, the response of an average human being to a complex sound made up various frequencies at different loudness levels. The most common and heavily favored of those scales is the A weighted decibel (dBA). This is more suitable for audible range of 20 to 20,000 Hertz. The scale has been designed to weigh various components of noise according to the response of a human ear. The main objective of the noise level monitoring is to assess the background noise levels in different zones viz., industrial, commercial, residential and silence zones within the study area. Noise levels were measured in residential areas, bus stands and other settlements located within 10 Km radius around the site. 4.8.1 Noise Analysis within the Study Area The noise analysis within the study area was recorded using 4012 Maxtech sound level meter. The instrument was calibrated with a Standard Acoustic calibrator before using in the field. The measurements were carried out continuously for the 24-hour period to obtain hourly equivalent sound pressure level, 1 hour Leq. From these values, day and night time as well as 24-hour Leq values were also calculated. The Leq value is the equivalent continuous sound level, which is equivalent to the same sound energy as the fluctuating sound measured in the same period. 4.8.2 Methodology adopted for Selection of Sampling Station Noise levels are more annoying in the night time particularly in the residential areas. The environmental impact of noise can have several effects varying from annoyance to hearing loss depending on loudness of noise levels. The monitoring for noise levels were done in 8 locations keeping considering the population and traffic of the area. The locations are depicted in Figure 4.11 and levels recorded stated in Table 4.14.

Table 4.14: Noise Monitoring Sampling Stations Station Sampling

Locations Coordinates Aerial Distance (Km)

and Direction from Mine Site

Latitude Longitude

N1 Niaz Alipur 27°54'46.72"N 76°01'12.90"E 2.6 Km in W N2 Islampur 27°55'09.36"N 76°02'31.70"E 0.95 Km in NW N3 Bakhrija 27°55'13.30"N 76°03'13.42"E 0.92 Km in N N4 Jainpur 27°54'33.35"N 76°05'55.37"E 4.1 Km in E N5 Meghot Binja 27°54'36.64"N 76°03'54.51"E 0.86 Km in E N6 Meghot Halla 27°54'01.78"N 76°04'10.68"E 1.56 Km in SE N7 Near Mine Site 27°54'40.82”N 76°03'63.42"E Near Mine Site N8 Nangal Dargu 27°53'12.69"N 76°02'28.63"E 2.57 Km in SW

Table 4.15: Noise Levels in Study Area (Average)

Location Code Day Time Noise Level Leq. dB (A) Night Time Noise Level Leq. dB (A) Day Time(6:00 a.m. to 10:00 p.m.) Night Time(10:01 p.m. to 5:59 a.m.)

N1 50.4 40.7 N2 46 35.4 N3 47.5 38.5 N4 49.1 39.7 N5 46.8 38.4 N6 48.9 40.4 N7 49.1 38.5 N8 48.8 35.1

(Source; Mantec Environmental Laboratory)



4.8.3 Interpretation Ambient noise levels were measured at 6 locations around the proposed project site. Minimum and maximum noise levels recorded during the day time were from 46.00 Leq dB and 50.4 Leq dB respectively and Minimum and maximum level of noise during night time were 35.1 Leq dB and 40.7 Leq dB respectively. Thus noise levels at all locations were observed to be within the prescribed limits. Noise Quality data attached as Annexure IX (a) and Ambient Air Quality Standards in respect of Noise are enclosed ad Annexure-VII and Ambient Air Quality Standards in respect of Noise is available online at http://cpcb.nic.in/divisionsofheadoffice/pci2/noise_rules_2000.pdf. From the above study and discussions it can be concluded that noise levels in the study area are well within the prescribed limits as prescribed by the CPCB and State Pollution Control Board.

Figure 4.11: Key plan of Noise Monitoring Station

http://cpcb.nic.in/divisionsofheadoffice/pci2/noise_rules_2000.pdf



Figure 4.12: Noise Monitoring Result

4.9 TRAFFIC STUDY Traffic study measurements were performed at State Highway-57, MDR towards SH-14 and MDR towards NH-8 to assess impact on local transport infrastructure due to this mining project. Traffic study measurements were performed at three locations of these highways is marked on the map in Figure 4.13. The traffic study has been conducted on 23rd, 24th, 25th and 26th December 2015. The detailed traffic study is enclosed as Annexure-IX.

Table 4.16: Roads and Highways in the Study Area

Traffic data collected continuously for 24 hours by visual observation and counting of vehicles under three categories, viz., heavy motor vehicles, light motor vehicles and two/three wheelers. As traffic densities on the roads are high, two skilled persons were deployed simultaneously at each station during each shift- one person on each of the two directions for counting the traffic. At the end of each hour, fresh counting and recording was undertaken. Total numbers of vehicles per hour under the three categories were determined.

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8

Day Night

Name of National/State Highway

Direction Dispatched Ratio in Percentage Up Down

SH-17 Narnaul Rajota 40 MDR towards SH-14 Meghat Hala Narnaul 30 MDR towards NH-8 Nangal Chaudhry Narnaul 30 Total Mineral transported through National and State Highways 100



Table 4.17: No. of Vehicles per Day # Vehicles

Distribution

Number of Vehicles Distribution/Day

(PCU) Total Number of Vehicle in PCU

Total Number of Vehicle (PCU)/Hour

SH-17 MDR

towards SH-14

MDR towards

NH-8

SH-17 MDR towards SH-14

MDR towards

NH-8

SH-17 MDR towards SH-

14

MDR towards NH-8

1. Cars 3165 702 729 1 3165 702 729 132 29 30 2. Buses 845 604 587 3 2535 1812 1761 106 76 74 3. Trucks 1359 505 511 3 4077 1515 1533 170 63 64 4. Two

wheelers 1329 536 548

0.5 665 268 274 28 11 11

5. Three wheelers

687 1043 1165 0.75

515 782 874 21 33 36

Total 7385 3390 3540 10957 5079 5151 457 212 215

Table 4.18: Existing Traffic Scenario and LOS Road V (Volume in

PCU/hr) C (Capacity in

PCU/hr) Existing V/C

Ratio LOS

SH-17 457 1250 0.365 B MDR towards SH-14 212 900 0.235 B MDR towards NH-8 215 900 0.238 B

Source: IRC: SP:37:2010

V/C LOS Performance 0.0-0.2 A Excellent 0.2-0.4 B Very Good 0.4-0.6 C Good/ Average/ Fair 0.6-0.8 D Poor 0.8-1.0 E Very Poor

Note: Capacity as per IRC: 64-1990 During Mine Operation Total Capacity of mine : 75,24,000 TPA No. of working days : 300 Extraction & Transportation of mineral : 25,080 MT/day Working hours per day : 8+8=16 hour (2 shifts) Truck Capacity : 30 Tones Frequency of trucks/tankers deployed/day (44 No’s x 19 trips/day x 2(up/down) : 1672 Frequency of trucks deployed/hr : 105 Increase in PCU/hr : 315

Table 4.19: Modified Traffic Scenario & LOS Road Increased PCU’s-

State/National Highway

V C Modified V/C Ratio

LOS

SH-17 315x40% = 126 457+126 = 583 1250 0.47 C

District Road towards SH-14

315x30% = 95 212+95 = 307 900 0.34 C

District Road towards NH-8

315x30% = 94 215+94 = 309 900 0.34 C

4.9.1 Conclusion Not much impact on local transport as only 44 dumpers/day [44 no. x 19 trips/day x 2 (up/down) = 1672] will be required for transport of mineral from mine. The LOS value from the proposed mining will be Change for all



roads i.e. SH-17, District Road towards NH-8 and District Road towards SH-14 from ‘Very Good’ to ‘Good’. So the additional load on the carrying capacity of the concern roads is not likely to have any significant adverse affect.

Figure 4.13: Showing the Typically Haul Road which is Connected to Highways for Transportation of Stone

4.10 BASELINE STATUS FOR FLORA AND FAUNA 4.10.1 Introduction The ecology is the scientific analysis and study of interactions among organisms and their environment. It is an interdisciplinary field that includes biology and Earth science. The biodiversity and conservation discipline explores natural landscapes, species and ecosystems and acquires theories and practical methods in preserving environments and organisms. Biodiversity refers not only to endangered species but also to every organism, including microbes and fungi. Biodiversity and conservation program increase awareness and understanding of how human life depends on preserving animal species and natural ecosystems. Biodiversity and conservation is connected to similar disciplines like environmental science, natural resources management and animal sciences. 4.10.2 Baseline Study Area and Period The baseline study was conducted for the evaluation of the floral and faunal biodiversity of the terrestrial and aquatic environment of the study area and it comprises of 56 villages [50 village in Mahendergarh District (Haryana), 2 village in Jhunjhunu District and 4 village in Jaipur District Rajasthan]. Field study period: The ecological survey has been conducted for one season. The ground truthing has been conducted on 8th and 9th Feb., 2016. Survey sites: Bakhrija Plot 4 Project site. Core zone: At the project site along 1 Km periphery. Buffer zone: Around the project site in 10 Km radius 4.10.3 Methodology for Terrestrial Ecology The primary objective of survey was to describe the floral and faunal communities within the study area. The sampling plots for floral inventory were selected randomly in the suitable habitats (Anderson, 1867; Jain and Rao, 1983; Dixit, 1984; Wilson and Reeder, 2005; Kumar, 2013; Kumar et al., 2013). The methodology adopted for faunal survey involve random survey, opportunistic observations, diurnal bird observation, active search for reptiles, faunal habitat assessment, active search for scats and foot prints, animal



call, and review of previous studies. The aim was to set baselines in order to monitor and identify trends after the commissioning of the mining activity. Emphasis has been placed on presence of endemic species, threatened species if any present in the study area. The qualitative study has been carried out only. Desktop literature review was conducted to indentify the representative spectrum of threatened species, population and ecological communities listed by IUCN, WCMC, ZSI, BSI and Indian Wild life Protection Act, 1972 (Bentham and Hooker, 1862-1883; Hunter, 1879; Dixit, 1984; Ghosh et al., 2004; Lushington, 1915; Wilson and Reeder, 1993; BirdLife International, 2000; BirdLife International, 2004a, b; Wilson and Reeder, 2005; BirdLife International, 2010; Kumar and Srivastava, 2012; Kumar, 2013; Kumar et al., 2013; Kumar and Aggarwal, 2013a,b). The status of individual species was assessed using the revised IUCN/SSC category system (WCMC, 1988; IUCN, 1994; WCMC, 2000; IUCN, 2001, 2003, 2008, 2010). The villages covered for baseline study are given in the table 1a and mode of data collection in table 4.20.

Table 4.20. List of Villages for Baseline study

S. No. Name of Village S. No. Name of Village Mahendergarh (Haryana) 1. Akbarpur 36. Naredi 2. Antri 37. Nizampur 3. Bashirpur 38. Nalaja Ki Dhani 4. Bayal 39. Nangal Kaliya 5. Bayan Ki Dhani 40. Nuniya Ka Nangal 6. Baindhwala ki Dhani 41 Palra 7. Begopur 42. Pipa Ka Nangal 8. Berondlla 43 Panchota 9. Bohali 44. Rawatan Ki dhani 10. Bhojawas 45. Ruppur Sarai 11. Bhedanti 46. Sareli 12. Biharipur 47. Shahbaqzpur 13. Bhakrija 48. Sirohi 14. Chhilro 49. Tehla 15. Chapra Bibipur 50. Talot 16. Dholera Jhunjhunu 17. Dattal 1. Jamlapur 18. Nangal Durgu 2. Kanwar Ka Nangal 19. Daungell Jaipur 20. Ghataser 1. Dostpur 21. Gangutana 2. Deota 22. Goonri 3. Dhankhera 23. Ghataser 4. Dilpura 24. Islampur 25. Jodha Singh Ki Dhani 26. Jainpur 27. Karoli 28. Karota 29. Kamanliya 30. Lajota 31. Lodawali Dhani 32. Mausampur 33. Meghot Bija 34. Mohanpur 35. Musnota

Table 4.21. Mode of data collection and parameters considered during the Survey

S. No.

Aspect Data Mode of Data collection

Parameters monitored

Remarks



1. Terrestrial Ecology

Primary data collection

By field survey Floral and Faunal diversity

Random survey, opportunistic observations, diurnal bird observation, active search for reptiles, faunal habitat assessment, active search for scats and foot prints, animal call

2. Secondary data collection

From authentic sources viz. Forests department of Haryana and available published literatures from ZSI, BSI etc.

Floral and Faunal diversity and study of vegetation, forest type, importance etc.

Bentham and Hooker, 1862-1883; Hunter, 1879; Dixit, 1984; Ghosh et al., 2004; Lushington, 1915; Wilson and Reeder, 1993; BirdLife International, 2000; BirdLife International, 2004a, b; Wilson and Reeder, 2005; BirdLife International, 2010; Kumar and Srivastava, 2012; Kumar, 2013; Kumar et al., 2013; Kumar and Aggarwal, 2013a,b). The status of individual species was assessed using the revised IUCN/SSC category system (WCMC, 1988; IUCN, 1994; WCMC, 2000; IUCN, 2001, 2003, 2008, 2010.

3. Aquatic Ecology

Primary data By field survey Floral and Faunal diversity

For Plankton Study- Lackey’s drops method and light microscope For other aquatic- Random survey, opportunistic observations

4. Secondary data collection

From authentic sources viz. Forests department of Haryana.

Floral and Faunal diversity and study of vegetation, forest type, importance etc.

Desktop literature review to indentify the representative spectrum of threatened species, population and ecological communities.

4.10.4 Terrestrial Floral and Faunal Components of the Study Area The area for the present biological baseline study falls under 56 villages. The area falls under agro-climatic zone VI as per IASRI http://www.iasri.res.in/agridata/12data/chapter1/db2012tb1_2.pdf. The plantation on road side and domesticated plants in villages were scattered. There is dry deciduous forest falling in the study area. The study area belongs to plain, undulating, fallow land and some grazing land; the thick vegetation cover observed in the south to west with scrub. The major trees were Neem (Azadirachta indica) Khejri (Prosopis cineraria), Babool (Acacia nilotica) and few shrubs of Bilayati baool (Prosopis juliflora) as dominant vegetation. The people were engaged in mustard cultivation during the study period. The crop is depending on rain, as there is no other means of water for irrigation. Some part of the study area has bore/tube wells, but the water table is more than 100 m.



Figure 4.14. Aquatic Habitat of the Study Area

Figure 4.15. Agriculture Land of Study Area



Figure 4.16. Lease area for Stone mining

There are patches of small rocks having scrub vegetation. The tree species, herbs and shrubs and major crops were documented during this base line study.

Figure 4.17 . Scrub Area



Figure 4.18. Vegetables in the study area

4.10.5 Floral Diversity of the Study Area The objective of this floral inventory of the study area is to provide necessary information on floristic structure in the study area for formulating effective management and conservation measures. The climatic, edaphic and biotic variations with their complex interrelationship and composition of species, which are adapted to these variations, have resulted in different vegetation cover, characteristic of each region (Ohasi, 1975). The tree species, herbs, shrubs, climbers and major crops, were documented during this base line study (Jain, 1968; 1991). Trees: The dominant trees in the study area are Azadirachta indica (Neem), Khejari (Prosopis cineraria), Babool (Acacia nilotica), Mangifera indica (Aam). Total 18 species of trees belong to 10 families are enumerated from the study area.

Table 4.22. Trees in the Study area S.No. Family and Scientific name Vernacular name

1 Anacardiaceae 1/1 Mangifera indica L. Aam 2 Apocynaceae

2/1 Plumeria rubra L. Champa 3/2 Tamarindus indica Imli 3 Caricaceae

4/1 Carica papaya L. Papaya 4 Fabaceae

5/1 Dalbergia sisoo Shisam 5 Meliaceae

6/1 Azadirachta indica A.Juss Neem 6 Mimosaceae

7/1 Acacia nilotica Babool 8/2 Leucaena leucocephala (Lam.) De Pardesi Baval



9/3 Pithecellobium dulce (Roxb.) Bth. Jungle jalebi 10/4 Prosopis cineraria (L.) Khejari 11/5 Acacia senegal (L.) Willd, Babool

7 Moraceae 12/1 Ficus benghalensis L. Bargad 13/2 Ficus religiosa L. Pipal

8 Myrtaceae 14/1 Eucalyptus sp. Nilgari 15/2 Syzygium cumini Jamun

9 Rhamnaceae 16/1 Zizyphus mauritiana Ber 17/2 Zizyphus xylopyrus Jungle Ber 10 Rutaceae

18/1 Aegle marmelos Bel Shrubs: Total 12 shrub species belong to 12 families are enumerated from the study area. The dominant shrub community in this area was represented by Prosopis juliflora (Bilayati babool), Calotropis procera, (Akoda), etc. The shrubs observed in the study area are given in the table below.

Table 4.23. List of Shrubs in the Study Area S.No. Family and Scientific name Vernacular name 1 Asclepiadaceae 1/1 Calotropis procera Akoda 2 Cactaceae 2/1 Cereus peruvianus Cactus 3 Compositae 3/1 Xanthium strumarium L. Gokhru 4 Convolvulaceae 4/1 Ipomoea fistulosa Besharm 5 Euphorbiaceae 5/1 Ricinus communis L. Arand 6 Musaceae 6/1 Musa paradisiaca L. Kela 7 Mimosaceae 7/1 Prosopis juliflora Bilayati babool 8 Nyctaginaceae 8/1 Bougainvillea spectabilis Willd. Bougainvelia 9 Rhamnaceae 9/1 Zizyphus nummularia Jharbera 10 Punicaceae 10/1 Punica granatum Anar 11 Rutaceae 11/1 Citrus limon Neebu 12 Lythraceae 12/1 Lawsonia inermis Mehandi

Herbs: The most of the undergrowth was dried up, except near water logged regions and along the periphery of the village ponds. Total 8 herbaceous species belongs to 7 family (agricultural crops not included) were recorded from the study area.

Table 4.24. List of Herbaceous species observed in the study area S. No. Family and Scientific name Vernacular name

1 Asteraceae 1/1 Tridax procumbens L Bhangra 2 Lamiaceae ( Labiatae)



2/1 Ocimum sanctum L. Tulsi 3 Papilionaceae

3/1 Cortalaria medicaginea Lam Ran methi 4 Poaceae (Gramineae)

4/1 Saccharum munja Munja 5/4 Pennisetum typhoides (Burm.) Bajri 5 Pontederiaceae

6/1 Eichhornia crassipes (Mart.) Jalkumbhi 6 Solanaceae

7/1 Datura metel Dhatura 7 Zygophyllaceae

8/1 Tribulus terrestris L Gokhru Climbers and Twiners: Only Cuscuta chinensis (Amarbel) from Cuscutaceae family was observed in the entire study area.

Figure 4.19. Climbers in the study area

4.10.6 Cultivated Plants in the Study Area The prevalent cropping systems of this area are the cumulative results of past and present decisions by individuals; these decisions are usually based on experience, tradition, expected profit, personal preferences and resources, and so on. The crop occupying the highest percentage of the sown area of this region is taken as the major crop and all other possible alternative crops which are sown in this region either as substitutes of the base crop in the same season or as the crops which fit in the rotation in the subsequent season, are considered as minor crop. a. Major Crops: Mainly people of this area was dependent on rain to cultivate the corps. Major crops in the study area are Mustard (Brassica campestris var.) and Wheat (Triticum aestivum). The other corps were grown Maize (Zea mays), and Bajra (Pennisetum glaucum). b. Minor crops: The minor crops of this region are Green gram (Vigna radiate), Pigeon Pea (Punica granatum) and Black Gram (Vigna mungo). c. Major horticultural crops: Aam (Mangifera indica L.), Papaya (Carica papaya L.), Banana (Musa Paradisiaca L.), Lime (Citrus aurantifolia), Guava (Psidium guajava), Jack-fruit (Artocarpus heterophyllus) and Jujube (Ziziphus mauritiana). d. Major Vegetable corps: The major vegetables grown in the study area were: 1. Brinjal: Solanum melongena. 2. Cabbage: Brassica oleracea. 3. Carrot: Daucus carota. 4. Cauliflower: Brassica oleracea. 5. Chilli: Capsicum annum. 6. Coriander: Coriandrum sativum 7. Garlic: Allium sativum 8. Onion: Allium cepa.



9. Potato: Solanum tuberosum. 10. Pumpkin: Cucurbita moschata. 11. Radish: Raphanus sativus. 12. Spinach: Beta olirecia. 13. Tomato: Lycopersicum esculantum

e. Major Ornamental Plants: Following is the list of ornamental plants in the study area. 1. Marigold: Tagates erecta. 2. China rose: Hibiscus rosasinensis. 3. Sunflower: Helianthus annuus. 4. Rose: Rosa indica. 5. Jasmin: Jasminum sambac. 4.10.7 Rare and Endangered Flora in the Study Area: The IUCN Red List is the world's most comprehensive inventory of the global conservation status of plant and animal species. It uses a set of criteria to evaluate the extinction risk of thousands of species and subspecies. These criteria are relevant to all species and all regions of the world. With its strong scientific base, the IUCN Red List is recognized as the most authoritative guide to the status of biological diversity. Out of 17000 species of higher plants known to occur in India, nearly 614 higher plant species were evaluated by IUCN. Among them 247 species are under threatened category (IUCN, 2008). Among the enumerated flora in the study area, none of them were assigned any threat category by Red data book of Indian Plants (Jain and Sastry, 1984; Nayar and Sastry, 1987; 1988; 1990; Oldfield et al., 1998; Kholia and Bhakuni, 2009) and Red list of threatened Vascular plants (IUCN, 2010). 4.10.8 Endemic Plants of the Study Area: De Candolle (1855), Swiss botanist, first used the concept of Endemic, which is defined as an area of a taxonomic unit, especially a species which has a restricted distribution or habitat, isolated from its surrounding region through geographical, ecological or temporal barriers. Out of 17000 species of known flowering plants of India nearly 5000 species are said to be endemic. Nearly 58 genera and 1932 taxa are found to be endemic to peninsular India (Nayar, 1980; Ahmedullah and Nayar, 1986; 1987; Jain 1992; Nayar, 1996; Vijaya Shankar et al., 2005; Nautiyal et al., 2009a,b; Shendage et al., 2010). Among recorded plant species none can be assigned the status of endemic plant of this region. 4.10.9 Status of the Forest, Their Category in Study Area: 1. Panchnota Protected Forest, 5.2 Km in SW, 2. Minaka Nangal PF , 8.4 Km in S. 3. Balupura PF, 8.1Km in NW.

4.10.10 Faunal Biodiversity of Study Area For the documentation of the faunal biodiversity of the study area with respect to birds, reptiles, amphibians, and butterfly species, a baseline survey had been conducted. Birds: The sighting of bird species was very lass during the study period. The most commonly spotted bird species of this area were; Cattle Egret, Intermediate Egret, Red-wattled Lapwing, Rock Pigeon, Eurasian Collared-Dove, Chestnut-headed Bee-eater, Bank Myna and Common Myna. Francolin and Quail are very common to this place and people used to hunt them for eating. The Indian Peafowl was observed which is listed as schedule –I as per IWPA, 1972 and others listed as schedule IV as per IWPA, 1972. Total 1,224 bird species reliably recorded from India, together with their status categories. In total there are 1219 extant native species including migrants and vagrants (but excluding 3 species now known to be extinct in the country and 2 introduced species). There are 923 breeding species (911 residents, plus 12 suspected residents). IUCN evaluated 1254 bird species from India and categorized 77 species as threatened (13 species as critically endangered, 10 species as Endangered and 54 species as Vulnerable). No one sighted birds were evaluated as near threatened by IUCN, 2010 and BirdLife International, 2010. A taxon is Near Threatened, when it has been evaluated against the criteria but does not qualify for Critically Endangered, Endangered or Vulnerable categories, but is close to qualifying or is likely to qualify for a threatened category in the near future. List of schedule -1 as per Wild life Protection Act 1972, species is given in the table 4.25. Systematic account of the birds in the study area with the status of occurrence is given in the table 4.26.

Table 4.25. Schedule –I Bird(s) of Study Area Species As IWPA 1972 IUCN CITES

Indian Peafowl (Pavo cristatus)

Schedule I Least Concern ver 3.1 Not listed



Figure 4.20. Peafowl in the study area

Table 4.26. Systematic Lists of Birds in the Study Area with Its Distribution and Migratory Status Old Common name New Common Name Scientific Name Dist. I ORDER: APODIFORMES Family: Apodidae (swifts) Common Swift Common Swift Apus apus R House swift Little Swift Apus affinis R II ORDER: BUCEROTIFORMES Family: Upupidae Hoopoe Hoopoe Upupa epops R III ORDER: FALCONIFORMES Family: Accipitridae (Vulture, Sparrow hawk, Eagle, Harrier, Kite and Vulture) Shikra Shikra Accipiter badius R Black-winged Kite Black-winged Kite Elanus caeruleus R IV. ORDER: CICONIIFORMES Family: Ardeidae (heron, Egret, Bittern) Cattle Egret Cattle Egret Bubulcus ibis R

Median or Smaller Egret Intermediate Egret Mesophoyx intermedia Egretta intermedia R

Little Egret Little Egret Egretta garzetta R Pond Heron Indian Pond-Heron Ardeola grayii R Family: Charadriidae (Plover, Stilt, Oystercatcher, Lapwing, Avocet ) Red-wattled Lapwing Red-wattled Lapwing Vanellus indicus R V ORDER: COLUMBIFORMES Family: Columbidae (Pigeon, Dove) Blue Rock Pigeon Rock Pigeon Columba livia R Ring Dove Eurasian Collared-Dove Streptopelia decaocto R Rufous Turtle Dove Oriental Turtle-Dove Streptopelia orientalis R Spotted Dove Spotted Dove Streptopelia chinensis R VI: ORDER: CORACIFORMES Family: Dacelonidae (Kingfishers) White breasted Kingfisher White-throated Kingfisher Halcyon smyrnensis R Family: Coraciidae (Roller) BlueJay or Roller Indian Roller Coracias benghalensis R Family: Meropidae (Bee Eater) Chestnut-headed Bee-eater Chestnut-headed Bee-eater Merops leschenaulti R Blue-cheeked Bee-eater Blue-cheeked Bee-eater Merops persicus R VII. ORDER: CUCULIFORMES Family: Cuculidae (cuckoo, Koel)



Koel Asian Koel` Eudynamys scolopacea R Indian Drongo Cuckoo Drongo Cuckoo Surniculus lugubris R VIII. ORDER: GALLIFORMES Family: Phasianidae (Peafowl, Partridge, Quail, Spur fowl, Jungle fowl, Monal) Common Peafowl Indian Peafowl Pavo cristatus R Grey Partridge Grey Francolin Francolinus pondicerianus R Common Quail Common Quail Coturnix coturnix R Red jungle fowl Red jungle fowl Gallus domesticus R IX. ORDER: GRUIFORMES Family: Rallidae (Waterhen, coot, crake water cock, Moorhen, Rail) White-breasted Water hen White-breasted Water hen Amaurornis phoenicurus R Indian Moorhen Common Moorhen Gallinula chloropus R X. ORDER: PASSERIFORMES Family: Paridae (Tit) Grey Tit Great Tit Parus major R Family: Corvidae Raven Common Raven Corvus corax R House Crow House Crow Corvus splendens R Black drongo- King Crow Black Drongo Dicrurus macrocercus R Tree Pie Rufous Treepie Dendrocitta vagabunda R Family: Muscicapidae (Short wing, Chat, Robin, Shama Indian Robin Indian Robin Saxicoloides fulicata R Pied Bushchat Pied Bushchat Saxicola caprata R Family: Nectariniidae (Sun Birds, Flower pecker, Spider hunter ) Purple Sunbird Purple Sunbird Nectarinia asiatica R Small Sunbird Crimson-backed Sunbird Nectarinia minima R Family: Passeridae (Avadavat, Pipit, Wagtail, Munia, Snowfinch, Sparrow, Accentor) House Sparrow House Sparrow Passer domesticus R Family: Pycnonotidae (Bulbul) Red-whiskered Bulbul Red-whiskered Bulbul Pycnonotus jocosus R Red-vented Bulbul Red-vented Bulbul Pycnonotus cafer R Family: Sturnidae (Myna, Starling) Bank Myna Bank Myna Acridotheres ginginianus R Indian Myna Common Myna Acridotheres tristis R Family: Sylviidae (Warbler, Browning, Fulvetta, Babbler, Laughing thrash, Tailor birds) Common Babbler Common Babbler Turdoides caudatus R XI. ORDER: PSITTACIFORMES Family: Psittacidae (Parrot and Parakeet) Rose-ringed Parakeet Rose-ringed Parakeet Psittacula krameri R Family: Ploceidae Baya Baya weaver Ploceus philippinus R

Note: R = Widespread Resident, r = Very Local Resident, W = Widespread Winter Visitor, w = Sparse Winter Visitor, RW =Resident and winter visitor as per the Distribution (Dist.) given in WCMC, Check list of Indian Birds.



Figure 4.21. Nesting of Birds in the Study area

Butterflies from the study area: Butterflies from three families observed during the present study are documented in the table below.

Table 4.27. Butterflies in the Study Area Scientific Name and Family Common Name Relative Abundance Family Papilionidae

Papilio polytes Common Mormon Common Family Pieridae

Eurema hecabe Common Grass yellow Very Common Ixias Marianne White orange tip Common

Family: Nymphalidae Danaus chrysippus Plain Tiger Common

Phalantha phalantha Common Leopard Fairy Common Hypolimanas misippus Danaid egg fly Common

Mycalesis perseus Common bush brown Uncommon Herpetofauna: In amphibian group, the toads were sighted during the study period. The reptile, Common Garden Lizard, House Gecko and Fan-Throated Lizard were observed in the region is given in the table below.

Table 4.28. Reptiles and Amphibian in the Study Area S.No. Common Name Scientific name Schedule as IWPA, 1972

1. Toad Bufo bufo Not listed 2. Common Garden Lizard Calotes versicolor Not listed 3. Fan-Throated Lizard Sitana ponticeriana Not listed 4. House Gecko Hemidactylus flaviviridis Not listed 5. Indian Cobra* Naja naja (L) Schedule II *Not sighted but included as per the secondary information from the villagers. Mammals: The wild mammals observed other than the domesticated ones are given in the table below. Common Mongoose (Herpestes edwardsii), Jackal (Canis aureus) and Monkey (Macaca mulatta) were observed which are protected under schedule II and Nilgai (Boselaphus tragocamelus) is Schedule-II animal as



per Wildlife Protection Act 1972. Bat (Rousettus leschenaulti) and Common House Rat (Rattus rattus) are protected under schedule V.

Table 4.29. Mammals in Study Area S.No. Common Name Scientific name Status as per IWPA 1972

1. Bat Rousettus leschenaulti Schedule V 2. Common House Rat Rattus rattus Schedule V 3. Common Mongoose Herpestes edwardsii Schedule II 4. Five striped Palm Squirrel Funambulus pennanii Schedule IV 5. Hare Lepus nigrigolis dayanus Schedule IV 6. Jackal* Canis aureus Schedule II 7. Nilgai (Blue Bull) Boselaphus tragocamelus Schedule-III

Fishes: During the study period, there were no any major pond or river (aquatic body) was observed. The small fishes observed in few village ponds along with tadpoles. Domestic Animals The domestic animals viz. Dog, cow, buffalo, goat, sheep and chicken observed in the study area are listed in the table below. Some people of this area practising poultry farming and some are sheep and goat farming.

Table 4.30. Domestic Animals in Study area S.No. English/Hindi Name Scientific Name

1. Buffalo/ Bhains Bulbalus bulbalis 2. Chicken/Murga Gallus gallus domesticus 3. Cow/Gai Bos primigenius 4. Dog/Kutta Canis lupus familiaris 5. Goat/Bakri Capra aegagrus hircus 6. Sheep/Bhed Ovis aries 7. Camel/Oont Camelus dromedarius

Rare and Endangered Fauna of Study Area: The IUCN Red List is the world's most comprehensive inventory of the global conservation status of plant and animal species. It uses a set of criteria to evaluate the extinction risk of thousands of species and subspecies. These criteria are relevant to all species and all regions of the world. With its strong scientific base, the IUCN Red List is recognized as the most authoritative guide to the status of biological diversity. IUCN, (2008) has evaluated 1976 animal species from India, among them 313 have in recognized as threatened species. Among them one species is considered as extinct, while 44 species are in critically endangered (CR) category, 88 is in endangered category (EN), while 181 is considered as vulnerable (VU). Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972, amended on 17th January 2003, is an Act to provide for the protection of wild animals, birds and plants and for matters connected therewith or ancillary or incidental thereto with a view to ensuring the ecological and environmental security of the country. Some of the sighted fauna was given protection by the Indian Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972 by including them in different schedules. Among the birds in the study area, Pea fowl (Pavo cristatus) is included in schedule I of Wild life protection Act (1972), while many other birds are included in schedule IV. Among the reptiles, Indian Cobra (Naja naja) were provided protection as per Schedule-II of Wild life Protection Act, (1972). Among mammals; there is no any species found under schedule-I while Common Mongoose (Herpestes edwardsi), Jackal (Canis aureus (Linnaeus) are a schedule –II animals. Nilgai (Boselaphus tragocamelus) is protected as Schedule-III animal and hares and five stripped squirrels are included in schedule IV of Wild Life Protection act 1972. The authenticated list of Flora and Fauna from DFO Mahendragarh is enclosed as Annexure XI. Endemic Fauna of the Study Area: None of the sighted animal species can be assigned endemic species category of the study area.

Table 4.31. List of Schedule –I and II Fauna Observed During the Study S.No. Scientific

Name Local Name Schedule As Per

(WPA, 1972) IUCN Category CITES Listing

1. Pavo cristatus Indian Peafowl Schedule I Least Concern ver 3.1 Not listed 2. Canis aureus Jackal Schedule II Least Concern ver 3.1 Appendix II 3. Herpestes

edwardsi Common

Mongoose Schedule II Least Concern ver 3.1 Appendix III

4. Naja naja Indian Cobra Schedule II Least Concern ver 3.1 Appendix II



4.10.11CONCLUSION The baseline study was conducted for the evaluation of the floral and faunal biodiversity of the terrestrial environment of the study area (10 Km radius from the lease mine area) and it comprises of total 56 villages and its nearby area of Tehsil Narnaul and Kotputali. The primary objective of survey was to describe the floral and faunal communities within the study area. The sampling plots for floral inventory were selected randomly in the suitable habitats. The ecological survey has been conducted for one season. The dominant trees in the study area are Azadirachta indica (Neem), Khejari (Prosopis cineraria), Babool (Acacia nilotica), Mangifera indica (Aam). Total 18 species of trees belong to 10 families and 13 shrub species belong to 13 families are enumerated from the study area. The most of the undergrowth was dried up, except near water logged regions and along the periphery of the village ponds. Total 8 herbaceous species belongs to 7 family (agricultural crops not included) were recorded from the study area. Major crops in the study area are Mustard (Brassica campestris var.) and Wheat (Triticum aestivum). The other corps were grown Maize (Zea mays), and Bajra (Pennisetum glaucum. Among the enumerated flora in the study area, none of them were assigned any threat category by Red data book of Indian Plants. No any reserve or protected forest was observed in the study area.In case of avifauna, the most commonly spotted bird species of this area were; Cattle Egret, Intermediate Egret, Red-wattled Lapwing, Rock Pigeon, Eurasian Collared-Dove, Chestnut-headed Bee-eater, Bank Myna and Common Myna. Francolin and Quail are very common to this place and people used to hunt them for eating. The Indian Peafowl was observed which is listed as schedule –I as per IWPA, 1972 and others listed as schedule IV as per IWPA, 1972. In amphibian group, the toads were sighted during the study period. The reptile, Common Garden LizardHouse Gecko and Fan-Throated Lizard, were observed in the region. Common Mongoose (Herpestes edwardsii) and Jackal (Canis aureus) were observed which are protected under schedule II and Nilgai (Boselaphus tragocamelus) is Schedule-II animal as per Wildlife Protection Act 1972. None of the sighted animal species can be assigned endemic species category of the study area. 4.11 SOCIO-ECONOMIC SURVEY 4.11.1 Introduction Any developmental activity exerts a direct impact on the socio-economic environment of the region. Usually, the beneficial impacts such as better job opportunities, improved education, communication, energy, housing, health, transportation facilities etc. outweighs the adverse impacts. The study of socio-economic component of environment is incorporating various facets, viz. demographic structure, availability of basic amenities such as housing, education, health and medical services, occupation, water supply, sanitation, communication and power supply, prevailing diseases in the region as well as features such as places of tourist attraction and monuments of archaeological importance. The study of these parameters helps in identifying predicting and evaluating the likely impacts due to project activity in the surrounding region. The project is proposed for mining of “Stone along with associated minor minerals” over an area of 34.64 ha. with production capacity of 7.52 million or 75,24,000 TPA in Village Bakhrija, Tehsil Narnaul, District Mahendergarh, Haryana by M/s Gradient Business Consulting Pvt. Ltd. It is an opencast mechanized mining project to excavate Stone along with associated minor minerals. Baseline data such as demographic pattern, occupational status, educational, health and other amenities as existing in the study area have been studied. Baseline Status The latest available data has been complied to generate the existing socio-economic scenario of the study area. Information on socio-economic profile was collected from the Primary Census Abstract CD 2011 including the population details of the region. The Socio-Economic Status of the study areas is mentioned below and the villages surveyed are enlisted in Table 4.33. Village The basic unit for rural areas is the revenue village which has definite surveyed boundaries. The revenue village may comprise of one or more hamlets but the entire village is treated as one unit for presentation of data. Study Area The study area was defined as an area within 10 km radius around the proposed mining project site. Total 62 villages are coming within the 10 km radius of the study area. All the villages are from Narnaul Tehsil of Mahendragarh District and 3 villages are from Khetri Tehsil of Jhunjhunun District of Rajasthan State. Demographic Structure Demographic structure of the study area was estimated for the selected parameters as households, population, sex ratio, scheduled caste, scheduled tribes, literacy from primary census abstract, CD 2011. The summarized



demographic structure of the study area is presented in Table 4.34, while the details of the parameters of demographic structure village wise within the 10 km radius are shown in Table 4.32.

Figure 4.22. Administrative Map

Demographic Profile of Villages In the 10 km radius of the mine site of the study area the total households are about 20474 with the total population of about 115593 having males 61465 (53.17%) and females 54128(46.82%) with the average family size is about 5.6 persons per family. Scheduled caste population is 18432 (15.94%) and Scheduled tribes population is nil in Narnaul tehsil while the scheduled tribes population can be seen only in Basai village of Khetri Tehsil of Jhunjhunun District of Rajasthan. Out of the total population in the region 73155 i.e. 63.28% are literates out of which 63.79% are male literates and 36.20% female literates. Occupational Pattern/ Economic Resource Base ‘Work’ has been defined as participation in any economically productive activity. Such participation may be physical or mental. Persons on leave and under training are also treated as workers. However, rent receivers and pensioners are not treated as workers. Total Workers Occupational pattern of the villages within 10 km is presented in Table 4.35. Occupational pattern of any region mainly depends upon its economically active group i.e. the working populations involved in different economically productive activities. The total workers further categorized as main worker, marginal and the non-working population. The workers coming under the main and marginal workers category are cultivators, agricultural labors and those engaged in live stock, forestry, fishing, hunting, and plantations, orchards and allied activities, mining and quarrying, manufacturing, processing, servicing and repairs in household industry, construction trade and commerce, transport, storage & communication, and other services Different types of workers in total worker population may be classified as - Main Workers Main workers are those who have worked for a major part of the year (i.e. at least six months or 183 days). Main activity of a person who was engaged in more than one activity was reckoned in terms of time disposition. 26314 i.e. 22.76 % of the total population comes under the main workers category. Main workers are further classified into 4 categories viz., cultivators, agricultural laborers and household workers and other main workers Cultivators For purposes of the Census a person is classified as cultivator if he or she is engaged in cultivation on land owned or held from government or held from private persons or for payment in money, kind or share. The



person who is engaged either as employer, single worker or family worker in cultivation of land is recognized as a cultivator. Cultivation involves ploughing, sowing, harvesting and production of cereals and millet crops such as wheat, paddy, jowar, bajra, ragi, etc., and other crops such as sugarcane, tobacco, ground-nuts, tapioca, etc., and pulses, raw jute and kindred fiber crop, cotton, cinchona and other medicinal plants, fruit growing, vegetable growing or keeping orchards or groves, etc. Cultivation does not include the following plantation crops–tea, coffee, rubber, coconut and betel-nuts (areca). Maximum populations in the study area are engaged as Cultivators’ i.e. depended on agriculture. The cultivaors population within the mine site area is 11975 i.e. 45.50%. Agricultural Laborers Persons working on land owned by others for wages or share in the yield have been treated as agricultural laborers. Out of the total main worker category agricultural laborers population in the 1252 (4.75%). Laborers in Household Industry The laborers engaged in household activity are quite low in all the study area. Among the total main workers 545 workers are engaged in Household activity. Other Workers All main workers i.e. those who have been engaged in some economic activity during the last one year and who are neither cultivators nor agricultural laborers or household industry workers are classified as other main workers. The type of workers that come under this category includes factory workers, plantation workers, those in trade, commerce, business, transport, construction, political or social works, all government servants, municipal employees, teachers, priests, entertainers, artists etc. The other worker category includes 12542 workers i.e. 47.66% Marginal Workers Marginal workers are those who have worked any time in the year for less than six months or 183 days but have not worked for a major part of the year. The population of marginal workers within the 10 km from the mine site comprises of about 15589 i.e. 13.48% of the total population. Non-Workers Non-Workers are those who have not worked any time at all in the year. Non-workers constitute householders, students, dependents, retired persons etc. The economy of the study area is primarily based on agriculture. The agriculture sector has thus absorbed a major portion of the working force. The categories of main workers, marginal workers & non workers are complementary to each other. Therefore, in areas where the proportion of main workers & marginal workers are high, the proportion of non workers would be naturally low. At present main workers category outweighs the marginal and non workers in the study area. The proportion of female main worker population is high as compared to their male worker counterpart because in general rural areas offer more opportunities for men & women to work in agriculture & animal husbandry etc. In view of the labor intensive nature of agricultural economy, a large number of women are required to participate in work especially during the peak seasons of agricultural operations like sowing & harvesting which are to be carried out in a short span of time covering large areas in each village. The non-worker population includes 73690 population of the total population of the study area. Economic Resource Base Agriculture and its allied activities are the major income sources of the people in the rural region of the study areas. Major crops are grown in both Kharif & Rabi seasons. Major rabi crops grown in the region are Wheat, Mustard, Barley and Gram, while the Kharif crops are Cotton, Bajra and Guar. Mainly the agriculture is dependent on rainfall due to poor irrigation facilities; the productivity of land is mostly low in the study areas. However, local population is also engaged in the stone quarrying activity either as contractors or laborers. Mining activities plays an important role in increasing the economic resource base for the people in the region. Cultural and Aesthetic Attributes As such no culturally and aesthetically important places are located within the seven study areas. Socio-economic Survey In order to access and evaluate likely impacts arising out of any development projects on socio economic environment, it is necessary to gauge the apprehensions of the people in the study areas. Methodology applied for selection of sample & data collection The methodology which is applied for primary source of data collection i.e. gathering data through field survey for socio-economic environment is depicted below: Sampling Method A judgmental and purposive sampling method was used for choosing respondents of various sections of the society i.e. Sarpanch, adult males and females, teachers, medical practitioners, businessmen, agriculture



laborers, unemployed group etc. Judgmental and purposive sampling method includes the right cases from the total population that helps to fulfill the purpose of research needs. Data Collection Method For the process of data collection through primary source certain methods are used among that are: Field Survey and Observations Field survey and observations is made at each sampling village and the socioeconomic status of that region is studied. Visits are made at hospitals, primary health centers and sub-centers to know the health status of the region. Various governmental organizations such as statistical department, department of census operations are visited to collect the population details of that region. Interview Method Structured interview method is used to collect data regarding the awareness and opinion from the samples selected of the various socio- economic sections of the community. Structured interviews involve the use of a set of predetermined questions that includes fixed and alternative questions. The questionnaire mainly highlights the parameters such as income, employment and working conditions, housing, food, water supply, sanitation, health, energy, transportation and communication, education, environment and pollution to assess the standard of living of that particular region and general awareness, opinion and expectation of the respondents about the proposed project. Interview method helps to collect more correct and accurate information as the interviewer is present during the field survey. Socio-economic survey was conducted in the villages within the study areas located in all directions with reference to the clusters. 7 villages were surveyed from study area.

• The respondents were asked for their awareness / opinion about the existing masonry stone quarry and also of their opinion about the impacts of the masonry stone quarry which are an important aspect of socio-economic environment, viz. job opportunities, education, health care, housing, transportation facility and economic status.

• The salient observations recorded during socio economic survey in the study areas are depicted below: • Livelihood of the villagers is primarily based on agriculture sector. Majority of main workforce are

engaged either in cultivation in own land & or in laboring activities in other agricultural land owners. • Majority of workers are practicing farming activities without any irrigation source, it means that area

under irrigation is very low and maximum area is covered by unirrigated land • Most of the villages have Primary School (PS) while in some villages it is extended up to Middle

School (MS). While for further education villagers go to the town places. • The main source of drinking water supply is through tap, dug well, bore well & hand pump. But

majority of respondents expressed unsatisfactory opinion regarding the availability of drinking water facility i.e. Scarcity of drinking water is a major problem in the surveyed villages

• The Government medical facilities in the form of primary health sub- centre and private medical reprsentatives are available in the villages. Villagers expressed positive opinion regarding the facilities available at the centre. ANM (Auxiliary Nurse Midwife) frequently visits all the villages and regular vaccination and health checkup camps are organized by the health centre

• Two wheelers, auto rickshaws & bus facility are the main mode of transportation used by natives in the study area

• Power supply is available in mostly all the sampling villages. Street lights are also available in all villages but frequent power cut/ load shedding problem is experienced by the people in the area

• Wood, kerosene and LPG gas is a major fuel used for cooking purpose • Availability of Post office and banking facilities in the surveyed villages • Majority of surveyed population opted positive response regarding the stone quarry activities as most of

the local population are employed in the stone crushers either as contractors, drivers, or laborers and the activity has helped in development of auxiliary as well as ancillary jobs in the region.

• The proposed employment detail during the stone quarry activity is already described in Chapter-2. Table 4.32: List of the Villages for Field Survey of Socio-Economic Environment

S. No. Villages Direction from the Mining

Site 1. Bakrija Mine Site 2. Islampur West 3. Ghataser North West



Table 4.33: Summarized Demographic Structure of the Study Area

S. No. Parameter Study Area 1. No. of Tehsils 2 2. No. of Villages 62 3. Household 20474 4. Household Ratio 5.6 5. Total Population 115593 6. Male Population 61465(53.17%) 7. Female Population 54128(46.82%) 8. Population (0-6 Years.)% 14014 (12.12) 9. Sex Ratio 880 10. Scheduled Caste % 18432(15.94) 11. Scheduled Tribes % 694 (0.60) 12. Literates % 73155(63.28) 13. Main Workers % 26314(22.76) 14. Marginal Workers % 15589(13.48) 15. Non-Workers % 73690(63.74)

Source: PCA Census 2011, Mahendragarh District, Haryana State

Table 4.34: Demographic Structure of the Study Area S.No. Villages Households Total

Population Scheduled

Caste Scheduled

Tribes Literates

Haryana State Mahendragarh District Narnaul Tehsil

1. Bhojawas(204) 398 2083 268 0 1435 2. Sheo

Ramnathpura(207) 183 998 159 0 726 3. Totaheri(206) 295 1394 322 0 926 4. Dongli(217) 175 900 156 0 611 5. Khatoli Jat(216) 173 902 100 0 606 6. Khatoli Ahir(218) 211 1091 271 0 743 7. Beroondla(219) 132 874 89 0 474 8. Khawajpur(220) 30 155 79 0 125 9. Kamania(221) 525 2780 268 0 1913 10. Nangal Pipa(223) 272 1487 130 0 1028 11. Akbarpur

Sirohi(205) 222 1199 72 0 816 12. Simli

Ismailpur(202) 170 826 164 0 590 13. Sirohi Bahali(227) 815 4678 814 0 3106 14. Chak Malikpur(228) 43 227 0 0 171 15. Nangal Kalia(225) 801 4351 412 0 3043 16. Biharipur(266) 176 1082 171 0 585 17. Antri(224) 213 1293 426 0 826

4. Tehla North 5. Nangal Pipa East 6. Nizampur West 7. Saidalipur South



18. Chhapra Bibipur(222) 329 2092 184 0 1184

19. Dholera(267) 665 3424 304 0 2263 20. Bighopur(268) 420 2228 338 0 1531 21. Sareli(295) 323 1739 549 0 1155 22. Ganwari Jat(270) 364 2110 400 0 1293 23. Ruppur Sarai(273) 282 1691 69 0 796 24. Panchnota(272) 269 1664 268 0 867 25. Niaz Alipur(271) 227 1349 193 0 849 26. Islampura(269) 191 1164 198 0 721 27. Bakrija(261) 83 552 0 0 303 28. Meghot Binja(262) 281 1487 356 0 1005 29. Meghot Hala(263) 364 2083 229 0 1423 30. Mausampur(265) 122 802 237 0 488 31. Jainpur(264) 128 878 57 0 484 32. Momanpur(243) 307 1726 277 0 1198 33. Lajota(245) 247 1481 197 0 879 34. Shahbazpur(246) 442 2457 614 0 1588 35. Gangutana(256) 79 507 39 0 301 36. Nangal Dargu(260) 788 4702 1317 0 2806 37. Mosnota(259) 753 4669 599 0 2536 38. Bayal (258) 775 4586 342 0 2708 39. Govla(257) 271 1883 206 0 1057 40. Donkhera(253) 395 2763 653 0 1584 41. Bhedanti(252) 233 1453 282 0 788 42. Saidalipur(255) 263 1350 124 0 860 43. Dostpur(254) 293 1530 322 0 1043 44. Dantal(249) 417 2191 436 0 1413 45. Nolayeja(247) 194 934 44 0 604 46. Nangal Nunia(248) 198 1135 156 0 721 47. Udepur Kataria(241) 118 687 234 0 408 48. Kalba(242) 395 2076 240 0 1379 49. Karota(209) 321 1703 485 0 1171 50. Tehla(214) 307 1794 313 0 1096 51. Narheri(289) 265 1578 243 0 834 52. Napla(287) 206 1130 276 0 712 53. Pawera(286) 414 2150 328 0 1510 54. Ghataser(284) 476 2389 599 0 1573 55. Bashirpur(281) 357 1839 258 0 1325 56. Kaloli(279) 364 1991 221 0 1173 57. Talot(282) 273 1569 138 0 1128 58. Chhilro(283) 431 2279 495 0 1553 59. Nizampur(288) 383 1963 333 0 1318

Total 18847 106098 17054 0 67352 Rajasthan State

Jhunjhunun District Khetri Tehsil

60. Tiba 232 1562 26 0 884 61. Jamalpur 335 1966 283 3 999 62. Basai 1060 5967 1069 691 3920



Total 1627 9495 1378 694 5803 Grand Total 20474 115593 18432 694 73155

Source: PCA Census 2011, Mahendragarh District, Haryana State

TABLE 4.35: Occupational Structure of the Study Area S.

No. Villages Total

Main Workers

Main Workers Marginal Workers

Non-Workers Cultivators Agricultural

Laborers Household Laborers

Other Workers

Haryana State Mahendragarh District Narnaul Tehsil 1. Bhojawas(204) 433 133 3 12 285 401 1249 2. Sheo

Ramnathpura(207) 281 133 9 6 133 125 592 3. Totaheri(206) 404 221 27 3 153 227 763 4. Dongli(217) 188 84 11 0 93 175 537 5. Khatoli Jat(216) 237 112 4 1 120 245 420 6. Khatoli Ahir(218) 207 39 61 7 100 347 537 7. Beroondla(219) 182 134 1 0 47 42 650 8. Khawajpur(220) 22 1 14 0 7 10 123 9. Kamania(221) 289 67 4 2 216 575 1916 10. Nangal Pipa(223) 322 160 0 1 161 72 1093 11. Akbarpur

Sirohi(205) 271 162 3 1 105 210 718 12. Simli

Ismailpur(202) 198 76 9 8 105 157 471 13. Sirohi Bahali(227) 1132 569 86 22 455 905 2641 14. Chak

Malikpur(228) 57 31 6 0 20 53 117 15. Nangal Kalia(225) 1075 349 49 18 659 390 2886 16. Biharipur(266) 80 14 9 1 56 174 828 17. Antri(224) 280 190 2 9 79 65 948 18. Chhapra

Bibipur(222) 231 101 11 5 114 464 1397 19. Dholera(267) 816 301 1 8 506 174 2434 20. Bighopur(268) 570 297 0 16 257 52 1606 21. Sareli(295) 289 60 1 6 222 291 1159 22. Ganwari Jat(270) 234 89 10 8 127 582 1294 23. Ruppur Sarai(273) 529 315 21 3 190 264 898 24. Panchnota(272) 151 84 1 0 66 514 999 25. Niaz Alipur(271) 48 6 0 0 42 291 1010 26. Islampura(269) 268 141 43 3 81 80 816 27. Bakrija(261) 83 35 0 1 47 224 245 28. Meghot

Binja(262) 511 231 1 1 278 101 875 29. Meghot Hala(263) 417 148 33 16 220 343 1323 30. Mausampur(265) 268 141 1 0 126 17 517 31. Jainpur(264) 355 293 0 1 61 4 519 32. Momanpur(243) 418 185 1 2 230 144 1164 33. Lajota(245) 385 225 1 7 152 193 903 34. Shahbazpur(246) 533 134 38 37 324 124 1800 35. Gangutana(256) 117 66 0 0 51 143 247



36. Nangal Dargu(260) 1147 489 5 19 634 540 3015

37. Mosnota(259) 952 503 2 19 428 458 3259 38. Bayal (258) 1239 681 63 1 494 245 3102 39. Govla(257) 546 184 109 51 202 385 952 40. Donkhera(253) 873 450 13 66 344 545 1345 41. Bhedanti(252) 293 148 33 3 109 64 1096 42. Saidalipur(255) 256 137 2 3 114 56 1038 43. Dostpur(254) 302 54 2 11 235 227 1001 44. Dantal(249) 541 189 6 29 317 395 1255 45. Nolayeja(247) 242 164 0 2 76 56 636 46. Nangal

Nunia(248) 168 61 2 0 105 194 773 47. Udepur

Kataria(241) 117 9 0 2 106 110 460 48. Kalba(242) 494 276 2 3 213 343 1239 49. Karota(209) 356 143 10 0 203 206 1141 50. Tehla(214) 387 143 3 0 241 470 937 51. Narheri(289) 344 206 5 2 131 109 1125 52. Napla(287) 252 91 49 0 112 158 720 53. Pawera(286) 654 404 0 1 249 233 1263 54. Ghataser(284) 416 108 113 10 185 531 1442 55. Bashirpur(281) 641 322 4 4 311 224 974 56. Kaloli(279) 540 344 40 5 151 387 1064 57. Talot(282) 330 13 6 8 303 127 1112 58. Chhilro(283) 323 8 4 15 296 472 1484 59. Nizampur(288) 364 157 1 10 196 653 946

Total 23658 10611 935 469 11643 15366 67074 Rajasthan State Jhunjhunun District Khetri Tehsil 60. Tiba 731 658 1 0 72 44 787 61. Jamalpur 473 345 0 0 128 12 1481 62. Basai 1452 361 316 76 699 167 4348

Total 2656 1364 317 76 899 223 6616 Grand Total 26314 11975 1252 545 12542 15589 73690

4.12 SUMMARY The generation of primary data as well as collection of secondary data and information from the site and surroundings was carried out during winter season i.e. 1st December 2015 to 29th February, 2016. The EIA study is being done for the Mine Lease (core zone) and area within 10 Km distance from mine lease boundary (buffer zone), both of which together comprise the study area. The allotted area for mining is having flat terrain with some undulations, generally slopping and rocky. The highest point in the lease area is recorded to be 308mRL and the lowest point recorded is 290mRL. The project site falls under seismic zone III which is a moderate damage risk zone (MSK VII). Many part of the state of Haryana are prone to flooding. In flood manual of Haryana, there are 102 vulnerable points in Haryana which need special attention during monsoon. Meteorological station was set-up at site to record surface meteorological parameter during study period; Winter Season, 1st December 2015 to 29th February, 2016. Ambient Air Quality Monitoring reveals that the minimum & maximum concentrations of PM10 for all the 8 AAQM stations were found to be 44.0 µg/m3 and 81.0 µg/m3 respectively and minimum and maximum concentrations of PM2.5 for all the 8 AAQM stations were found to be 15.0 µg/m3 and 33.0 µg/m3 respectively. The minimum and maximum concentrations of SO2 were found to be 5.0 µg/m3 and 11.8 µg/m3 respectively. The minimum and maximum concentrations of NO2 were found to be



11.0 µg/m3 and 32.0 µg/m3 respectively. Minimum and maximum noise levels recorded during the day time were from 46.00 Leq dB and 50.4 Leq dB respectively and Minimum and maximum level of noise during night time were 35.1 Leq dB and 40.7 Leq dB respectively. Thus noise levels at all locations were observed to be within the prescribed limits. Analysis results of ground water reveal that pH varies from 7.48 to 8.03, Total Hardness varies from 192.00 to 264.00mg/L and Total Dissolved Solid varies from 412.00 to 589.00 mg/L. The Analysis results of surface water reveal that pH varies from 6.97 to 7.41, Total Hardness varies from 148.00 to 168.00 mg/L, Total Dissolved Solids varies from 215.00 to 265.00 mg/L. Traffic study measurements were performed at State Highway-57, District Road towards SH-14 and District Road towards NH-8 to assess impact on local transport infrastructure due to this mining project. The LOS value from the proposed mining will be Change for all roads i.e. SH-17, District Road towards NH-8 and District Road towards SH-14 from ‘Very Good’ to ‘Good’. So the additional load on the carrying capacity of the concern roads is not likely to have any significant adverse affect. Random soil samples were collected up to depth of 15 cm and homogenized samples were then sent to the laboratory for analysis. The analysis results show that soil is basic in nature as pH value ranges from 6.67 to 7.87 with organic matter 1.1 % to 1.81 %. The concentration of Nitrogen, Phosphorus and Potassium has been found to be in good amount in the soil samples. Soil texture is Silty Loam. The baseline study was conducted for the evaluation of the floral and faunal biodiversity of the terrestrial environment of the study area (10 Km radius from the lease mine area) and it comprises of total 56 villages and its nearby area of Tehsil Narnaul and Kotputali. The primary objective of survey was to describe the floral and faunal communities within the study area. The sampling plots for floral inventory were selected randomly in the suitable habitats. The ecological survey has been conducted for one season. The dominant trees in the study area are Azadirachta indica (Neem), Khejari (Prosopis cineraria), Babool (Acacia nilotica), Mangifera indica (Aam). Total 18 species of trees belong to 10 families and 13 shrub species belong to 13 families are enumerated from the study area. The most of the undergrowth was dried up, except near water logged regions and along the periphery of the village ponds. Total 8 herbaceous species belongs to 7 family (agricultural crops not included) were recorded from the study area. Major crops in the study area are Mustard (Brassica campestris var.) and Wheat (Triticum aestivum). The other corps were grown Maize (Zea mays), and Bajra (Pennisetum glaucum. Among the enumerated flora in the study area, none of them were assigned any threat category by Red data book of Indian Plants. No any reserve or protected forest was observed in the study area.In case of avifauna, the most commonly spotted bird species of this area were; Cattle Egret, Intermediate Egret, Red-wattled Lapwing, Rock Pigeon, Eurasian Collared-Dove, Chestnut-headed Bee-eater, Bank Myna and Common Myna. Francolin and Quail are very common to this place and people used to hunt them for eating. The Indian Peafowl was observed which is listed as schedule –I as per IWPA, 1972 and others listed as schedule IV as per IWPA, 1972. In amphibian group, the toads were sighted during the study period. The reptile, Common Garden LizardHouse Gecko and Fan-Throated Lizard, were observed in the region. Common Mongoose (Herpestes edwardsii) and Jackal (Canis aureus) were observed which are protected under schedule II and Nilgai (Boselaphus tragocamelus) is Schedule-II animal as per Wildlife Protection Act 1972. None of the sighted animal species can be assigned endemic species category of the study area. The implementation of this mining project will generate both direct and indirect employment. Mahendergarh district in which the mine contract area falls is an agriculturally based district. All the basic facilities like road and rail network, medical facilities, post and telegraph, market, drinking water facilities and education facilities are available. The project will also provide impetus to industrialization of the area and mining would be boon for the district as it will not only result in employment opportunity but also infrastructure development and overall growth of the area. At present agriculture is the main occupation of the people as more than half of the population depends on it. With the implementation of the proposed mining project the occupational pattern of the people in the area will change making more people. It was found that most of the parameters were within the limits as per the Indian Standards. In general, there is no major threat to the quality of these parameters. Similarly, the study for the biotic factors was conducted. Hence it can be concluded that the present environment status of the study area is good enough for the project activity. Adoption of adequate pollution control measures will protect the surrounding environment.



CHAPTER: 5

ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT AND ITS MITIGATION MEASURES

5.0 INTRODUCTION

The environmental parameters likely to be affected by mining are related to many factors, i.e. physical, social, economic, agriculture and aesthetic. Opencast mining involves drilling, blasting, loading and transport of overburden and ore. The excavated stone will be transported via trucks to outsiders. The operations may disturb environment of the area in various ways, such as removal of mass, change of landscape, flora and fauna of the area, surface drainage, and change in air, water and soil quality. While for the purpose of development and economic up-liftment of people, there is need for establishment of mining industries, but these should be environment friendly. Therefore, it is essential to assess the impacts of mining on different environmental parameters, before starting the mining operations, so that abatement measures could be planned in advance for eco-friendly mining in the area. 5.1 CONSTRUCTION PHASE This is a stone mining project in the revenue estates of villages Bakhrija in District Mahendergarh. There will be no impacts as no construction stage is envisaged in this project. 5.2 OPERATION PHASE Some of the impacts identified in various phases of operation are insignificant and do not warrant much attention whereas some others are important especially with respect to the present context. Therefore objective is to identify those impacts, which are significant and require a detailed analysis for decision making or formulating adequate management measures. This section deals with an assessment of impact of various mining activities on the existing environmental conditions. The methodology of assessment is based upon identification and description of the existing project activities as well as environmental components followed by evaluating the impact of mining and associated activities on the environment. The environmental components that are likely to be influenced or modified by the continuation of project activities are:

i. Air Environment,

ii. Water Environment,

iii. Soil Environment,

iv. Noise and Vibration Environment,

v. Land Use,

vi. Hydrology

vii. Geology,

viii. Solid Waste/overburden

ix. Risk Assessment/ OH&S

x. Biological Environment,

xi. Socio-economic Environment.

5.3 AIR QUALITY MODELS A) ISCST3 Dispersion Model The Industrial Source Complex (ISC) Short Term model provides options to model emissions from a wide range of sources that might be present at a typical industrial source complex. ISCST3 is US-EPA approved model to predict the air quality. B) CALINE 4 model



The California Line Source Dispersion Model, CALINE4 (1989), uses traffic emissions, site geometry and meteorology to predict air pollutant concentrations within 500 meters of the roadways. Predictions can be made for carbon monoxide, nitrogen dioxide and suspended particles. 5.3.1 Model Setup 5.3.1.1 Emission of PM10 The major sources of PM10 emission in case of stone mining project are the loading activity at mine site (loading of material over trucks / trucks by excavators) and the movement of vehicles on unpaved haul roads. The emission rates for these sources are given in latest USEPA’s AP-42 guidelines. 5.3.1.2 Loading of Material Considering 25080 MT production per day it proposed 10 no. of excavators in the working shift of 8 hours/day. The PM10 emission rate due to loading activity is calculated using below equation.

E=k X 0.0016 X ((U/2.2)^1.3/(M/2)^1.4 ) --- AP42 (Nov 2006)

Where,

E = Emission Factor, kg/ton

k = Particle size multiplier, 0.35 for PM10

M = Moisture Content, %

u = Mean wind speed, m/s

5.3.1.3 Emission of PM10 due to Transportation The hauling of stone from the mine lease area to the end users via haul road (unpaved road) will cause emission of particulate matters. This emission will be limited to the extent of unpaved haul road starting from mining pit to nearest paved road connectivity. As per the mining plan the material will be transported during the working shift only. Each day maximum 44 dumpers (30 tones capacity each) will make 1672 trips for transporting stone. The following empirical expressions is used to estimate the quantity in pounds (lb) of size-specific particulate emissions from an unpaved road in industrial sites, per vehicle mile traveled (VMT) E=k (s/12)^a (W/3)^b+ C --- AP42 (Nov 2006) Where k, a, b are empirical constants i.e. different for different particle size. E = size-specific emission factor (lb/VMT) s = surface material silt content (%) W = mean vehicle weight (tons) C = emission factor for 1980's vehicle fleet exhaust, brake wear and tire wear, 0.0047 lb/VMT for PM10. The source characteristics s and W are referred to as correction parameters for adjusting the emission estimates to local conditions. The effective emission rate after considering reduction in emission potential of haul roads due to water sprinkling was calculated for use in CALINE4 model. 5.3.1.4 Emission of CO from Vehicles The stone will be transported outside the mining area for end use. Each hour maximum 8 dumpers will be used for transportation. In order to estimate the emission of CO from these vehicles exhaust ARAI-2007 emission factors were used in CALINE4 model. The ARAI emission factors for CO emitting from heavy vehicles (diesel) is 3.92 gm/km or 6.32 g/mile. 5.3.1.5 Summary of calculated Emission Rates

Table 5.1: Emissions Rates S. No. Activities Units Emission Rates

1. Loading g/s 0.01745 2. Transportation on Haul Road (PM10 Emission) g/mile/vehicle 95.1827 3. Transportation (CO Emission) g/mile/vehicle 6.32

5.3.2 Meteorological Data The meteorology of the project area plays very important role in dispersion of pollutants and buildup of



pollution within the atmosphere. In the present study, one season (December 2015 – February 2016) meteorological data has been taken to find the dispersion of pollutant concentration. The mixing height for study period, which is an important parameter to express the dispersive potential of atmosphere, has been taken from the atlas of hourly mixing height and assimilative capacity of atmosphere in India (Attri et al., 2008). Wind rose diagram of one season meteorological data used for modeling is shown given below in Chapter-4. 5.3.3 Input Parameters 5.3.3.1 ISCST3 Model Input Parameters The ISCST3 model was used to predict the GLC of PM10 due to loading activity at mine site. 10 excavators shall be used to load 25080 MT of stone on dumpers for further transportation to end users. Point source resembling loading activity at mine site and having equivalent emission rates were setup in mining lease to predict the maximum incremental concentration of PM10 at baseline monitoring location. The predicted incremental concentration PM10 was added to baseline concentration to obtain the cumulative concentration level at baseline stations.

5.3.3.2 CALINE4 Input Parameters

CALINE4 model was used to predict the worst case GLC of PM10 due to dumper movement on haul road (unpaved road) between the mine site and nearest paved road. In the present project, dumpers having 30 tones capacity have been proposed to transport the mined stone from mining area. The maximum number of dumpers proposed is 44 per day. The model was set-up with haul road links along the mining lease and receptors at all the AAQM locations to predict the pollutant concentration. Since CALINE4 has options to predict only 1-hour and 8-hour pollutant concentration, the model was used to predict 1-hour worst case GLC of pollutant which was later converted into 24-hour GLC using Turner Equation. The 24-hour incremental concentrations (predicted) of pollutants due to transportation were added to baseline concentrations to obtain the cumulative concentration levels.

5.3.3.3 Interpretation The maximum incremental concentration of PM10- 81.29 µg/m3 was predicted inside the core zone near active mining area (loading locations). These loading locations are generally away from sensitive receptors (settlements etc.). As the distance from source increases, the incremental concentration of PM10

drops drastically due to settling of PM10 particles under gravity. A graphical representation of the variation of PM10 concentration w.r.t. distance is presented in figure 5.1. As evident from the line graph, the maximum impact of loading activity at mine site is limited to 300m only. The predicted maximum incremental concentration due to transportation was found at A7 (Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Station - 2) wiz. 0.3µg/m3.

Figure 5.1 Incremental Concentration v/s Distance Graph

-0.10

0.10.20.30.40.50.60.70.80.9

1

150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500

Conc

entr

atio

n µg

/m3

Distance



The predicted maximum cumulative GLC of PM10 was found to be 81.029 µg/m3 at A5 (Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Station–5); which is lower than the permissible NAAQ standard for PM10 concentration (100µg/m3). The predicted 24 hours ground level concentrations at baseline air quality monitoring locations are presented in Table 5.2 below. The graphical representation is given in Figure 5.3. The predicted concentration for CO was found to be 0.0µg/m3 owing to very less traffic to and from the mining area.

Table 5.2: Predicted GLC of PM10 at Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Stations

Location Code

Location Name

Max Baseline

Conc. (µg/m3)

Predicted GLC (µg/m3)

– ISCST3 Model

Predicted GLC (µg/m3) – CALINE4

Model

Cumulative GLC

(µg/m3)

A1 Near Alipur 81 0.08 0.009 81.089 A2 Village Islampur 81 0.09 0.01 81.1 A3 Village Bakhrija 77 0.62 0.006 77.626 A4 Village Jainpur 80 0.07 0.001 80.071 A5 Village MeghotBija 81 0.2 0.09 81.29 A6 Village Meghot halla 77 0.06 0.005 77.065 A7 Near Mine Site 78 0.88 0.27 79.15

A8 Village Nangal

Dargu 75 0.04 0.001 75.041

Figure 5.2: Graphical representation of model results

The contour maps showing the predicted concentration levels of PM10 are presented in Figure 5.4 and Figure 5.5.

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8

Conc

entr

atio

n µg

/m3

Location

Max Baseline Conc. (µg/m3) Predicted GLC (µg/m3) – ISCST3 Model

Predicted GLC (µg/m3) – CALINE4 Model Permisible Limit



Figure 5.3: Spatial distribution of predicted GLCs of PM10 due to Mining

Figure 5.4: Spatial distribution of PM10 GLC due to transportation



5.3.4 Conclusion The predicted maximum cumulative GLC of PM10 was found to be 81.29 µg/m3 at A5 (Village Meghot Bija). The second highest predicted cumulative GLC of PM10 was found to be 81.1µg/m3 at A2 (Village Islampur). All predicted cumulative concentrations are lower than the permissible NAAQ standard for PM10 concentration (100 µg/m3).From the results of ISCST3 and CALINE4 models, it is concluded that the maximum cumulative concentrations of PM10 both due to mining activities and transportation are expected to be within the prescribed standards for PM10. It is to be noted that the predicted concentrations from mining activities is insignificant; whereas transportation is the major of source of dust emission. The concentration of CO due to vehicle exhaust is negligible due to small number of vehicles plying on haul road. The concentrations of SOx and NOx generated from mining area are expected to be low due to absence of any major source. The predicted concentrations are due to proposed stone mine only and higher pollutant concentrations may be observed in the study area due to simultaneous operations of other mines / anthropogenic activities, data for which is not available. The overall impact on air quality due to proposed mining project is expected to be low extending to close vicinity of mining lease area and in proximity of unpaved haul roads only. 5.4 IMPACTS OF AIR POLLUTION AND MITIGATION MEASURES

Attributes Impact Mitigation Measure Budget/annum Human A predicted cumulative

GLC of PM10 was be 81.29 µg/m3 at A5 (Village Meghot Bija) against the threshold limit of 100 µg/m3 which can cause slightly adverse effect on human health of neighboring villagers. Dust generation due to blasting and drilling or loading and unloading of mineral and due to transportation can also affect the workers as well as nearby villagers like effect on breathing and respiratory system, damage to lung tissue, cancer and premature death, influenza or asthma.

21 KLD water will be proposed for sprinkling on unpaved roads to avoid dust generation during transportation. Dust mask will be provided to the workers engaged at dust generation points like excavation and loading points. It is proposed to plant 1250 No. of local species per year with consultation of Forest department with some fruit bearing and medicinal trees, along the haul roads, outer periphery within the lease area to prevent the impact of dust in the nearby village. The dust generation due to drilling will be minimized by wet drilling and dust due to blasting will minimized by water sprinkling. Planning transportation routes of stone so as to reach the nearest paved roads by shortest route (minimize transportation over unpaved road). Alternatively, graveled road may be constructed between mine lease area and nearest paved road connectivity. The speed of trucks plying on the haul road will be limited to avoid generation of dust and covering of material during transportation on trucks to prevent stone leak from the trucks. The trucks will be covered by tarpaulin. Overloading will be avoided.

Rs. 8.00 Lakhs under Dust Suppression

Rs. 3.00 Lakhs under OHS Other fund for this activity will be utilized from ‘Mines and Mineral Development, Restoration and Rehabilitation fund’

Animal Grassing land will be reduced.

Rs. 8.0 Lakhs (Haul road and other

roads repair and maintenance)

Plant Stomatal index may be minimized due to dust deposit on leaf.

Rs. 10.00 Lakhs. (Plantation)



Crops Crop yield will be reduced.

Infrastructure There is no major impact on infrastructure due this mining operation.

-

5.4.1 Conclusion In this mining project the source of emission of air pollution is drilling, blasting, excavation, transportation, loading, hauling operation and handling of stone etc. The proposed mining operations are not anticipated to raise the concentration of the pollutants beyond prescribed limits. However, the measures are suggested to mitigate any harmful impacts of pollutants like wet drilling, water sprinkling at the time of blasting, plantation of trees along haul roads, specially near settlements, to help to reduce the impact of dust on the nearby villages; planning transportation routes of mined material so as to reach the nearest paved roads by shortest route (minimize transportation over unpaved road); regular water sprinkling on unpaved roads to avoid dust generation during transportation etc.

5.5 IMPACTS OF WATER POLLUTION AND ITS MITIGATION MEASURES Attributes Impact Mitigation Measure Budget/annum

Human The mining in the lease area may cause the ground water contamination due to intersection of the water table. The municipal waste water disposed from the mining activity may cause contamination of surface water. Domestic Water Disposal

The water table will not be intersected during mining in the lease area as depth is limited upto 92 meters as the water table is 100m bgl. Proper analysis/Monitoring will be done to check the ground water. The municipal wastewater will be disposed off into septic tanks and soak pit. No chemical having toxic elements will be used for carrying out mining activity. It is proposed to shape the landscape of the mine area and develop proper drainage system during working so as to avoid discharge of mine run off to any of the surface water channels.

Rs. 1.50 Lakhs (Monitoring) Rs. 6.00 Lakhs (Water Treatment)

Animals

Crops Ground Water contamination due to discharge of mine run off. Plantation

Infrastructure Domestic Water Disposal

Waste water will be disposed off in septic tank /soak pit. There are 4 Nos. of septic tank /soak pit of capacity 1 KL (Total 4 KL

-



capacity). Water required for domestic use= 4 KLD. Waste water generation= 3.2 KLD. The design of septic tank /soak pit has been given in figure 5.7.

The top level at 310 m amsl and surface level at 290 m amsl. The general ground water table of the project site ranges from 100 m bgl. The depth of mining will be 92 m bgl at 228m amsl, hence mining not intersect the water table during entire lease period at the site. The schematic diagram of water table (bgl and m amsl) is given below.

Figure 5.5: Site Specific Ground Water Table along with Schematic Diagram of Water Table



Figure 5.6: Design of Septic tank/Soak pit 5.5.1 Conclusion In this mining project in the entire lease period the ground water table will not be intersected hence there will be no impact on the water environment. Waste water will be disposed off in septic tank /soak pit. 5.6 IMPACTS ON SOIL ENVIRONMENT AND MITIGATION MEASURES Attributes Impact Mitigation Measure Budget/annum Human Mining activity may

increase the soil erosion and soil degradation which have adverse impact on soil fertility.

It is already proposed to plant 1250Nos. of local species per year with consultation of Forest department with some fruit bearing and medicinal trees, along the haul roads, outer periphery within the mining area which enhances the binding property of the soil to check the erosion. 21 KLD water will be proposed for sprinkling on unpaved roads to

Rs. 10.00 Lakhs (Plantation) Rs 8.0 Lakhs (Dust Suppression)

Animals

Crops Top soil extraction from lease area may also affect the soil fertility



Plantation and productivity. avoid dust generation and soil erosion. Top soil will be removed in advance of the actual mining and will be stacked in a temporary stack yard. The same will be mixed with humus and organic fertilizer and utilized for plantation.

The fund for this activity will be utilized from ‘Mines and Mineral Development, Restoration and Rehabilitation fund’


- -

5.7 IMPACTS OF NOISE/VIBRATIONS AND TRAFFIC MOVEMENT Attributes Impact Mitigation Measure Budget/annum Human Noise from the

drilling and blasting will cause some problem to the near inhabitants. Noise from the machinery can cause hypertension, high stress level, hearing loss, sleep disturbance etc due to prolonged exposure. No. of 627 PCU/hr will increase in the existing traffic due to this mining activity hence vehicle collation may occur unwanted sound and can also cause impact on human health. Ground vibration, fly rock, air blast, noise, dust and fumes are the deleterious effects of blasting on environment. The explosive energy sets up a seismic wave in the ground, which can cause significant damage to structures and disturbance to

Drilling and Blasting will be done in scientific manner to reduce the noise level. The machinery will be maintained in good running condition so that noise will be reduced to minimum possible level. Awareness will be imparted to the workers about the permissible noise level and effect of maximum exposure to those levels. Personal protective equipment will provide to prevent the noise exposure. Personal Protective Equipment will be provided during mining activity. Training will also given to Drivers for Vehicle movement. In addition, truck drivers will be instructed to make minimum use of horns in the village area and sensitive zones. It is proposed to plant 1250Nos. of local species per year with consultation of Forest department with some fruit bearing and medicinal trees, along the haul roads, outer periphery within the lease area to reduce the impact of noise in the study area. The trucks will be diverted on three roads viz. State Highway-17, District Road towards SH-14 and District Road towards NH-8 to avoid traffic congestion.

Rs. 1.50 Lakhs (Monitoring) Other fund for this activity will be utilized from ‘Mines and Mineral Development, Restoration and Rehabilitation fund’ Rs. 10.00 Lakhs (Plantation) Rs. 7.00 Lakhs (Vocational Training) Rs. 6.00 Lakhs (OH & S)

Animals



human occupants. Other fund for this activity will be utilized from ‘Mines and Mineral Development, Restoration and Rehabilitation fund’

Crops

Plantation

Infrastructure

There is no major impact on infrastructure due this mining operation.

- -

5.7.1 Conclusion In summary, it can be stated that the impact on the present noise levels due to mining operations will be restricted to the work zone areas only. The impact on the ambient noise levels will not be felt at the settlement areas due to masking effect with the existing noise levels. The drilling and blasting envisaged in the stone mining so there is an impact of vibration due to this project and scientific manner of drilling and blasting will be done to control the impact of noise and vibration. Hence, the noise levels and vibration impact due to the proposed mining operations on community will be minimal.

5.8 IMPACTS ON LAND USE AND MITIGATION MEASURES The project area does not consist of any forest land. It does not consist of any human habitations. Land use plan of the mining lease area during pre-operational, operational and post operational is incorporated in the Chapter 2. Attributes Impact Mitigation Measure Budget/annum Human The mining activity in

the mine site will be converted into the pit. Which may cause soil erosion, soil degradation etc. Reclamation of land affected by mining activities during and at the end of mining lease period.

It is proposed to plant 1250 Nos. of local species per year with consultation of Forest department with some fruit bearing and medicinal trees, along the haul roads, outer periphery within the mining area which enhances the binding property of the soil. It is proposed to improve the effected

Rs 10.00 Lakhs (Plantation)

Animals

Crops Mining in the lease area may change complete land use pattern



Plantation including topography, elevation, sediment transportation capacity etc.

land wherever possible for better land use, so as to support forestry and creation of water reservoir etc. Accordingly, the land reclamation portion shall be done by planting trees on the dumps along the roads surroundings the office building on the waste barren land and in the open pits when they reach their ultimate stage. The regular health checkup camp will be organized.

Rs 6.0 Lakhs


- -

5.8.1 Conclusion The most of the land of this lease area is Gair Mumkin Pahar and the entire excavated land will change into water reservoir for fisheries. It is an eco-friendly mining project. 5.9 Impacts on hydrology

Impact Mitigation Measure Budget/annum The mining in the mine site area may cause the ground water contamination due to intersection of the water table.

The water table will not be intersected during mining as depth of pit will be up to 92 meters at the end of 5th year as the water table is 100 m bgl. Proper analysis/Monitoring will be done to check the ground and surface water quality.

Rs 1.00 Lakh

Change the topography will divert the water flow.

There is no proposal of any stream modification/diversion due to this mining activity hence there will be no any impact on flow of water.


5.9.1 Conclusion

The flow of surface/ground water (sub surface flow) is following the trend of topography, which is in the North to South direction. There is no proposal of any stream modification/diversion. Hence, there will be no any impact on hydrology of the study area. The depth of excavation in lease area is upto 92m where ground water table is at 100 m bgl hence the water table is not expected to be intersected at any stage of mining.



5.10 IMPACTS ON GEOLOGY AND MITIGATION Impact Mitigation Measure Budget/annum

Degradation of land Adopting methods that are less wasteful, use of technologies that are user and environmentally friendly.


Degradation of stone reserves Geomorphic impacts and/ or visual intrusion.

Rehabilitation of quarries after use. Minimizing geomorphic disturbance by maximizing stone reserves through deep quarrying and avoidance of establishing small and haphazardly located quarries that contribute to environmental degradation.

5.11 IMPACTS DUE TO SOLID WASTE/OVERBURDEN AND MITIGATION MEASURES Impact Mitigation Measure Budget /annum

The mine worker will generate municipal solid waste of about 30.25 Kg per day which will have adverse impact on human health.

4 Nos. of Garbage bins will be provided for the safe disposal of solid waste.


Little amount of soil is also generated from joints and cracks.

The soil removed from mining area will be stacked separately. The soil will stacked separately in boundary barrier. Total volume of top soil will be removed and this will acquire an area of 2.079 Ha. In statuary barrier having 2m depth it will be used for plantation within year.

5.12 IMPACTS ON OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY

Impact Mitigation Measure Budget The mining of stone (minor mineral) can cause the lung disease and respiratory disorder due to dust exposure.

Dust masks will be provided as additional personal protection equipment (helmet and safety shoes) to the workers working in the dust prone area. Regular water sprinkling will be done and dust masks will be provided to the workers.

Rs. 15.0 Lakhs

Other fund for occupational health safety will be utilized from ‘Mines and Mineral Development, Restoration and Rehabilitation fund’.

Due to noise exposure, hearing disorder may be resulted.

Ear-muffs will be provided to the workers and good maintenance of vehicles will be provided

The accident at the site due to mining operation may be anticipated.

Workers are informed, kept aware and trained about possible accidents during the mining operation and persona protective equipments will be provided viz. gloves, safety shoes, dust mask, safety jackets, helmet etc. In addition to, the awareness about the occupational health hazards due to mining activities to avoid any incident will be provided to the workers Pre- placement health checkup will be made mandatory and periodic heath checkup will be done quarterly.

The detail of the proposed budget for the Occupational Health and Safety is given as in Chapter 10 of this EIA/EMP report.



5.13 IMPACT ON ECOLOGY AND BIODIVERSITY AND ITS MITIGATION MEASURE Table 5.3: Impact on Ecology due to Mining Activity

S.No Impact Mitigation Measure 1. Emulsion- Primer charge, delay Detonator and

ANFO are proposed to use for blasting during mining activity. Vibrations of blasting at mine site can hinder the fauna in the area.

Blasting (wet) will do under controlled condition and vibrations wil be minimized during the activity. The explosive will be supplied by the authorized contractor at the blasting site at the time of blasting. Al precaution will do as per DGMS for safety of mine.

2. Transportation of Stone in the trucks/dumper will disturb the movement of wild life.

Transportation of mineral will be minimize in the morning and evening and cannot be done in night. Conservation plan will be implemented.

3. Fugitive emission from vehicle movement will form a layer in leaves thus reducing the gaseous exchange process. This ultimately affects the growth of plants and crop yield.

Haul roads will be sprinkled with water which would reduce the dust emission, thus avoiding damage to the crops. In addition to avoid fugitive emission, it is proposed to include Azadirachta indica, Ficus religosa, Pongamia glabra and Ficus recimosa in the plantation program as they serve as sinks for gaseous emissions.

4. Chances of vehicle collisions with wildlife attempting to cross roads are possible.

If wildlife are noticed crossing the area, they will not be disturbed a all. Presence of Peafowl (Schedule 1) species as per Wildlife (Protection Act, 1972 was recorded from the study area. Since a Conservation Plan has been prepared by the team of experts is to be implemented the mine owner of M/s Gradient Business Consulting Pvt. Ltd. wil make his contribution to this Wildlife Management Plan after discussion with the officials in Department of Forest and Environment

5. Any human settlement in the mining area will disturb the vegetation cover and reptiles.

No human settlement will be permitted in the lease mining or nearby area.

6. The Indian peafowl movement is very common in the area; the noise from blasting and mining activity will hinder the same.

The latest equipment with sound-control devices should be used for blasting and mining activity and loading/unloading, etc. Use of exhaust silencers and optimized acoustical pipe lagging (acoustical wrapping) to minimize compressor noise.

8. Mining may drive away the wild life from their habitat, and significantly affect wildlife and nearby residents.

Green belt and community forestry should be encouraged to mitigate the noise level. Plantation will be carried out on approach roads. I wildlife are noticed crossing the area, they will not be disturbed a all. Awareness program about wildlife and its importance will be conducted for workers and nearby residents so that they will no disturb the wildlife at all. Sign boards near the Wildlife Sanctuary/national Park/Reserve forest/Protected forest will be displayed as mentioned in conservation plan. Presence of Schedule 1 species as per Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972 were recorded from the study area. Since an Integrated Conservation Plan has been prepared by the team of experts is to be implemented the mine owner of M/s Gradient Business Consulting Pvt. Ltd. wil make his contribution to this Integrated Wildlife Management Plan after discussion with the officials in Department of Forest and Environment.



5.14 IMPACTS ON SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT AND MITIGATION MEASURES

Impact Mitigation Measure Budget/annum Due to mining and transportation of stone will generate the small shops, dhabas, garage, restaurant, vegetable shops etc. along the road and generate direct employment.

Positive Impact --

Mining activity will generate direct employment by recruiting 121 people which will be employed locally and preference will be given to local people.

Positive Impact -- The fund for this activity will be utilized from ‘Mines and Mineral Development, Restoration and Rehabilitation fund’ Rs. 6.00 Lakhs

Such shops along the roads will generate solid waste and waste water which will have adverse impact on human health.

4 nos. of Garbage bins will be provided for proper disposal of solid waste. The municipal wastewater will be disposed off into septic tanks and soak pit.

Extraction of stone resultant generation of fugitive dust cause workers of the mine to suffer from occupational hazards like skin allergies, eye and respiratory problems etc

Dust mask will be provided to the workers engaged at dust generation points like excavation and loading points. Regular water sprinkling on unpaved roads to avoid dust generation.

Rs. 3.00 Lakhs Rs. 8.00 Lakhs

Further, the deep pits created in the mine site also can contribute to an increase in accidents in the working environment. This creates serious threat to residents in the area who depend on river water for their domestic purposes.

The mined out area will be convert into water reservoir and barricade with wire fencing.

The mining is planned in non monsoon seasons only.




major source of socio-health impacts of transportation will generate from truck, dust etc. Increase in accidents as a result of rash driving of dumpers carrying mineral through the roads may be possible.

It is proposed to plant 1250 No. of local species per year with consultation of Forest department with some fruit bearing and medicinal trees, along the haul roads, outer periphery within the mining area to control the dust. Planning transportation routes of mined material so as to reach the nearest paved roads by shortest route. (Minimize transportation over unpaved road). Alternatively, graveled road may be constructed between mine lease area and nearest paved road connectivity; The speed of trucks plying on the haul road should limited to avoid generation of dust; and Covering of material during transportation on trucks to prevent spillage of stone from the trucks. The trucks will be covered by tarpaulin. Overloading will be avoided. Regular water sprinkling on unpaved roads to avoid dust generation during transportation.

Rs. 10.00 Lakhs Rs. 8.00 Lakhs -

5.15 SUMMARY The proposed mining operations are not anticipated to raise the concentration of the pollutants beyond prescribed limits. However, the measures are suggested to mitigate any harmful impacts of pollutants like plantation of trees along haul roads, specially near settlements, to help to reduce the impact of dust on the nearby villages; planning transportation routes of mined material so as to reach the nearest paved roads by shortest route; regular water sprinkling on unpaved roads to avoid dust generation during drilling, blasting and transportation etc. Some of impacts may be due to increase in the PCU/hr which is 627 PCU/hr. Transportation of stone should be minimized in the morning and evening and cannot be done in night. Access roads will not encroach into the riparian zones. Fugitive emission from drilling, blasting and vehicle movement will form a layer in leaves thus reducing the gaseous exchange process. The impact on the present noise levels due to mining operations will be restricted to the work zone areas only. The impact on the ambient noise levels will not be felt at the settlement areas due to masking effect with the existing noise levels. There is drilling and blasting envisaged in the stone mining so there is a impact of vibration due to this project. Hence, the noise levels and vibration impact due to the proposed mining operations will be restricted to the work zone areas only. The soil removed from mining area will be stacked separately. There will be no impact on water environment due to mining since there is no intersection of water table due to mining activity. There will be no waste water generation from the proposed mining activity except sanitary waste water generation that will be treated in septic tanks and will be used for plantation purpose. The mine worker will generate municipal solid waste of about 30.25 Kg per day which will have adverse impact on human health. There will be 4 Nos. of garbage provided for domestic waste collection. There is no overburden generate due to mining activity. The mining activities will be done in a systematic manner by maintaining the road infrastructure and vehicle transport which will be protective measure for preserving the topography and drainage in the area. The ownership will not be changed as the land has been taken on contract which will be returned as it is after the contract period is over. No human settlement should be



permitted in the lease mining or nearby area. No mining will be carried out during the rainy season to minimize impact on aquatic life. There are 1 species of Schedule I and 3 species of Schedule II are observed during study period hence, for the same conservation plan was prepared and will be duly submitted to Chief Conservator, Forest, Panchkula, Haryana. Subsequently, a budget of Rs. 10.00 Lakhs has allotted for the conservation of wildlife species. The mining of stone is likely to increase the per capita income of local people by which the socio-economic status of the people will be improved. The local people have been provided with either direct employments or indirect employment such as business, contract works and development work like roads, etc. and other welfare amenities such as medical facilities, conveyance, free education, drinking water supply etc. Except dust generation, there is no source which can show a probability for health related diseases. Regular water sprinkling will be done with sprinkle mounted tankers and dust masks will be provided to the workers. All workers will be subjected to medical examination as per Mines Rule 1955 both at time of appointment and at least once in a year. Medical camps will be organized for this activity. Insurance of all employees as per the rules will also be carried out. R&R issues are not involved with this project. As per the point xv of LoI, the lease holder will deposit 10% of the annual contract money i.e. approx. Rs. 3.25 Crores per annum to the Mines and Minerals Development, Restoration and Rehabilitation Fund. The lease holder is bound to expend this fund every year for Restoration and Rehabilitation at the project site and surrounding area and this amount also used for the protect tion of environment, mineral conservation in the surrounding area of core and buffer zone.



CHAPTER: 6

ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM

6.0 INTRODUCTION

Regular monitoring of the various environmental parameters is necessary to evaluate the effectiveness of the management programme so that the necessary corrective measures can be taken in case there are some drawbacks in the proposed programme. Since environmental quality parameters at work zone and surrounding area are important for maintaining sound operating practices of the project in conformity with environmental regulations, the post project monitoring work forms part of Environmental Monitoring Program. Environmental Monitoring Program will be implemented once the project activity commences. Environmental Monitoring Program includes: (i) environmental surveillance (ii) analysis and interpretation of data (iii) preparation of reports to support environmental management system and (iv) organizational set up responsible for the implementation of the programme. Environmental Monitoring will be taken up for various environmental components as per conditions stipulated in Environmental Clearance Letter issued by MoEF&CC and Consent to Operate issued by the State Pollution Control Board. Compliance of same will be submitted to respective authorities on regular basis.

6.1 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT CELL In order to maintain the environmental quality within the stipulated standards, regular monitoring of various environmental components is necessary which will complied as per conditions. For this the lessee M/s Gradient Business Consulting Pvt. has taken decision to formulate an Environment Policy of the mine and constitute an Environmental Management Cell and committed to operate the proposed mine with the objectives mentioned in approved Environment Policy. (Copy of approved Environmental Policy attached as Annexure XII). The System of reporting of NC/violation of any Environmental law/Policy will be as per quality management system. The internal audit will be conducted on periodic basis and any non-conformities/violation to environment law will be closed and discussed in Management Review Meeting of Board of Director/Partners

Hierarchy

An EHS Manager will be appointed to look after all environmental issues and ensure compliance with Environmental Clearance conditions/SPCB norms. An Assistant Manager and Executive Environment Engineer will be appointed under the EHS Manager. EHS Manager will report to the Lessee directly and discuss the non-compliance if so any. An immediate solution will be arrived to ensure compliance with norms.

Figure 6.1: Hierarchy of Environment System for Dealing Environmental Issues

MANAGER (EHS)

ASST. MANAGER (ENVIRONMENT)

ENVIRONMENT EXECUTIVE (1)

HORTICULTURIST (2)

SUPERVISOR (2)



6.1.1 Responsibilities for Environmental Management Cell (EMC) The responsibilities of the EMC include the following:

i. Environmental Monitoring of the surrounding area ii. Developing the green belt/Plantation

iii. Ensuring minimal use of water iv. Proper implementation of pollution control measures v. Access the risk area

vi. Continuous review of environmental achievements. vii. Half yearly submission of Compliance reports.

viii. Internal audits and non-conformances report

6.2 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING AND REPORTING PROCEDURE Monitoring shall confirm that commitments are being met. This may take the form of direct measurement and recording of quantitative information, such as amounts and concentrations of discharges and wastes, for measurement against corporate or statutory standards, consent limits or targets. It may also require measurement of ambient environmental quality in the vicinity of a sit using ecological/biological, physical and chemical indicators. Monitoring may include socio-economic interaction, through local liaison activities or even assessment of complaints. The key aims of environmental monitoring are:

• To ensure that results/ conditions are as forecast during the planning stage, and where they are not, to pinpoint the cause and implement action to remedy the situation.

• To verify the evaluations made during the planning process, in particular with risk and impact assessments and standards and target setting and to measure operational and process efficiency.

• Monitoring will also be required to meet compliance with statutory and corporate requirements. Finally, monitoring results provide the basis for auditing, i.e. to identify unexpected changes.

6.3 MONITORING METHODOLOGIES AND PARAMETERS Table 6.1: Monitoring Methodologies and Parameters

Attributes Sampling Measurement Method

Test Procedure A. Air Environment Network Frequency Meteorology Wind speed Wind direction Dry bulb temperature Wet bulb temperature Relative humidity Rainfall

Minimum 1 site in the project impact area

Regularly in one season by Weather Monitoring Station

Mechanical/ automatic weather station

-

Pollutants PM10

8 locations in the project impact area (Minimum 2 locations in upwind side, more sites in downwind side / impact zone)

Revised National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS) vide MoEF&CC circular, dated 16.11.2009

Gravimetric method -

SO2

EPA Modified West and Geake method

Absorption in Potassium Tetra Chloromercurate followed by Colorimetric estimation using P-Rosaniline hydrochloride and Formaldehyde (IS: 5182 Part - II).

NO2 Arsenite modified Jacob

Absorption in dill NaOH and then



and Hochheiser estimated colorimetrically with sulphanilamide and N (I-Nepthyle) Ethylene diamine Dihydrochloride and Hydrogen Peroxide (CPCB Method).

B. Water Environment pH, Turbidity, Colour, Odour, Taste, TDS, Total Hardness, Calcium hardness, Magnesium hardness, Chloride, Fluoride, Sulphate, Nitrates, Alkalinity, Iron, Copper, Manganese, Mercury, Cadmium, Selenium, Arsenic, Cyanide, Lead, Zinc, Chromium, Aluminum, Boron, Phenolic compounds

Set of grab samples during pre and post-monsoon for 4 ground water samples and 2 surface water samples for 10 km distance area.

Diurnal and Season wise

As per IS 10500-

Samples for water quality should be collected and analyzed as per : IS : 2488 (Part 1-5) methods for sampling and testing of Industrial effluents Standard methods for examination of water and wastewater analysis published by American Public Health Association.

C. Noise Noise levels at Day and night time -Leq dB (A)

Mine Boundary, High noise generating areas within the lease

Quarterly As per CPCB norms

As per CPCB norms

D. Soil pH, Bulk Density, Soil texture, Nitrogen, Available Phosphorus, Potassium, Calcium, Magnesium, Sodium, Electrical Conductivity, Organic Matter, Chloride

4 locations in the project impact area

Yearly As per CSSRI, IISWC Method

As per CSSRI, IISWC Method

E. Socioeconomic Status

Network Frequency Measurement Method

Test Procedure

• Demographic structure • Infrastructure resource

base • Economic resource

base • Health status:

Morbidity pattern • Cultural and aesthetic

attributes • Education

Socio-economic survey is based on proportionate, stratified and random sampling method

Yearly Primary data collection through questionnaire

Secondary data from census records, statistical hard books, topo sheets, health records and relevant official records available with Govt. agencies

Ecological Impact



6.4 MONITORING SCHEDULE Regular Monitoring of all the environmental parameters viz., air, water, noise and soil as per the formulated program based on CPCB and MoEF&CC guidelines will be carried out every year in order to detect any changes from the baseline status.

Table 6.2: Monitoring Schedule S. No. Description Schedule Of Monitoring

1. Air Quality Quarterly 2. Water Quality (Surface and Ground Water) Half Yearly 3. Noise Level Quarterly 4. Soil Quality Yearly 5. Socio-economic Condition Once in 3 Years 6. Plantation Monitoring Once in a season

6.5 LOCATIONS OF MONITORING STATIONS The location of the monitoring stations was selected on the basis of prevailing micro meteorological conditions of the area like; wind direction and wind speed, relative humidity, temperature. Locations for the post project monitoring shall be as under-

Table 6.3: Locations of Monitoring Stations S. No. Description Location

1. Ambient Air Quality Lease area, Villages in downwind direction from the Lease Boundary

2. Noise Level Monitoring Lease Boundary, High noise generating areas within the lease boundary

3. Water Level and Quality Nearby Surface and Ground water sources 4. Soil Quality Lease area and Villages within study area.

Reporting Schedule during Operation of Mine After completion of analysis, copies of all the analysis reports will be sent to MoEF&CC Regional Office and SPCB. Copies of the reports will be maintained in the office and will be made available to the concerned inspecting authorities.

6.6 BUDGET ALLOCATION FOR MONITORING The cost of the project is Rs. 22 Crores and a budget for monitoring of Air, water, Noise and Soil will be Rs. 4.00 Lakhs as capital cost and Rs. 2.00 Lakh as recurring cost to be incurred by the project proponent for undertaking pollution prevention measures during the mining activity.

6.7 SUMMARY

In order to maintain the environmental quality within the stipulated standards, regular monitoring of various environmental components is necessary which will complied as per conditions. For this the lessee M/s Gradient Business Consulting Pvt. Ltd. has taken decision to formulate an Environment Policy of the mine and constitute an Environmental Management Cell and committed to operate the proposed mine with the objectives mentioned in approved Environment Policy. EMP may also require measurement of ambient environmental quality in the vicinity of a sit using ecological/biological, physical and chemical indicators. Monitoring may include socio-economic interaction, through local liaison activities or even assessment of complaints. Regular Monitoring of all the environmental parameters viz., air, water, noise and soil as per the formulated program based on CPCB and MoEF&CC guidelines will be carried out every year. The location

• Green Belt Development

• Conservation of Wild Life

Survey Yearly Primary data collection.

Secondary data from statistical hard books, toposheets and relevant official records available with Govt. agencies



of the monitoring stations was selected on the basis of prevailing micro meteorological conditions of the area like; wind direction and wind speed, relative humidity, temperature. A budget for monitoring of Air, water, Noise and Soil will be Rs. 4.00 Lakhs as capital cost and Rs. 2.00 Lakhs as recurring cost to be incurred by the project proponent for undertaking pollution prevention measures during the mining activity.



CHAPTER: 7

ADDITIONAL STUDIES

7.0 GENERAL Mining operations are associated with several potential hazards that affect adversely the human health and environment. It would normally require the assistance of emergency services to handle it effectively. The mining operation will be taken up under the supervision and control of qualified staff including Mine Manager (Grade I). Similarly Stone mines also have impending dangers and risk which need to be addressed for which a disaster management plan has been prepared with an aim of taking precautionary steps to avert disasters and also to take such action after the disaster which limits the damage to the minimum. Nevertheless, the following natural/industrial problems may be encountered during the mining operation.

1. Inundation due to excessive rains. 2. Accidents by heavy machinery. 3. Slope failures at the mine faces etc.

7.1 PUBLIC CONSULTATION

Public hearing is very significant part of the process of public participation envisaged under the guidelines issued by MoEF & CC, Government of India. It facilitates involvement of all the stake holders of the project which is essential for ensuring smooth running of project and benefitting all sections of society in the process of economic development of the region. The public hearing of stone minor minerals mines namely “Bakhrija Plot-4” for extraction of stone over an area of 34.64 ha. falling in Village-Bakhrija, Tehsil-Narnaul, District-Mahendergarh, Haryana was conducted on 03.06.2016 at 11.00 am at Mine Site in village-Bakhrija. 7.1.1 Public Hearing Advertisement

Figure 7.1 Notice from Haryana State Pollution Control Board regarding Public Hearing



7.1.2 Photographs of Public Hearing

Figure 7.2 Members of SPCB, Haryana for Public Hearing



Figure 7.3 Environment Consultants at Public Hearing

Figure 7.4 Local Public present for Public Hearing

7.1.3 Minutes of Public Hearing Proceeding of public consultation (minutes of meetings) of stone minor minerals mines namely “Bakhrija Plot-4”over an area of 34.64 ha. falling in Village-Bakhrija, Tehsil-Narnaul, District-Mahendergarh, Haryana Approved proceeding of public consultation is attached as Annexure XIII.



Table No. 7.1 Action Plan of the issues raised during Public Hearing and reply given by Project Proponent

S. No.

Name and address of Stakeholder

Question Reply Action Plan Budget

1. Sh. Pradeep Kumar S/o Sh. Sedharam, Vill- Bakhrija

1) He asked whether the lease holder will provide the employment opportunities to local villagers and what will they do for education?

1)Sh. RS Yadav, Environment Consultant, on behalf of the Project Proponent replied that this mining project will provide direct and indirect employment opportunities to the local villagers. He stated121 peoples will be directly appointed for this project i.e. Mining Engineer, foremen, blaster, semi-skilled or skilled workers. 50 dumpers will be used in this project and each dumper will have five persons i.e. cleaner, helper, driver etc. in this way about 250 persons will be employed. A green belt will also be developed in this project and 600-650 plants will be planted under that green belt. Numbers of Bill Clerks, Account Persons, Security Guards and Gardeners will be required for this project. Accordingly 1000-1500 persons will get employment from this project. In addition to above many workshops, repair shops, spare parts shop, hotels, Canteen, tea stalls, daily need shops will be setup by local villagers first.

It is ensured by the lease holder that in employment opportunity first preference will be given to local villagers and about 1000-1500 persons will be employed in this project. Scholarship will be given to intelligent children’s of the village, free of cost stationery and books will be provided.

A budget of Rs. 33 Lakhs per year for CSR activity. A budget of Rs. 3.25 Crores per annum in the “Mines and Mineral Development, Restoration and Rehabilitation Fund” is available. A part amount may be utilized as per requirement.



2) He further asked what will they do to prevent the damage of crops of nearby agriculture land and how they will control the air pollution?

The lease holder assured that the first preference of employment will be given to the local villagers only. A big budget is also be kept for CSR activity i.e. Rs. 33 Lakhs per year out of which scholarship will be given to meritorious students of the village. Free of cost stationery and books will be provided. Technical and vocational training will be given to the local youths after that they will be employed in this mining project. 2)Sh. RS Yadav, Environment Consultant, on behalf of the Project Proponent replied that Haryana is the first state where Government has amended Minor Mineral concession rule in June 2012 accordingly the lease holder will deposit 10% of the annual contract money i.e. Rs. 3,25,00,000 per annum in the “Mines and Mineral Development, Restoration and Rehabilitation Fund”. This fund will be utilized under the chairmanship of DC, Mohindergarh, as per recommendation of committee in consultation with RO,HSPCB, Mining Officer and other consult officers for

It is informed by lease holder that 21KLD water will be used for dust suppression. Regular water sprinkling will be carried out on the haul road from where mineral loaded truck will be transported. Wet drilling will be carried out to control the dust emission. The mineral loaded dumper will be covered with tarpaulin A thick green belt will also will developed around periphery of lease area along the haul roads from mineral will be transported. regular Environmental monitoring will be conducted and its compliance report may be field six monthly to the concern

A budget of Rs. 35.00 Lakhs per annum for EMP in which Rs. 8.00 Lakhs per annum for dust suppression and 5.00 Lakhs per annum for plantation. A budget of Rs. 3.25 Crores per annum in the “Mines and Mineral Development, Restoration and Rehabilitation Fund” is available. A part amount may be utilized as per requirement.



the protection of environment of the nearby area and also to compensate the affected persons from this mining project. Hence adequate budget is provided in this regard and affected agriculture land owner will be compensated. He further agreed that some air pollution may be generated from this mining project but full care will be taken to control the air pollution for which 40 KL water every day is provided out of which 21 KLD water will be used for dust suppression. Regular sprinkling of water will be carried out on the haul roads from where mineral loaded vehicles will pass. And wet drilling will be carried out to suppress the dust particles. In this way full attention will be paid to control the air pollution.

government departments.

2. Sh. Girdharilal S/o Sh. Phool Singh, Vill-Bakhrija

He stated that if the lease holder adopted this village for the welfare activities then we are also ready to cooperate with this company so that they can do the mining operation smoothly. Deputy Commissioner,

The Environment Consultant, Sh. RS Yadav and Dr. Shrivastava on behalf of Project Proponent assured that this company & their other sister concern company will do their best for the betterment and welfare of this village. It has already been announced

The lease holder assured that this company and their other sister company will do their best for the betterment and welfare of this village. Scholarship to the student of villagers will be given free of cost books and stationary will be provided. A dispensary with

A budget of Rs. 33 Lakhs per year for CSR activity is provided. A budget of Rs. 3.25 Crores per annum in the “Mines and Mineral Development, Restoration and Rehabilitation Fund” is available. A part



Mohindergarh :- He intervened and asked the lease holder to announce that they have adopted this village for the welfare.

that the students of the village will be provided scholarships, free of cost books and stationery, and various technical and vocational training will be provided to the villagers. Sh. R.S Yadav further stated that a dispensary will be established in this village and qualified doctors and compounders will be posted. In this dispensary all the first-aid facility and medicines will be provided so that the villagers and the worker of the mine will be benefitted.

first adds facilities and medicines with a qualified doctor will be established in this village and the villagers will be benefitted.

amount may be utilized as per requirement.

3. Sh. Rakesh S/o Ratti Ram, Vill- Bakhrija

1) He stated first that all the villagers have agreed to start the work of this mining project in the area and have no objection from this project and second thing is a major concern of this project so that maximum amount of trees will be planted to control the pollution and the combination of air,water and pollution will be fixed if the system of water will be fixed and there is no legal source to fulfil the requirement of water and also there is no water till 1000-1500 feet

1)The Environment Consultant on behalf of Project Proponent replied that it has already been submitted Rs. 3.25 crore per annum will be deposited by this company in the mining department in “Mines and Mineral Development, Restoration and Rehabilitation Fund”. Part amount of this fund will be utilized for the revival of pond in the village as suggested by Sh. Rakesh Kumar. During Rainy season, rain water will be conserved in this pond so that the villagers may be benefitted. It was also announced by the lease holder that they will plant additional

The amount available in “Mines and Minerals Restoration and Rehabilitation Fund” which will be spent for protection of environment of surrounding area. Affected persons from this mining project will be compensated from this fund i.e damage of agriculture crops, land, health, maintenance and repair road etc. And part amount will also be spent for construction of a pond in the village and water will be accumulated in the rainy season in this pond. Every year around 1250 tree will be planted to control the

A budget of Rs. 3.25 Crores per annum in the “Mines and Mineral Development, Restoration and Rehabilitation Fund” is available. A part amount may be utilized as per requirement. A budget of Rs. 35.00 Lakhs per annum for EMP.



so we want to give a suggestion to the company if they want to apply, there is 5-6 acre land is available in our village and 1-2 acre land could be used to develop a pond because at the time of monsoon unlimited water is come from there and that water could be used by company and the company will give fund to the Gram Panchayat and the trees will be planted and protected from that fund and 2-4 persons could get employment. So we want suggestions from the company that our suggestions are right or wrong? 2) He further stated that the Ateli area is 20-25 Km away from this project site and it will not be feasible to take the water from that area. He suggested a plan that there is a old Nallah/drained paasing outside the village and it has adequate water. If a

600 trees per year in addition to 642 plants. These additional plants will be planted in the government schools, hospitals, Panchayat bhawans with consent and consultation of local villagers of Forest Department. In addition to above the lease holder company will provide the water in this project and to the local villagers from the tube wells of Ateli Block which is not restricted as Dark Zone and it is located 20-21 km away from this project site. 2)The Environment Consultant on behalf of Project Proponent welcomed this proposal and they assured that they are ready to provide the financial assistance for this plan from the “Mines and Mineral Development, Restoration and Rehabilitation Fund” i.e. Rs. 3.25 Crore per annum. They further requested the DC,

air and noise pollution. The lease holder assured that they are ready to provide the financial assistance for construction of pond from the “Mines and Mineral Development, Restoration and Rehabilitation Fund”

A budget of Rs. 3.25 Crores per annum in the “Mines and Mineral Development, Restoration and Rehabilitation Fund” is available. A part amount may be utilized as per requirement. A budget of Rs. 33 Lakhs per year for CSR activity.



small dam is prepared and in the nearby village Gram Panchayat’s land of 10 acres, a new pond may be constructed in 2-3 acres land and water may be filled in this pond from nearby drain and during rainy season the rain water may also be conserved which can be utilised by the villagers and the lease holder also. He also requested that the lease holder will provide the fund for this plan and worthy Deputy commissioner, Mohindergarh may approve this plan. 3) He stated that as the company has now adopted this village and owned the responsibility for development of the village and he further stated that other than village Bakhrija there are 4-5 more villages in nearby areas i. e. Meghot Halla, Begopur, Dholera & Slampur etc.. There is a 22 feet wide road in the revenue record of the village, if this 22 feet

Mohindergarh to send a team of officers of irrigation department, public health and other concerned officers and provide a plan and approval of government so that they can provide the financial assistance for the same. 3)Sh. R.S Yadav Environment Consultant on behalf of the project proponent replied that there are 4 mining blocks in village Bakhrija and funding on this construction of road will be shared by all the 4 companies collectively instead of one company only. The consultant also submitted that all the four companies will deposit about 10 crore rupees per year in the “Mines and Mineral Development, Restoration and Rehabilitation

Four mining company will collectively spent amount for the construction of road from the budget of “Mines and Mineral Development, Restoration and Rehabilitation Fund”.

A budget of Rs. 3.25 Crores per annum in the “Mines and Mineral Development, Restoration and Rehabilitation Fund” is available. A part amount may be utilized as per requirement. A budget of Rs. 33 Lakhs per year for CSR activity. A budget of Rs. 35.00 Lakhs per annum for EMP.



road may be constructed by this company then this road will join all the nearby 4-5 villages and all the villagers of these villages will be benefitted. He also submitted that around the stone blocks of village Bakhrija heaps of overburden may get accumulated due to mining operation and this overburden may also be utilised for the construction of this road. 4) He further submitted that 3-4 villagers have been occupied around the stone block of Bakhrija hence before the start of mining operation proper demarcation may be carried out so that the villagers may not be harassed unnecessarily and due compensation will be paid to affected persons. Now whole the villagers are ready to support this mining project.

Fund”. A part of this amount may be utilized for the construction of this road. It was also requested to Deputy Commissioner to accord necessary permission to construct this road to all these companies. 4)Sh. R.S Yadav Environment Consultant on behalf of the project proponent replied that this is a issue of demarcation and he requested the Deputy Commissioner of Mohindergarh to direct the concerned revenue officers and mining officers to get the area demarcated properly so that this issue may be resolved and no villager will be harassed unnecessarily and due compensation will be paid to the affected person from this mining project.

This is the issue of demarcation. And the Deputy Commissioner of Mohindergarh may be requested to direct the concerned Revenue officers and Mining Officer to get the area demarcated properly so that this issue may be resolved. No villager will be harassed unnecessarily and due compensation will be paid to the affected person from this mining project.

4. Sh. Jainarayan S/o Bhagwan Singh,

He submitted that the maximum land of their village is also located

The Environment Consultant replied that study area of this project is 10 km so other

The detail of action plan in this regard has already been given in response to previous

A budget of Rs. 33 Lakhs per year for CSR activity. A budget of Rs. 3.25 Crores



Vill- Nangaldargoo

adjacent to this mining site. But the company has adopted village Bakhrija. What will be the benefit to the residents of village-Nangal Dargoo

nearby villages affected from this project will also be benefitted/compensated as announced for village Bakhrija itself. DC, Mohindergarh: He assured that your village has also been taken.

questions. However CSR activities will also be conducted in nearby village Nangaldargoo

per annum in the “Mines and Mineral Development, Restoration and Rehabilitation Fund” is available. A part amount may be utilized as per requirement.

5. Sh. Gyani Ram S/o Sh. Umrao Singh, Vill- Nangaldharpur

He stated that this public hearing is being conducted on environmental issue. Few villagers have demanded fund of the welfare of village Nangal Dargoo and few others for village Bakhrija as these villages are located in vicinity of stone block of plot no. 1 to 4. He further stated that the concerned Gram Panchayat is Nangal Dargoo, whereas,village Bakhrija is a separate revenue estate. The fund will be credited to the Gram Panchayat and the same may be utilized for the Social welfare works in the villages by the committee to be constituted under the chairmanship of the Deputy Commissioner. He further suggested that the committee of 10-15 persons may be

The consultant and the lease holder replied that the point has been noted.

Before start of mining operation a committee will be constituted with mutual discussion of lease holder, members of Gram Panchayat and concerned officers of district administration of Mohindergarh. They will mutually decide the utilization of fund of CSR, EMP and MMDR&R for the welfare of the villagers and protection of environment in these villages.

A budget of Rs. 3.25 Crores per annum in the “Mines and Mineral Development, Restoration and Rehabilitation Fund” is available. A part amount may be utilized as per requirement. A budget of Rs. 33 Lakhs per year for CSR activity. A budget of Rs. 35.00 Lakhs per annum for EMP.



constituted for the utilisation of fund for welfare activities.

6. Sh. Omprakash S/o Sh. Rameshwar, Vill- Bakhrija

He informed that there are few houses situated near by plot no. -3 & 4 stone block of Bakhrija and he said that it should be ensured that due to this mining activity the villagers and the houses may not be affected. Time to time monitoring may also be conducted by the officers of District Administration on this mining project.

Sh. R.S Yadav Environment Consultant on behalf of the project proponent replied that there is a district level monitoring committee under the chairmanship of D.C, Mohindergarh himself. He assured that the company will operate the mine in properly in scientific way so that no person may get affected and all mitigation measures shall be taken to minimize the impact on the environment. The lease holder company will submit the half yearly compliance report to SEIAA, Chairman HSPCB and RO,HSPCB and regional director MOEF for their mining project. The concerned officers can come at anytime to monitor the compliance report of EC. If any kind of deficiency/violation will be found then necessary action will be taken against the lease holder. The committee will have full hold on this, it doesn’t mean that public hearing been done today so no action will be taken in future. Deputy Commissioner

The lease holder assured that the mining operation will be carried out in proper scientific and systematic manner. All mitigation measure will be adopted to control the air and noise pollution. Regular monitoring of ambient air, noise, soil and water will be carried out for the same and half yearly compliance report will be submitted to the concern regulatory authorities.

A budget of Rs. 35.00 Lakhs per annum for EMP in which Rs. 6.00 Lakhs per annum for Pollution monitoring. A budget of Rs. 3.25 Crores per annum in the “Mines and Mineral Development, Restoration and Rehabilitation Fund” is available. A part amount may be utilized as per requirement.



Mohindergarh : The Deputy Commissioner said that i want to tell everyone that this is a big company, if they break the law and violate the terms and conditions then legal action may be taken against them immediately.



7.2 MINE CLOSURE PLAN 7.2.1 General Mine closure plan is one of the most important requirements in the environment management of mining projects. The closure operation is a continuous series of activities right from the commencement to decommissioning of the project. Therefore, progressive mine closure plan is specifically included in the mining plan, which is to be reviewed every five years in the scheme of mining. The primary aim is to ensure that the following broad objectives along with the abandonment of the mine can be successfully achieved:

• Creation of a productive and sustainable after-use for the site, acceptable to mine owners, regulatory agencies, and most importantly to the community.

• Protection of public health and safety of the surrounding habitation. • Minimization of environmental damage. • Conservation of valuable attributes and aesthetics. • Counter balancing the adverse socio-economic impacts.

7.2.2 Reason for Closure

The progressive mine closure plan has been prepared in compliance of Rule 70 (1) of Haryana Minor Mineral Concession Rules 2012 under MMCR 1986. This is reproduced as under Rule 70. (1) Every mineral concession holder shall prepare a Mining Plan along with the Mine Closure Plan (Progressive & Final) and shall not commence mining operations in any area except in accordance with such Mining Plan duly approved by an officer authorized by the Director in this behalf.

As the mineral is not going to be depleted during the plan period no immediate closure is planned as sufficient reserves are available to carry on the activities. Also there is good market potential in domestic market.

7.2.3 Phase-Wise Plan of Restoration of Land Degraded by Mining

Our production detail for first five year is given below: Year Production (MT) ROM

I 75,00,000 II 75,12,705 III 75,19,600 IV 75,22,502 V 75,24,225

Geological Reserve = 7,55,30,043 Tons Mineable Reserve = 6,93,30,254 Tons These data are approved by DMG Haryana vide letter no. DMG/HY/MP/Bakhrija 4/2015/431-434 dated 07.01.2016 (enclosed as Annexure II). In five year, the production will be 3,75,79,032 MT out of available mineable reserve 6,93,30,254 MT. The remaining mineable reserve i.e. 3,17,51,222 MT will be excavated in next five year for which fresh mining scheme will be submitted to DMG Haryana well in time as per Haryana Mines & Mineral Concession Rule, 2012 Hence, it is clarified that we will not going to attain the ultimate mining limit at the end of first year itself. However, due to proximity of lease boundary wherever further advancement is not feasible; the Restoration/Reclamation/Rehabilitation measures will be started from second year onwards. Following initiatives are proposed for Restoration/ Reclamation/Rehabilitation, the land degraded by mining operation, in case the portion of lease area going to attain ultimate limit before lease life: a) Plantation along the Lease Boundary. b) Plantation in the Mine Premises. c) Plantation along the Haul Road starting from core area to mettled road.



d) Plantation at suitable location from Second Year to Fifth Year along the worked out mine benches, such that, it does not affect working of mine.

e) We would like to mention that the plantation details have been shown in Plate No. 7, Conceptual Plan of the Mining Plan along with the Afforestion/Green Belt programme.

It is pertinent to mention here that we have proposed Restoration/Reclamation/ Rehabilitation measure in conceptual plan (Plate No. 7) of the approved mine plan. In view of clause xv of LoI, the lease holder are bound to deposit 10% of annual contract money in advance to the mining department towards Mines and Mineral Development, Restoration & Rehabilitation Fund’ (MMDR &RF). In this regard, Mining Dept of Haryana Govt. issued the notification Establishment of the “Mines and Mineral Development, Restoration and Rehabilitation Fund” No. DMG/HY/MMDR&RF/2015/6016 dated 10th July 2015. The following objectives are intended to be achieved through the said Fund:

(i) Funding of the restoration or reclamation or rehabilitation works in the sites affected by mining operations;

(ii) Provision of common facilities for the benefit of community in and around areas where mining activities are undertaken;

(iii) Development of infrastructure facilities for orderly growth of the mining operations and allied activities e.g. roads, stone crusher estates, water supply etc.

(iv) Funding of the studies commissioned or activities related to the mining sector e.g. survey, exploration and prospecting of minerals, procurement of equipment and machinery required to support such activities;

(v) Education, awareness and training of the mineral concession holders and the staff of the Department through field visits and exposure to the best mining practices;

(vi) Funding of expenditure incurred on implementation of any scheme of incentives that the state government may frame for recognition and awards for scientific mining undertaken with highest regard to mineral conservation, rehabilitation measures along with environmental safeguards and other measures;

(vii) Any other objects, which the Government may consider expedient to support in the overall interest of the mining sector.

The budget for first FIVE YEARS towards Mines and Mineral Development, Restoration and Rehabilitation Fund is given below:

S.No. Year of Lease Period Budget (Rs.) 1. First Year 3,25,05,000 2. Second Year 3,25,05,000 3. Third Year 3,25,05,000 4. Fourth Year 4,06,31,250 5. Fifth Year 4,06,31,250

The lease holder is bound to expend this fund every year for Restoration and Rehabilitation at the project site and surrounding area. The Senior Officer of Concerned Department of Haryana Govt. will monitor the progress in this regard carried out by lease holder in view of said notification. If their work will found satisfactory, then this amount will be reimbursed to lease holder.

7.2.4 Statutory Obligations

i. As per LoI condition xiv, the lease holder is bound to deposit additional amount equal to 10% of the due contract money in along with monthly installments towards the “Mines and Minerals, Development, Restoration and rehabilitation Fund”. To the mining department, Haryana (Haryana Minor Mineral Concession, Stocking, transportation of Mineral & Prevention of Illegal Mining Rule-2012). Hence, accordingly after the mine closure the mining department will spend the fund for the same.



ii. The mining contractor is bound to submit the Progressive mine closure plan either with Mining plan or Scheme of Mining.

iii. Mining contractor is bound to follow the terms and conditions as will be stipulated in the mining contract.

iv. In addition to it the rules pertaining to the Protection of Environment i.e. Environment Act. Environment Rules and other associated rules for the protection of environment will have to be followed.

v. During the course of mining the rules stipulated in Mines Act, Mines rules Metalliferous Mines Regulation 1961 and HMMCR, 2012 will be followed.

vi. All other rules pertaining to the mining existing at that time will be followed during the course of mining activities.

7.2.5 Disposal of Mining Machinery Machinery is proposed on hire basis. Hence no de-commissioning of mining machinery is proposed.

7.2.6 Safety and security

Safety measures will be implemented to prevent access to excavation area by un-authorized persons as per Mine Act 1952, MMR 1961.

i. Safety measures will be implemented as per Mine Act1952, MMR 1961, and Mines Rules 1955. ii. Provisions of MMR 1961 shall be followed strictly and all roads shall be 12 m wide and have a

gradient of not more than 1 in 16. iii. The bench height will be 9.0m. iv. Width of working bench will be kept around 20.0 m for ease of operations and provide sufficient

room for the movement of equipments. v. Protective equipment like dust masks, earplugs/ muffs and other equipments shall be provided for

use by the work persons. vi. Notices giving warning to prevent inadvertent entry of persons shall be displayed at all

conspicuous places and in particular near mine entries. vii. Danger signs shall be displayed near the excavations. viii. Security guards will be posted. ix. In the event of temporary closer, approaches will be fenced off and notice displayed.

7.2.7 Time Scheduling for Abandonment

In any case, if the mine is closed due to unforeseen reasons then tentatively abandonment will be 12 months for closure.

7.2.8 Financial Assurance

As per LoI term and condition and Minor Mineral Concession Rule 2012, Haryana; the lease holder will deposit 10% of the annual contract money i.e. Rs.3.25 Crores per year will be deposited in “Mines and Mineral development, Restoration and Rehabilitation Fund” to the Mining Department i.e. about Three Crores Twenty Five Lakhs. This fund will be deposited yearly till mine period.

7.3 HAZARD IDENTIFICATION AND RISK ASSESSMENT METHODOLOGY

All types of industries face certain types of hazards which can disrupt normal activities abruptly. Similar stone mining also have risks which need to be addressed for which a disaster management plan has been formulated with an aim of taking precautionary steps to avert disasters and also take such action after disaster which limits the damage to minimum. In the sections below, the identification of various hazards, probable risks during the operational phase of the mining, maximum credible accident analysis and consequences analysis are addressed either qualitatively or quantitatively.



Risk assessments will help mine operators to identify high, medium and low risk levels. This is a requirement of the Occupational Health and Safety Act 2000. Risk assessments will help to priorities the risks and provide information on the need to safely control the risks. In this way, mine owners and operators will be able to implement safety improvements. The following natural/industrial problem may be encountered during the mining operation.

• Inundation: Filling of the mine pit due to excessive rains, • Blasting- fly rocks and Boulders, • Drilling- Noise and Vibration, • Handling of overburden and heavy machinery, • Storage of diesel, • Slope failures at the mine faces or stacks.

As per proposal made under the mining plan the area will be developed by means of opencast mining method. Extraction of minerals is to be carried out by mechanized mining means. Water table will not be touched during the mining process. No high risk accidents like landslides, subsidence flood etc have been apprehended. 7.3.1 Blasting

This is the reason of common accident into mines. Most of the accidents from blasting occur due to the projectiles and mainly due to overcharging of the shot holes as a result of certain special features of the local ground. Flying rocks are encountered during initial and final blasting operations. Noise and dust also generated during blasting. 7.3.2 Vibration

Whenever a blast is conducted the vibration is felt in the form of ground vibration. The ground motion is essentially a wave motion. The particles of the ground through which the blasting/sound wave travels, set themselves to oscillating motions with respect to their rest positions. These waves can affect buildings and structures by forming visible cracks on the surface, because of compression and tension waves and through vertical and horizontal shearing effects. 7.3.3 Risks due to Inundation Mining will be done during the non-monsoon periods (October-June); therefore problem of inundation is not likely to happen. 7.3.4 Risks due to Failure of Pit Slope In order to allay dangers due to open cast slope failure, final pit, slope stability estimations will be made for the existing mines. Determining the factor of safety, the slopes should be monitored at regular intervals to check for any possible failure. 7.3.5 Risk due to Handling of Overburden and Heavy Machinery

During the mining, most of the activities are done by the vehicles and the heavy machinery for mining and handing of the mineral. There is no overburden or waste will be generated during the first five year of mining operation. Heavy machinery also cause for accidents due to mechanical failure. 7.3.6 Risks of Accidents due to Trucks and Dumpers Identifying the hazards that come along with the presence of vehicles at the workplace (e.g. reversing operations, loading) can cause harm if not properly handled. Among some of the factors that may make vehicle accidents more likely are:

• Rough access roads, • Time pressure, • Inadequate brakes (Possibly from lack of maintenance), • Carelessly parked vehicles (e.g. being parked on a slope without being adequately secured), • Unsafe coupling and uncoupling of trailers, • Untrained drivers, • Overturning vehicles.



To avoid such instances we will talk to the workers and their representatives and will involve them in the risk assessment process and tell them what to do, to reduce risk. All transportation within the mine lease area should be carried out directly under the supervision and control of management.

• The vehicles will be maintained in good working condition and checked thoroughly at least once a month by the competent person authorized for the purpose by the management.

• Road signs will be provided at each and every turning point up to the main road (wherever required)

• To avoid danger while reversing the vehicles especially at working place/loading points, stopper should be posted to properly guide reversing/spotting operating.

• Only trained drivers will be hired. 7.3.7 Storage and use of Explosive Materials

• Proper and safe storage of explosives in approved and Licensed Magazine. • Proper, safe and careful handling and use of explosives by competent Blasters having Blaster’s

Certificate of Competency issued by DGMS. • Proper security system to prevent theft/ pilferage, unauthorized entry into Magazine area and

checking authorized persons to prevent carrying of match box, lights, mobile phones, cigarette or Biri etc.

• Conventional explosives shall be used in their original cartridge packing and such cartridge shall not be cut to remove explosive for making cartridge of different size.

• Explosives shall be conveyed in special containers. • The holes which have been charged with explosives will not be left unattended till blasting is

completed. • Before starting charging, clear audible warning signals by Sirens will be given so that people

nearby can take shelter. The results of risk assessment are given in table below:

Table 7.2: Hazards faced in stone mining operations

S. No. Activity Hazard Description (Risk)

Score

Risk Level Consequences

Exposure

Probability

Risk Score

1. Site planning and layout

Travel in moving vehicle in uneven terrain

1 2 1 2 Level 3

2. Storage of explosives

Unintended explosions (exposure to overpressure)

1 5 3 15 Level 1

3. Charging of explosives

Unintended explosion or exposure (exposure to overpressure)

1 3 1 3 Level 3

4. Blasting Hit by fly rock (bodily injuries)

1 2 1 2 Level 3

5. Bench Formation

Rock falls or slide due to lack of bench face stability (bodily injuries)

5 1.5 2 15 Level 1

6. Crushing and sizing of ROM

Hit by Machineries – Electrical Equipment (bodily injuries)

1 3 3 9 Level 2

7. Transportation of minerals

Vehicle Accident (bodily injuries)

5 5 2 50 Level 1


Accidental 1fire in vehicle (bodily injuries,

1 5 1 5 Level 3



exposure to heat radiation)

By arranging the above hazards from highest to lowest, the hazards were re-arranged as per their risk levels. This is done in Table.

Table 7.3: Hazards ranked by Risk level

S.No. Activity Hazard Description (Risk) Risk Score

Risk Level

1. Site planning and layout

Travel in moving vehicle in uneven terrain 2 Level 3

2. Storage of explosives Unintended explosions (exposure to overpressure)

15 Level 1

3. Charging of explosives Unintended explosion or Exposure (exposure to overpressure)

3 Level 3

4. Blasting Hit by fly rock (bodily injuries) 2 Level 3 5. Bench Formation Rock falls or slide due to lack of bench face

stability (bodily injuries) 15 Level 1

6. Crushing and sizing of ROM

Hit by Machineries – Electrical Equipment (bodily injuries)

9 Level 2


Vehicle Accident (bodily injuries) 50 Level 1


Accidental 1fire in vehicle (bodily injuries, exposure to heat radiation)

5 Level 3

7.3.8 Hazard Analysis Broadly, the hazards cover explosive material management, working at heights, slope and bench stability, mineral transport, mineral processing and force majeure conditions (rainfall and flooding).The mechanisms due to which hazards (coming under Risk Levels 1 and 2) may actually occur are covered in table 7.3.

Table 7.4: Cause analysis for level 1 & level 2 hazards S. No. Hazard Description (Risk) Risk Score Risk Level Cause Analysis

1 Travel in moving vehicle in uneven terrain

2 Level 3 • Poor visibility • Incompetent driver • Poorly maintained vehicles

2 Unintended explosions (exposure to overpressure)

15 Level 1

• Defective explosives • Outdated explosives • Improper storage of explosives • Force majeure conditions such as lightning strike • Fire (can be caused by unsafe practices or as ignition) • Sabotage

3 Unintended explosion or exposure (exposure to overpressure)

3 Level 3

• Defective explosives • Outdated explosives • Improper storage of explosives • Force majeure conditions such as lightning strike • Fire (can be caused by unsafe practices or as arson) • Sabotage



4 Hit by fly rock (bodily injuries) 2 Level 3 • Poor access control of blast area • Poor blasting practices (leading to excessive fly rock)

5 Rock falls or slide due to lack of bench face stability (bodily injuries)

15 Level 1

• Improper design of bench • Force Majeure (such as heavy floods or rainfall) • Improper blasting practices • Incompetent blasting personnel

6 Hit by Machineries – Electrical Equipment (bodily injuries)

9 Level 2

• Improper design of equipment • Improper maintenance • Non usage of required PPE. • Incompetent Personnel

7 Vehicle Accident (bodily injuries)

50 Level 1

• Head on collision between vehicle andanother vehicle (due to poor visibilityor incompetent drivers) • Poor vehicle maintenance

8 Accidental 1fire in vehicle (bodily injuries, exposure to heat radiation)

5 Level 3

• Accident to vehicle carrying fuel, and subsequent ignition of spilt fuel • Improper storage of fuel, in MS drums, leading to spillage followed byignition • Driving with loaded material on uneven terrain, and subsequent ignition of spilt fuel

7.3.9 Controls and Action Plans To ensure that causes leading to the possible consequences are prevented from occurring, control and action plans are developed and suggested as described in table 7.4. It is required that these control and action plans be implemented and reviewed at least annually and also when there are changes to the work plan.

Table 7.5: Control and Action Plan

S. No Hazard Causes Control

Relevant Legislation Procedure

Existing Proced

ure (Y/N)

Responsibl e Person (Designati on)

1 Unintended explosions (exposure to

Defective explosives

Explosive used should be purchased only from approved and licensed authority

Metalliferous Mines Regulation – 1961. &

If any defective explosive is found, it is returned back to the original

Y Authorized supplier of explosives

overpressu re) during storage of explosives in magazines

If deteriorated or

Explosive act, supplier for

unserviceable 1884 disposal at their explosive is

found, end as per Rule

16

seek advice of of The Explosive

licensing authority

Rules 1983



Outdated explosives

Records and accounts of explosive stock and issue is to be maintained Stock should be drawn upon strict rotation Well planning for requirement of explosives shall be exercised Disposal of outdated explosives as the chief controller or controller of explosive may issue

Explosive act, 1884,MMR –

1961.

Maintaining registers for Explosives receipt, issue and stock as per Reg. 154, 156 of MMR 1961.

Y

Mines Manager

Improper storage of explosives

Detonator are to be stored separately Explosives shall be stored in dry and well ventilated area Protect explosives from extreme temperatures

Explosive act, 1884,

Explosives and Detonators are stored separately as per approved design & licensed capacity of magazine under Explosive act, 1884

Y

Mines Manager

Force majeure conditions such as lightning strike

Lightning conductor are to be installed on the top of magazine Lightning conductor should not have resistance more than 10 ohms

The Explosive Rules 1983

Lightning arrestors are provided and maintained as per the requirement under Rule 116 the Explosive Rules 1983

Y

Mines Manager

Fire (can be

Empty packages shall be

Follow the instructions



caused by unsafe practices or as arson)

removed immediately and destroyed. No smoking or any source of light or fire shall be allowed near explosives storage

The Explosive Rules1983

MMR -1961

Specified in Rule 154, 156and 170 of MMR – 1961 for storage, and handling of Explosives. Rule 97and 101 of the ER 1983

Y

Mines Manager, Mines Foreman (Blasting)

Sabotage

Security shall be provided at the magazine Shortage and theft of explosive shall be reported to the nearest police station and the licensing authority

The Explosive Rules,1983,

Round the clock security guards provided and immediate reporting to nearest Police Station and Licensing Authority done in case of thefts or sabotage as per Rule – 123 of ER 1983

Y Mines Manager

2 Rock falls or slide due to lack of bench face stability (bodily Injuries)

Improper design of bench

Proper catch bench design and proper blasting pattern reduces over break Maintain the width to height ratio as per DGMS

MMR-1961

Procedure for opencast working as per Reg. 106

Y Mines Manager

Force Majeure (such as heavy floods or rainfall)

Dewatering or culverting the storm water may reduces slides of bench

MMR-1961.

Following procedures as per Reg. 127 and 130 of MMR –1961 for Dewatering or and culverting the water

Y Mines Manager

Improper blasting practices

Good design of blasting network is important to reduce rock fall and slides of bench face

MMR-1961.

Procedure for opencast working as per Reg. 106

Y Mines Manager



Incompete nt blasting personnel

Shot firer should have shot firer’s permit granted under explosive rules

MMR -1961

Appointment of Shot firer as provided in Reg. 160 of MMR 1961

Y Mines Manager

3 Vehicle accident (bodily injuries)

Head on collision between vehicle and another vehicle (due to poor visibility or incompete nt drivers)

Haul road should be sprinkled Regularly Driving at night shall be avoided Driver should be RTO licensed holder for driving vehicle

MMR – 1961 Motor Vehicle Act

Sprinkling of water in haul road as per Reg. 124 MMR 1961 and appointment of RTO licensed drivers

Y Mines Manager

Poor vehicle maintenan ce

Periodic servicing of vehicle Brakes and steering apparatus should be in good condition Headlight and tail light of the vehicle should be in good condition

MMR 1961

Procedure for Maintenance of Vehicles under Reg. 176 of MMR -1961

Y Mines Manager

4 Unintended explosion or exposure to overpressu re, charging blast holes

Poor access control of blast area

Well planning is required before and after charging of blast holes. Blast sites should be secured and warning signs posted before loading boreholes.

MMR 1961

Procedure for drilling charging stemming and firing of holes as per Reg.162

Y Mines Manager

Incompete nt blasting personnel

Shot firer should have shot firer’s permit granted under explosive rules

MMR 1961

Appointment of Shot firer as per Reg. 160 as per MMR 1961

Y Mines Manager



Poor blasting practices

Tamping rod of wood must be used, iron or steel rods should not be used. No smoking or any source of light or fire shall be allowed near explosives storage. Before loading the blast hole blaster should check the driller log Blast sites should be secured and warning signs posted before loading boreholes.

MMR – 1961 -The Explosive Rules, 1983,

Procedure for drilling charging stemming and Firing of holes as per Reg. 161, Rule 14 of ER ISO procedure QSP-760-06

Y Certified Blaster

Defective explosives

Explosive used should be purchased only from approved and licensed authority only If deteriorated or nserviceable explosive is found, seek advice of licensing authority

The Explosive Rules, 1983

Explosive are purchased from Approved manufactured or authorized license holder from CCE.

Y Mines Manager

Outdated explosives

Stock should be drawn upon strict rotation

The Explosive Rules, 1983

Issue of explosives on first come first ISO procedure QSP-760-06

Y Mines Manager



5 Hit by fly rock (bodily injuries) During blasting

Poor access control of blast area

Adequate blast area security must be provided. Blast sites should be secured and warning signs posted before loading boreholes. Post guards at the access points to prevent unauthorized entry

MMR – 1961

Procedure for tacking shelter etc. during drilling and blasting Reg. 164 of MMR 1961

Y Mines Foreman (Blasting)

Poor blasting practices (leading to excessive fly rock)

Burden, spacing, hole diameter, stemming, sub drilling, initiation system, and type of explosive used matched the characteristics of the rock formation. Adequate blasting Shelter must be used for the persons whose presence is required in blasting Nobody should be present within 300 m radius of blasting site as per DGMS circular except blasting personnel. Practice for controlled blasting

DGMS/(Tech)Ci r.No.2 of 2003

Procedure for drilling andblasting, tacking shelteretc. as per Reg. 164 MMR1961, DGMS (SOMA)/(Tech) Cir.No.2 of 2003

Y Certified Blaster (MMR)



7.4 DISASTERS MANAGEMENT PLAN The Disaster Management Plan (DMP) is a guide, giving general considerations, directions, and procedures for handling emergencies likely to arise from planned operations. The DMP has been prepared for the TCL on the basis of the Risk Assessment and related findings covered in the report. 7.4.1 Disaster Management Plan: Structure The Disaster Management Plan (DMP) is supposed to be a dynamic, changing; document focusing on continual advantage of doing this is to have a system that is in synchronicity with commonly used SHE systems such as ISO 14001 and OHSAS 18001. 7.4.2 Policy The Safety Health and Environmental (SHE) policy is existing & accessible to all at site and to other stakeholders. The policy has been framed considering legislative compliance, stakeholder involvement, continual improvement, and management by objectives. 7.4.3 Planning Identification and Prevention of Possible Emergency Situations

Technique with milli-second delay detonators/ electric shock tubes/ cord relays. Training of persons and their helpers engaged in such blasting operation.

6 Hit by Machinerie s – Electrical Equipment (bodily injuries)

Poor machinery Maintenan ce

Periodic servicing of machineries Periodic Inspection / Audit of Machineries and Structures Non Compliance to SOP

MMR 1961

Procedure laid under Section 174 Chapter XVI – Machinery and Plant of MMR 1961

Y Mines Manager

Poor Cabling / Earthling To Rotating Equipmen ts

Periodic servicing of electrical instruments. Periodic Inspection / Audit of Electrical equipments – cables and accessories Non Compliance to SOP

Indian Electricity Rules 2003

Section VII – Works of Licensees of Indian Electricity Rules 2003

Y

Electrical In charge under Mines Rules 1951



Possible emergency situations can broadly be classified into unintended explosions, vehicle collision, and inundation. Additional emergency situations can be developed on the basis of audit or other procedures prior to commencement of operations. Emergency Prevention Some of the ways of preventing emergencies are as follows:

• Preparation of a Preventive Maintenance Schedule Programme and also covering maintenance schedules for all critical equipments and instruments as per recommendations of the manufacturers user manuals,

• Importantly, it is of great importance to collect and analyze information pertaining to minor incidents and accidents at the site, as well as for recording near-misses or emergencies that were averted. This information gives an indication of how likely or unlikely it is for the site to face actual emergency and what shall be further action to prevent them from occurring.

• Establishment of an ongoing training and evaluation programme, incorporating the development of capabilities amongst employees about potential emergencies and ways and means of identifying and averting the same. Most emergencies do not occur without some incident or an abnormal situation. So there is always sometime of few seconds to few minutes to arrest an incident of abnormal situation from turning in to an emergency. This is the role of the shift in-charge who is the incident controller (IC) along with his shift team.

Emergency Plan Objectives Specific objectives of the Emergency Response Plan are to be clearly listed with regards to the responses desired for successful management of the possible emergency situations. Suggested Objectives could include:

• To define and assess emergencies, including risk and environmental impact assessment. • To control and contain incidents. • To safeguard employees. • To minimize damage to property or / and the environment. • To inform employees, the general public and the authority on the hazards / risks assessed. • Safeguard provided residual risk if any and the role to be played by them in the event of

emergency. • To inform authorities like Safety and Fire Dept and Mutual Aid Centers to come up for help. • For effective rescue and treatment of casualties and to count the injured. • To identify and list fatal accidents if any. • To secure the safe rehabilitation of affected areas and to restore normally. • To provide authoritative information to the news media. • To preserve records, equipments etc. and to organize investigation into the cause of the

emergency and preventive measures to stop its recurrence. • To ensure safety of staff and patients and resume work. • To work out a plan with all provisions to handle emergencies and to provide for emergency. • Preparedness and the periodical rehearsal of the plan.

The objectives are suggested in emergency preparedness plan of TCL. Responsibilities, resources and timeframes require to be allocated for implementing the objectives. 7.4.4 Implementation Allocation of Resources Key Personnel are identified for carrying out specific and assigned duties in case of any kind of Emergency. All such key personnel shall be available on call on holidays and off duty also.

• Commander (Manager Quarries) • Deputy commander (Personnel Officer) • Site Incident Controller (Shift in charge) • Deputy Incident Controller (Senior Mining Mate) • Other key personnel • Essential workers



Responsibilities of Commander / Deputy Commander • To take charge at the place of incident. • To activate the Emergency Preparedness Plan according to severity of situation. • Inform all the employees and relatives of the affected employees. • Call all key personnel and inform Doctor to be ready for treatment. • Commander shall deploy staff carry out following functions. To coordinate and reinforce Emergency Combat at Site along with Site Incident Controller. To liaise with other Departments and guide their personnel. To supervise Assembly and Evacuation at all points. To look after Patients who are bed ridden and any Casualties and give psychological support. • Activate Assembly and Evacuation Plan if required as per situation by ordering Site Incident

Controller. • Inform and liaise with Chief Operating Officer, Police department and District Emergency

Authority. • Arrange for chronological records of emergency to be maintained. • Issue authorized statements to News Media. • Ensure that proper consideration is given for preservation of evidence and arrange for video

shooting / photographs. • Deputy Commander shall carry out the responsibilities of Commander in his absence and assist

him in his duties when present. • Assign Medicare and Emergency Management tasks to all persons of management cadre.

Responsibilities of Mines Foreman • To take immediate charge at the site of incident. • Ensure that immediate steps as per Emergency Preparedness Plan are taken and direct the worker

staff. • Inform Commander, Deputy Commander and other key personnel’s. • Shall blow the Siren / Hooter as per situation to declare Emergency. • Supervise assembly and evacuation as per plan, if required. • Appoint more than one Deputy Incident Controller to take charge if emergency occurs at more

than one place. • Ensure that Commander has been alerted. • Take decisions for controlling the emergency till arrival by Commander. • Ensure that casualties are receiving adequate attention and medical care. • Ensure accounting for personnel and rescue of missing persons. • Control traffic movement in Quarry premises. • When emergency is prolonged arrange for relief of rescue workers and catering facilities. • Deputy Incident Controller shall take charge at site of emergency in the absence of Site Incident

Controller. • In the presence of same, he shall assist Site Incident Controller or take charge at another location,

if emergency exists in more than one place. Responsibilities of Essential Workers

A task force of essential trained staff is made available to get work done by Incident Controllers. Such work shall include - • Fire fighting and spill control till fire brigade takes the charge. • To help the fire brigade, if it is so required. • Emergency engineering work e.g. isolating equipment, materials, urgent repairing or replacement,

electrical work etc. • Provision of emergency power, water, lighting, material, etc. • Movement of equipment, special vehicle and transport to or from the scene of the incident. • Search, evacuation, rescue and welfare. First - Aid and medical help.



• Manning of assembly points to record the arrival of evacuated personnel. Manning of outside shelters and welfare of evacuated persons there.

• Assistance at casualty’s reception areas to record details of casualties. • Assistance at communication center to handle outgoing and incoming calls and to act as

messengers if necessary. • Control of traffic at Quarry premises.

7.4.5 Setting up of Emergency Infrastructure To enable the key persons to implement the DMP, the following infrastructure will require to be set up: Assembly Points In case of emergency the site needs to be evacuated immediately. On evacuation people will go to pre-assigned assembly points. The charge will be taken by shift in charge and in his absence person deployed by Commander will be in charge of respective assembly points and will supervise Assembly and Head Count. A Board indicating the Assembly Point having relevant information is placed at point for guidance. Liaison with State Authorities Government authorities, local hospital, police fire services, taluka mamlatdar, district collector will be kept informed about the occurrence and development of any incident by Commander and procure necessary help and guidance from these authorities. Task Force of Essential Staff A task force of essential trained staff is made available to get work done by the Commander. Task Force personnel shall be trained to perform tasks as mentioned above. Emergency Control Center Manager-Quarry Office will act as Emergency Control Center and provided with required communication facilities. The Control Center is situated in an area of minimum risk and close to the road to allow for ready access by a vehicle if other systems fail or extra communication facilities are needed to be set up. The Emergency control center should consist of following items:

• External telephones • Internal telephones • E-Mail facilities • Emergency plan • Stationeries • Torches and emergency lights.

7.4.6 Fire Fighting Person noticing the fire shall immediately raise alarm and ask the nearest person to inform Matron and Manager-Quarry. Portable Fire Extinguisher shall be used in an attempt to extinguish the fire, by the person at site. Matron shall assess the severity of fire and if likely to be severe shall take following steps -

• Call fire tenders and mobile trailer pump from nearby fire department. • Call for assembly of all persons at assembly points • Arrange for turning "OFF" main switch of electricity supply. • Manager-Quarry shall review the steps taken by Matron in his capacity as COMMANDER and

establish a "Control Room" in his office. Immediate Step in Case of Explosion: At first the concerned security guard should inform about it to the shift-in-charge and Mgr.-Quarry. They will take the precaution described in the Work Instruction. Further Steps in Case of Fire Spreading Commander shall continuously assess the situation and if it is not being controlled then ensure:

• Assembly of all persons at the assembly points. • Arrival of fire tenders and / or Mobile Trailer Pump. • Ensure evacuation in orderly fashion. • Ensure that any vehicle parked near the Fire Site is taken away to safe area.



• Carry out responsibilities as detailed as above. 7.4.7 Emergency Preparedness for Electrical Shock / Accident (Applicable in Case of Mechanized Sizing):

• Source of power should be put off immediately in case of any electrical shock. • Injured person should be shifted to safe place. • Persons engaged in rescuing operation should use all PPEs and take appropriate precaution while

removing the injured persons. • Trained persons are engaged to give first-aid treatment to injured persons. • In case of major injury the injured is shifted to the Dispensary/Hospital. • In case of electrical fire, only CO2 type Fire Extinguisher is used. • Accident report in prescribed form is sent to appropriate authority in case of reportable injury. • All the persons engaged to carry out this operation should be equipped with appropriate PPEs

(Personal Protective Equipments) like safety shoes, helmets, dust masks etc. 7.4.8 Natural Disasters Quarry being a single storey building, built on elevated base is structurally safe from effects of Natural Disasters. It affords shelter against cyclone and flood. Cyclone and Flood When warning of cyclone or heavy rains is received from Local Administration, the Commander shall alert Staff to be prepared.

• Matron shall withdraw the entire person from work place and accumulate them in quarry building.

• All the equipment should be withdrawn from mine and kept in a higher site. • The Quarry Manager may advise to leave the staff depending on security of situation.

Earthquake • When earthquake hits, all persons shall be encouraged to run out in the open areas designated as

Assembly Points. • All the electrical supply should be disconnected by the electrical department. • All key personnel shall reach Quarry immediately and carry out designated responsibilities. • All the electrical supply should be disconnected by the electrical department. • Steps detailed in Emergency preparedness are to be carried out. • As soon as earthquake tremor stops - Site Incident Controller (Matron) shall : • Check all areas to ensure that all fires and doused. • Check all areas for persons trapped inside. • Search and Rescue Operation shall be launched with help of Workers, if there is obvious damage

to building. 7. 4.9 First Aid Basic items in a first aid kit consist of items listed in table 7.5.

Table 7.6: Suggested Items in First Aid Kit S. No. Description Quantity

1. First aid leaflet 1 copy 2. Sterilized finger dressing 10 nos. 3. Sterilized hand or foot dressing 10 nos. 4. Sterilized body or large dressing 6 nos. 5. Sterilized burns dressing -small 4 nos. 6. Sterilized burns dressing -large 2 nos. 7. Sterilized burns dressing – extra large 6 nos. 8. Sterilized cotton wool (25 gm) 2 tubes 9. Cetavolon (28 gm) 2 tubes

10. Eye pads 6 nos. 11. Adhesive plaster 1 spool 12. Assorted roller bandage 6 nos.



13. Triangular bandages 6 nos. 14. Safety pins 6 nos. 15. Scissors, ordinary, 12.7cms, both sides sharp 1 pair 16. Savlon liquid, 150 ml, or equivalent 2 nos. 17. Cotton wool for padding, 100 gm 2 packets 18. Eye Ointment of sulphacetamide preparation 1 tube 19. Loose woven gauze (28”x8”), compressed pack 1 packet 20. Aspirin, 300 mg (10 tablets) 5 strips 21. Scribbling Pad, 4”x 6” with a pencil in a plastic cover 1 no. 22. Adhesive dressing strips 10 strips 23. Field dressing of modified army pattern 3 nos. 24. Record cards in a plastic cover 1 set 25. Torch, medium size without cells 1 no. 26. Eye wash 1 no. 27. Wooden splints, small 1 set 28. Wooden splints, big 1 set

Treatment of affected persons 1. Injured/Affected persons shall be provided suitable first-aid treatment and sent to Doctor for further treatment depending on injury. 2. Patients requiring further treatment shall be sent in Ambulances to Hospitals in Nangal Chudhary. 3. Patients suffering from minor problems shall be discharged and sent home after preliminary treatment. Post Emergency Activities Medical checkup: Medical checkup of affected persons if any and suitable medical aid will be provided. Collection of Records: Exact information shall be collected regarding cause of Emergency and remedial measures suggested preventing recurrence. Inquiry: Detailed inquiry shall be carried out to find out cause which will be in the form of fact finding and recommendations made to suitable authority. Insurance Claims (if any): Insurance claims for damage due to consequences of emergency shall be filed. Mock Drill: Full scale mock drill shall be conducted at least once a year in coordination with Safety Department. Manager-Quarry shall declare the emergency for mock drill and all persons concerned shall perform duties as per Responsibilities given in this Plan. Training: Regular training of all concerned personnel will be conducted to enable the Staff to face any type of Emergency be it Natural Disasters, Fire in Equipment, Building or any explosion in quarry. 7.4.10 DMP Audit, Non Conformance and Corrective Action and Preventive Action Since this DMP has been designed as a dynamic document, it is required that its performance be audited at regular intervals. Ideally, persons auditing the DMP should be external auditors (i.e. not employed at the site being audited). The audit should result in a set of findings that are put before the site management for review. Audits will be periodic, at intervals that are decided by the Head Office. Audit reports shall state the exact non-compliance with the particular clause of this DMP, and should include steps to be taken to attain compliance, through corrective and preventive actions.

7.4.11 Training and Human Resources Development i. Appointment and delegating qualified and experienced personnel in various disciplines.

ii. Adequate training/refresher training will be provided to the supervisors, workers keeping in view provisions of Mines Vocational Training Rules, 1966; Mine Rules, 1955, Mines Rescue Rules, 1985.

iii. Personnel who have to operate and maintain HEMM, Trucks etc are to be trained under the guidance of the manufacturers and as per provisions of DGMS Circular Technical 1/1989 regarding accidents in opencast mines. Recommendation of Seventh Conference on Safety in Mines on “Safety in Open Cast Mining”, “Traffic Rules and Procedures”, “Mobile equipments and Highway Delivery Vehicles”, “Operations and Operator Training” and other related circulars.

iv. The training of mine personnel shall be provided regularly with respect to environmental protection.



v. Special courses for employees will be arranged for afforestation, re-vegetation, reclamation, health hazards (identification), malaria eradication and HIV prevention etc in the training centre of the company.

7.5 Rain Water Harvesting The rain water harvesting is proposed by Project Proponent and allocated a budget of Rs. 5.00 Lakhs under EMP budget. There are 9 No’s of rainwater harvesting pit of 4.5 KL each will be installed at mine site. The size of rainwater harvesting is given in figure 7.1.

Figure 7.5: Rainwater Harvesting Pit

7.6 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH HAZARDS Dry-pit mining by open cast method involves dust generation by excavation, loading and transportation of mineral. At site, during excavation and loading activity, dust is main pollutant which affects the health of workers whereas environmental and climatic conditions also generate the health problems. Addressing the occupational health hazard means gaining an understanding of the source (its location and magnitude or concentration), identifying an exposure pathway (e.g. a means to get it in contact with someone), and determination of likely a receptor (someone receiving the stuff that is migrating). Occupational hazard due to stone mining mainly comes under the physical hazards. Possible physical hazards are as below mention: 7.6.1 Physical Hazards Due To Mining Operations Following health related hazards were indentified due to stone mining operations to the workers:

a) Light: The workers may be exposed to the risk of poor illumination or excessive brightness. The effects are eye strain, headache, eye pain and lachrymation, congestion around the cornea and eye fatigue.

b) Heat and Humidity: The most common physical hazard is heat. The direct effects of heat exposure are burns, heat exhaustion, heat stroke and heat cramps; the indirect effects are decreased efficiency, increased fatigue and enhanced accident rates. Heat and humidity are encountered in hot and humid condition when temperatures and air temperatures increase in summer time up to 480C or.

c) Eye Irritation: During the high windy days in summer the stone could be the problems for eyes like itching and watering of eyes.

d) Respiratory Problems: Large amounts of dust in air can be a health hazard, exacerbating



respiratory disorders such as asthma and irritating the lungs and bronchial passages. e) Noise Induced Hearing Loss: Drilling, Blasting and Machinery is the main source of noise

pollution at the mine site. 7.6.2 Medical Examination Schedule To minimize the health impacts PPE like dust masks, ear plugs/ muffs and other equipments will be provided for use by the work personnel. All workers will be subjected to Initial Medical Examination as per Mines Rule 1955 at the time of appointment. Periodical Medical Examination will be conducted at least once in five years. Medical camps will be organized. The detail of health check up and periodical medical examination schedule is given below.

Table 7.7: Medical Examination Schedule S. No Activities 1st Year 2nd Year 3rd Year 4th Year 5th Year

1. Initial Medical Examination (Mine Workers) A. Physical Check -up - - - - B. Psychological Test - - - - C. Audiometric Test - - - - D. Respiratory Test

2. Periodical Medical Examination (Mine Workers) A. Physical Check -up - B. Audiometric Test - C. Eye Check -up - D. Respiratory Test -

3. Medical Camp (Mine Workers and Nearby Villagers

-

4. Training (Mine Workers) Note: Medical Follow Ups Work force will be divided into three targeted groups age wise as follows:

Age Group PME as per Mine Rule 1955 Special Examination

Less than 25 years Once in a Three Years In case of emergencies

Between 25 to 40 Years Once in a Three Years In case of emergencies

Above 40 years Once in a Three Years In case of emergencies

7.7 CONSERVATION PLAN FOR SCHEDULED FAUNA 7.7.1. Conservation plan for Indian Peafowl (Peacock) Zoological name–Pavo cristatus Peacock or Indian peafowl (Pavo cristatus) is a very familiar bird and also recognized as National Bird of India Asiatic peafowl like the Indian Blue Peafowl and especially the Green Peafowl occupy a similar niche as the roadrunners, secretary bird and seriema. All of these birds hunt for small animals including arthropods on the ground and tall grass and minnows in shallow streams. Because of human encroachment into their natural territories, peafowl and humans have come into increasing contact. Because of their natural beauty some are reluctant to classify the birds as pests, but their presence can be disturbing.



CLASSIFICATION Kingdom: Animalia Phylum: Chordata Class: Aves Order: Galliformes Family: Phasianidae Genus: Pavo Species: cristatus Vernacular name: Mor or Peacock Conservation Status

IUCN: Others (LC) ver. 3.1 IWPA: Schedule I. CITES: Not listed. Geographical Distribution: Pakistan, India and Sri Lanka. Many feral populations exist throughout the world. Description of Pavo cristatus: The male, known as a peacock, is a large bird with a length from bill to tail of 100 to 115 cm (40 to 46 inches) and to the end of a fully grown train as much as 195 to 225 cm (78 to 90 inches) and weigh 4–6 kg (8.8–13.2 lbs). The females, or peahens, are smaller at around 95 cm (38 inches) in length and weigh 2.75–4 kg (6–8.8 lbs). Indian Peafowl are among the largest and heaviest representatives of the Phasianidae family. Their size, colour and shape of crest make them unmistakable within their native distribution range. The male is metallic blue on the crown, the feathers of the head being short and curled. The fan-shaped crest on the head is made of feathers with bare black shafts and tipped with bluish-green webbing. A white stripe above the eye and a crescent shaped white patch below the eye are formed by bare white skin. The sides of the head have iridescent greenish blue feathers. The back has scaly bronze-green feathers with black and copper markings. The scapular and the wings are



buff and barred in black, the primaries are chestnut and the secondary are black. The tail is dark brown and the train is made up of elongated upper tail coverts (more than 200 feathers, the actual tail has only 20 feathers) and nearly all of these feathers end with an elaborate eye-spot. A few of the outer feathers lack the spot and end in a crescent shaped black tip. The underside is dark glossy green shading into blackish under the tail. The thighs are buff coloured. The male has a spur on the leg above the hind toe. Peacocks are polygamous and the breeding season is spread out but appears to be dependent on the rains. Several males may congregate at a leek site and these males are often closely related. Males at leek appear to maintain small territories next to each other and they allow females to visit them and make no attempt to guard harems. Females do not appear to favour specific males. Peafowl are omnivorous and eat seeds, insects, fruits and reptiles. A large percentage of their food is made up of the fallen berries. Around cultivated areas, peafowl feed on a wide range of crops such as groundnut, tomato, paddy, etc. Around human habitations, they feed on a variety of food scraps. In the countryside, it is particularly partial to crops and garden plants. Habitat: The Indian Peafowl is found mainly on the ground in open scrub forest or on land under cultivation where they forage for berries, grains but will also prey on snakes, lizards and small rodents. Their loud calls make them easy to detect and in forest areas often indicate the presence of a predator such as a tiger. They forage on the ground in small groups and will usually try to escape on foot through undergrowth and avoid flying, though they will fly into tall trees to roost. The bird has a celebrated status in Indian mythology and hence protected culturally in India. The Indian Peafowl is listed as Least Concern by IUCN. Peafowl Behaviour Peacocks are gregarious by nature. In the breeding season they are usually seen in small parties of one male with three to five females whereas in the non breeding season they remain in separate parties of adult males and females with juveniles. Peacocks roost in tall trees and emerge from the dense thickets to feed in fields and openings in forests and fields. Life Cycle Voice/Call: Kee-ow, Kee-ow, Kee-ow, Ka-an, Ka-an, Ka-an, Kok-kok, Kok-kok, cain-kok Breeding: April-September. Nest site: On ground in undergrowth (wild), on buildings by semi-feral birds in villages. Life Span: The life expectancy is about 10-15 years. Food Habit: Peacocks are ground feeders. Indian peafowl’s do most of their foraging early in the morning and shortly before sunset. They retreat to the shade and security of the trees for the hottest portion of the day. They make a meal of grains, berries drupes wild figs and some cultivated crops. They can also eat insect’s small reptiles and small mammals. Relationship with Man The great beauty and popularity of the Indian Peafowl has ensured its protection throughout its native ranges. It is a National bird of India. The peafowl is prominent in the mythology and folklore of the Indian people. The Hindus consider the bird to be sacred because of its association with Lord Krishna who used to wear its feather as crown (Mor Mokut). It is also associated with the God Kartikeya, son of the Lord Shiva and Parvati and brother of Lord Ganesh. It is Vaahan (transport) of Lord Kartikeya. This long and close association with humans has proven the peafowl’s adaptability to human altered landscapes. In villages where it is protected it becomes quite tame, but is very shy and secretive where hunted. In the buffer area of mine site peacock is generally protected by the local people. Threats in the Study Area: No perceptible threats were identified in the villages surveyed. Village residents are against hunting or poaching of the peafowl, due to culture and mythology reasons. Adult peafowl can usually escape ground predators by flying into trees. a) Foraging in groups provides some safety as there are more eyes to look out for predators. b) Habitat loss, specially the shortage of tall trees in and around the villages for roosting and for

providing shade during hot summer months. c) Shortage of drinking water for the birds during the hot summer days. d) Casualties caused by eating chemically treated agricultural crop seeds. e) Illegal hunting by some communities.



Conservation through Habitat Improvement and Awareness: Habitat improvement programme will be undertaken through plantation of suitable tree species in the surrounding villages. While selecting the tree/ shrub species care shall be provided for beery plants which attract these birds. During summer period, villagers will be encouraged to use the old earthen pots to fill with water for drinking these birds. Summer is the time when these. Birds are facing shortage of feeds; there by supplying the feed like Bajri, Juwar, Maize to the identified villages will suffix the problem of food shortage. The proponent can directly supply these feed to the villages directly or by funding to the NGOs active in this mission. Feeding and Watering Arrangement: Artificial water holes will be created along the natural drained nallahs which can sufficient drinking water up to summer of the region. An anicut and open wall will be created by the company as their community development programme involving the local panchayats in this work. Proposition for the suitable place to increase population of birds near plant nursery and office plantation will help. Provision for artificial nests, feeding trays and water troughs is under consideration. To support furgivorous birds, artificial feed like wild fruits and vegetables will be provided. Direct and indirect approach is required to provide effective conservation, which is recommended as under: i) Increasing the tree cover in the buffer area for shelter and roosting of peacocks. This will be achieved by planting of tree groves (a group of trees that grow close together, generally without many bushes or other plants) in buffer area. Some local species such as Neem, Siris, Amaltash, Ardu, Shesham, Dhak, Peepal tree etc. will be plant. Planting of tree groves in school compounds in the villages of buffers area will be plant as per the plantation programme. ii) By conducting awareness programmes (community and school level) for conservation of peacocks in the area and also through organizing competitions during Wildlife Week and Van Mahotsave celebrations. iii) Some provision of rewards to informers for the control of poaching and illegal trade in wildlife. iv) Carrying out census and research projects to know the potential threats and population status of the species. v) Provision of veterinary care and cages for injured or sick or deformed birds. vi) Suggest strategies to minimize negative impacts of changing environment in nearby area of peacock populations and to promote conservation of peacock habitats. vii) Another way to help preserve the endangered species is to create society dedicated to ecological ethics. All the conservation measures will be implemented with the help of and in the consultation of the district forest department. viii) With the objective of effectively protecting the wild life and to control poaching, smuggling and illegal trade in wildlife and its derivatives, the Government of India enacted Wild Life (Protection) Act 1972. The Act was amended in January 2003 and punishment and penalty for offences under the Act have been made more stringent. 7.7.2. Conservation plan for Indian Cobra (Naja naja) The Indian cobra is a poisonous snake occupying large areas of the Middle East, from India through China and Indonesia. Indian natives call it nag, naga, pambo, gokhura and nagara havu. The Indian cobra normally grows to a length of around one meter. It lives anywhere it can find suitable shelter, even in areas occupied by humans. Cobras do not normally attack humans when not threatened, except during mating season. When meeting a cobra, the best strategy is to remain calm, since cobras react aggressively to rapid movements. The cobra's poison, similarly to that of other rat snakes (genus Elaphe) has primarily neurotoxic effects.



Classification Kingdom: Animalia Phylum: Chordata Class: Reptilia Order: Squamata Suborder: Serpentes Family: Elapidae Genus: Naja Species: N. naja Local Names: In most parts of India derivatives of the Sanskrit Nag; Bengali Naga gokurra (binocellate form), Keauthia (monocellate form); Pushtu Cha¬jitiwalla; Tamil Nalla pambu, Naga pambu; Kannada Nagara havu; Malayalam Moorkan, Surpam; Singhalese Naya. Conservation Status

i) IUCN category- Least Concern ver 3.1 ii) CITES Listing - Appendix III. iii) As per WPA, 1972- Schedule –II. Size: Longest measured 2250 mm. usually from 1371 to 1625 mm. Identification: The cobra can be immediately distinguished from other land' snakes by the presence of a small cuneate scale between the 4th and 5th infralabials. Rarely two may be present and very rarely the cuneate may be absent. Another distinguishing character is the preocular touching the intranasal, a character seen in two other species of Indian snakes also but the cobra can be separated from these in having the 3rd supraliminal in contact with the eye. The hood is formed by the elongated ribs of the 3rd and the following 27 vertebrae, the 9th on the left and 10th on the right are the longest, the preceding and succeeding ribs shorten progressively giving an oval outline to the expanded hood. At rest the ribs lie along the length of the body, the overlying skin is but loosely attached. When erect the dorsal skin is



stretched making the hood markings conspicuous and the head bent strongly at the atlas (1st vertebra) is carried at right angles to the hood. The hood when dilated is diagnostic, more so when the markings are visible. The markings may be absent and in death the hood may not be demonstrable. The King Cobra has a well developed hood and many other snakes have the ability to flatten the neck area to a more limited degree. Head depressed with short, rounded snout. The nostrils are large and pupil is round. Obvious swelling at the temporal region over the underlying poison glands. Head shields glossy, body with a more or less distinct groove down the spine. Coloration Extremely variable in coloration and markings. Three races are recognized on the basis of the hood pattern: The spectacled or binocellate Cobra of peninsular India (Naja naja naja) yellowish, brownish or black above with or without a black and white mark on hood, a black and white spot on the inside of the hood with one or two black crossbars below hood. Sri Lankan and south Indian cobras are usually of shades of brown with well-defined hood marks. Cobras from the north are more often black and the hood pattern may not be well defined or may be absent. Monocellate Cobra (Naja naja kaouthia) differs in having only a single yellow or orange O-shaped mark on the hood. General colour olive, brown or black. This is the common Cobra of eastern India and eastwards of India. The Black Cobra (Naja naja oxiana) occurs in the extreme northwest. Light grey or brown above when young with dark crossbars. Adult brown or black uniform. Habitat, Distribution and Status Absent in arid deserts and in the hills above 1800 m. Occurs from Transcaspia in the north, through Indian subcontinent to southern China in the east and to the Philippines in the south. Andamans and Sri Lanka. Found almost anywhere, in heavy jungle, open cultivated land, in populated areas where old masonry constructions form ideal refuge. White ant nests, holes in the ground or the tangle of roots at the base of a tree are particularly favoured. Frequently found near or in water and is a strong swimmer. Usually not aggressive and often exceedingly timid but occasionally fierce and aggressive when disturbed. Young are much more dangerous than adults being more easily excited and ready to strike repeatedly and with determination. When alarmed it adopts the well known pose with erect fore body and spread hood. The height to which the fore body is raised is approximately one-third the total length of the snake and forms the effective striking range. Whilst thus poised the snake sways backwards and forwards hissing in an explosive manner brief and high pitched during inhalation and longer, louder, lower pitched and intermittently explosive during exhalation. The throat is pouched; more so, during exhalation and the whole body is inflated. The tongue flickers in and out during inhalation and exhalation. The bite is often a mere snap but sometimes bites and hangs on and the jaws have to be forced open. Occasionally when the snake misses, the poison is ejected as a spray by the forceful thrust of the lunging snake. Usually more active and alert at night though hunts for food during the late afternoon and early evening. Food Feeds principally on rats, frogs and toads. Also takes birds, lizards, other snakes including other cobras and is an invertebrate egg stealer. Eggs are swallowed whole and digested in about 48 hours. Breeding Mating has been seen in January and the majority of eggs are laid in April/May but clutches have been obtained up to August. The period of gestation is about sixty two days but may extend considerably. Eggs hatch in 48 to 69 days. Twelve to twenty two, in one instance 45 (36 fertile) eggs are deposited at a time. The eggs are soft-shelled elongate oval measuring 49 x 28 mm. The parents cohabit before pairing and the eggs are guarded by one or both. Both parents known to incubate. Hatchlings measure 250-280 mm at birth. The poison glands are active from birth. Poison Apparatus and Poison Usually two fully operative canaliculated fangs on each side. These are shed singly at intervals. Fangs about 7 mm in length are small compared to viperine fangs but are more solid. The bore of the fang opens widely at the base and by a small aperture at the tip. The poison glands are analogous to the parotid salivary glands in mammals and have the shape and size of an almond kernel. The venom is a clear, viscid fluid resembling olive oil in appearance and consistency which solidifies into an amorphous mass. The amount secreted varies with age, vitality and temper of the animal and the average discharge at a bite is about 211 mgm in dry weight. Comparative data on the basis of experiments on other animals gives the



lethal dose for man as 15 to 17.5 mgm for a weight of 60 Kg person. However, the poison can be swallowed without ill effects provided there are no internal ulcers. The poison acts mainly as a neurotoxin and blood and cell destroyer. The neurotoxin paralyses the respiratory centre and is the chief cause of death. Other effects are loss of clotting power of the blood and destruction of red blood cells. The symptoms produced in man; start with a stinging or burning pain accompanied by swelling and oozing of blood-stained serum. The constitutional effects are a gradual but rapidly advancing paralysis commencing with the legs, the neck droops, the muscles of the tongue, lips, and throat, are affected and speech becomes difficult. The lower lip falls and allows saliva to dribble, swallowing becomes difficult or impossible. Breathing becomes difficult, laborious and -stops. Other symptoms are vomiting and haemorrhage from the various orifices of the body. It does not necessarily mean that the bite of a cobra is fatal at all times, depending as it does on the quantity of venom injected, the natural resistance of the victim, the condition of the snake and various other factors. Records indicate that case of recovery from a bite is equal to if not more than cases of death and there is always hope however serious the symptoms. The Haffkine Institute's polyvalent serum is fully effective even when symptoms are far advanced. Facts about Cobra a) The Indian cobra is one of the most dangerous snakes in India, killing around 10,000 people each year. b) The Indian cobra is attracted to places like rice paddies, where many cases of biting occur. c) The poison of the India cobra is used in research, and for manufacturing analgesics and anti-cancer medications. d) Cobras are deaf, and their 'dance' is a reaction to the movements of a fakir's flute, rather than the music. e) Indian cobras kept in captivity may live up to 30 years. f) Indian cobras are considered holy animals and certain days of the year are dedicated to their worship. g) The Indonesian subspecies of the Indian cobra can spray its venom to a distance of several meters. Threats Direct threats includes killing due to its venom potency, fear due to its aggressive behaviour known to layman encountered with it and road kills. This snake is exploited extensively by all Indian snake charmers and comes in skin trade too. Many communities consume this species for edible use. Its venom is used in production of Anti Venom Serum and various research use so venom harvesting is done illegally in some parts of India and many other countries of its range. This is one among many venomous snake which are in high demand for Chinese medicines and snake vine. Conservation The people living in the surrounding area and employee of the company would be motivated towards the protection of the animal. Motivation will lead to timely information to the concerned authorities about any threat to wild life or any cases of pouching/hunting. Special Staff for the Protection and Anti-poaching: Special Staffs will be deployed by the forest department for patrolling and protection of the fauna and flora under their jurisdiction because the regular staff deployed for this purpose, due to their busy schedule, is unable to perform their work properly. Each of the special staff will be equipped with dress, raincoat, gumboots, sticks and wireless set for communication. Financial burden for the same has been included in financial projection of this report. Reducing man wildlife conflicts: Unauthorised entry in to forest for illegal grazing, cutting or poaching are the major causes for Man-Wildlife conflicts. These practices will be reduced as much as possible. Training and Awareness Programme: This is the most important aspect of wild life conservation. People will be educated regarding the importance of wild life conservation through mass publicity by installing sign-boards, conducting audio visual classes and distributing literature in respective villages in the buffer zone. Experts in the field of wild life conservation will also be invited to deliver talks through slides. Sign Boards: Following sign-boards to be displayed are:

WILDLIFE HAS RIGHT TO MOVE THROUGH ROADS REPTILES CROSSING; DRIVE SLOW

PLANT TREE SAPLINGS WITH YOUR NAME FIRE DESTROYS BOTH THE PLANTS AND ANIMALS



CAPTURING/HUNTING WILD ANIMALS IS PUNISHABLE OFFENCE DON’T THROW BURNING OBJECTS

WILDLIFE IS OUR PRECIOUS HERITAGE INFORM FOREST OFFICER IF WILDLIFE IS IN DISTRESS

7.7.3 Conservation plan for Golden Jackal (Canis aureus) Jackal (Canis aureus), also called the Asiatic, Oriental or Common Jackal. It is the largest of the jackals and the only species to occur outside Africa. Classification Kingdom: Animalia Phylum: Chordata Class: Mammalia Order: Carnivora Family: Canidae Genus Canis Species: Canis aureus Conservation Status

IUCN: Others (LC) ver 3.1 IWPA: Schedule II. CITES: Appendix-II.

Geographical Distribution: The golden jackal occurs in North and East Africa, South-eastern Europe and South Asia, including India to Myanmar. Habitat: Golden jackal is a terrestrial species and the most northerly of jackal species and also the most widely distributed. It overlaps biotopes only with the black backed jackal in East African savannas. Golden jackals prefer dry open country, arid short grasslands, scrub forests and steppe landscapes. Food: Golden jackals are omnivores, opportunistic feeders. They consume 54% animal food and 46% plant food. They are opportunistic foragers with a very varied diet, which consists of monkeys, rodents, (especially during winter), hares, often kills deer calves, ground birds and their eggs, reptiles, frogs, fish, insects and fruit. They take carrion on occasion.



Behavior: Golden jackals are strictly nocturnal in areas inhabited by humans, but may be partly diurnal elsewhere. They dig caverns for shelter, or use crevices in rocks, or caverns that were dug by other animals. The basic social unit of the golden jackal is a mated pair or a mated pair and it’s young. Golden Jackals have been known to appropriate the dens of Vulpes bengalensis, conversely, jackals have been reported to vacate areas inhabited by the larger Gray Wolf. Life span: Golden jackals live eight to nine years in the wild and up to sixteen in captivity. Threats Except in protected areas like National Parks and Sanctuaries, the jackal population is steadily declining. Traditional land use practices, like livestock rearing and dry farming that were conducive to the survival of jackals and other wildlife, are being steadily replaced by industrialization and intensive agriculture; wilderness areas and rural landscapes are being rapidly urbanized. Jackal populations adapt to some extent to this change and may persist for a while, but eventually disappear from such areas like other wildlife. In this area, hunting by a nomadic population is one of the major threats to the species. There are no other known threats. There is no significant trade in jackal products, although skins and tails are occasionally sold. Little quantitative information is available on jackal densities, habitat use and ranging patterns in relation to food availability. Information on dispersal, survival and mortality factors of adults, pups and dispersing individuals is needed. Jackal ecology needs to be studied in forested ecosystems of Southeast Asia where a different set of factors are likely to operate affecting food availability, ranging patterns and survival. Aspects of canid diseases in relation to population dynamics of Jackals and transmission need to be better understood. Conservation measures The people living in the surrounding area and employee of the company would be motivated towards the protection of the animal. Motivation will lead to timely information to the concerned authorities about any threat to wild life or any cases of pouching/hunting. Education and Awareness: This is the most important aspect of wild life conservation. People will be educated regarding the importance of wild life conservation through mass publicity by installing sign-boards, conducting audio visual classes and distributing literature in respective villages in the buffer zone. Experts in the field of wild life conservation will also be invited to deliver talks through slides. People Participation: With the help of the local people and employees of the Company watch will be kept on the wild life as well as illegal tree felling. Forest and police department will be informed if such incident occurs, to take legal action against the offenders. For this they will be trained for motivation. Sign-Boards: Sign-boards will be in English as well as in local language 7.7.4 CONCLUSION The conservation plan suggested here is for scheduled fauna (Animal and Bird) will be implemented by the mining lease holder and the budgetary provision is discussed and given in detail for the implementation of the same in the area. It is very important to conserve the scheduled fauna in the area by the local authority as well as by the forest officials. People are not aware about the wildlife and protection of wild animals. There is an urgent need of education and awareness to local people about the wild life and their importance. 7.7.5Green Belt Development A green belt will be developed along the boundary of the mining lease area. The area for green belt plantation consists of undisturbed soil; hence plantation could be made as in any garden or road side plantation. Green belt is erected not from biodiversity conservation point of view but is basically developed as a screen to check the spread of dust pollution. A green belt, 7.5m in width will be developed around the core zone. Green belt plantation will be started with the beginning of the mining and will be completed within five years from the beginning. Following precaution will be taken: • To raise seedlings for plantation in the green belt a nursery will be developed. • Seedlings of only local species, suitable for green belt plantation will be raised in this nursery. • All the representative plant species of the region were found to grow in and around the study site. • Care will be provided against grazing and browsing.



• Timely watering during the initial stages of survival and provision will be made for the allocation of funds as well. • During the running of mine, flora will be regenerated in different stages and the area having matured Afforestation will be properly fenced so as to avoid cutting, browsing and hacking of branches and pruning of trees • Creating awareness among villagers residing on the periphery of the mines regarding the use of plantations. • Plantation of indigenous species, fodder and fruit bearing tree species which can also act as habitats for wild life. • Plantation of fruits bearing trees like Karonda, Zizyphus, Awala, Gular, Timbru, Lasoda, Aam and other Ficus species will attract sloth bear population. • For increasing hare population turfing on the ground on both sides of nallahs by grasses will provide a suitable habitat which is most sought food for hares. 7.7.6 Plantation in the Buffer zone Trees will be planted in the buffer zone also. This plantation will be done at selected places only and only local species will be used in the plantation. Some of the tree species included will be Neem (Azadirachta indica), Kachnar (Bauhinia variegata), Imli (Tamarindus indica), Bel (Aegle marmelos), Ashok (Polyalthia longifolia), Gular (Ficus glomerata), Babool (Acacia nilotica), Mango, (Mangifera indica) etc. Water, particularly during drier seasons, becomes the most important factor to all types of wild animals including the mammals, birds and reptiles. If water is available safely, then all other factors become secondary for the presence and survival of the wild life in any forested area. Places suitable for mini watersheds will be identified in the core as well as in the buffer zone to store rainwater. Further, to make water available at all the times, throughout the year, some of these water holes will be recharged through artificial means. Proper slope will be given to approach these water sources so that the wild animals will be able to drink water without any difficulty. Proper cover through vegetation or any other type of even artificial cover will be developed near to these water sources so that the prey species will be able to hide themselves from the predators, at the time of approaching the water sources. To attract the birds, plants yielding food to the birds will be planted on priority basis. If water and food are available to the birds without any anthropogenic disturbances the area can become an ideal place for bird watching. 7.7.7 FINANCIAL PROJECTION FOR CONSERVATION Rs. 10.00 Lakhs has been allocated towards conservation of scheduled fauna in the area for the implementation of conservation proposal.

Table 7.8: Budget for Conservation/Management Plan S. No. Component/ Intervention Provision (Lakhs)

1. Planting of trees groves in surrounding area 1.20 2. Promotion of agro forest in villages planting fruits trees 1.40 3. Plantation of shelterbelt along and canal side in surrounding village

and maintenance 1.00

4. Construction of water hole in strategic location and inside the nearby protected area and regular filling of water

1.40

5. Development of pastures on the Panchayat land 1.40 6. Awareness generation of labors and local people 1.60 7. Study of impact of mining on wild life and habitation 2.00

TOTAL 10.00 Table 7.9 Financial Projection (yearly)

Year 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Total Provision (Lakh) 1.50 1.50 1.25 1.25 1.00 0.80 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 10.00

Table: 7.10 Year Wise Plan and Budget (Rs.) # Component/Year I II III IV V VI VII VIII IX X 1 Planting of trees

groves in 50,000 50,000 35,000 35,000 25,000 25,000 20,000 25,000 25,000 25,000



surrounding area 2 Promotion of agro

forest in villages planting fruits trees

20,000 20,000 20,000 20,000 15,000 - 10,000 15,000 15,000 -

3 Plantation of shelterbelt along and canal side in surrounding village and maintenance

30,000 30,000 25,000 20,000 15,000 15,000 15,000 10,000 - 15,000

4 Construction of water hole in strategic location and inside the nearby area and regular filling of water

20,000 20,000 15,000 15,000 15,000 15,000 15,000 - 10,000 10,000

5 Plantation of herbs/ shrubs along the river bank

15,000 15,000 15,000 15,000 15,000 15,000 - 10,000 10,000 10,000

6 Awareness generation of labors and local people

15,000 15,000 15,000 20,000 15,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000

TOTAL 1,50,000 1,50,000 1,25,000 1,25,000 1,00,000 80,000 70,000 70,000 70,000 70,000 7.8 SOCIO ECONOMIC IMPACT OF THE PROJECT AND SAFETY MEASURES Socio Economic Impact Assessment (SEIA) refers to systematic analysis of various social and economic characteristics of human being living in a given geographical area during a given period. SEIA is carried out separately but concurrently with Environment Impact Assessment (EIA). It focuses the effect of the project on social and economic well being of the community. 7.8.1 Impact on Demographic Composition The proposed project will hardly make any difference in the demographic composition of the study area as the additional employment it envisages to create will be met locally to the maximum extent. Hence, the chances of migration of people from outside the study area are remote. Accordingly, there will be no variation in the total population of the study area including that of sex ratio, when the mine starts operating. 7.8.2 Employment Opportunities The proposed project will provide employment to the local people. It has been estimated that 98 people will get direct employment in this mining project. It is a positive impact of the project since it is providing employment opportunities to the local people. 7.8.3 Increased Supply of Stone in the Market With the commencement of the proposed mining project the supply of stone will increase and the gap between demand and supply will decrease to some extent, if not fully. 7.8.4 Impact on Agriculture The entire mining area is part of Gair Mumkin Pahar (Govt. Waste land) and the entire land is Government Revenue Land and no agriculture land involved in this mining. It is a non forest land and the proposed activity is to take place. Scientific mining will be adopted in the proposed mining project the area will be free from annual floods, which destroy standing crops, land and property. This is a positive impact of the proposed mining project.



7.8.5 Impact on Road Development Movement of tractor-trolleys and other vehicles to and from the mining site is expected to increase substantially, when mining will start. The existing roads connecting the quarry with the National and State Highways are mostly narrow mud roads. There will be mud slide and traffic bottle neck if these roads are not widened and their conditions are not improved. Hence, there is good scope for road development in the mining area. Further, there are risks of accidents during loading of extracted minerals into tractor-trolleys and transportation to markets for sell. However, accidents can be avoided by taking due care and precautions. 7.8.6 Income to Government The proposed mining activity will benefit the State in the form of royalty, dead rent, fees and earning from taxes. 7.8.7 Impact on Law and Order As most of the workers to be employed in the proposed mining project are local residents no law and order problem is envisaged. It is expected that the workers will attend to their duties from their residence and return to their homes after the day’s work. There would have been law and order problem if the workers were migrants and lived in shanties closed to the mining area. However, to meet any untoward incident one police post may be set up closed to the mining area. 7.8.8 Impact on Health There are no chances of occurring diseases, due to mechanized mining of stone. Stone is non-toxic. However, activities such as drilling, blasting require precautions since it create respiratory problems among mine workers. Excessive inhalation of fugitive dust is a serious health concern. To avoid respiratory problem from stone necessary protection will be taken. 7.9 REHABILITATION AND RESETTLEMENT (R&R) There is no displacement of the population within the project area and adjacent nearby area and the complete lease area is Govt. land. However Social development of village will be considered as per social activities. Provision and maintenance of protective works like drains, parapet walls, retaining walls, check dams, Management of Air and water quality, Management of Waste, top soil, infrastructure and mining machinery disposal, Safety and security. The resources required for management of these operations will be supervision, raw materials (mainly stone available at mines), gates, fencing, transport and Communication. All the above operations will be carried out in three months time. 7.10 ENVIRONMENT SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY The activities to be undertaken for the local people under ESR have been identified and approx. Rs. 33.00 Lakhs per annum towards Environment Social Responsibility. The major activities will be:

Table 7.11: Budget for Environment Social Responsibility S. No. Description Budget (Lakhs)

1. Vocational training on- • Fire and safety, • Health and safety, • Awareness program on cancer and AIDS.

7.00

2. Sanitations and drinking water facility at Village Bakhrija 5.00 3. Sanitations and drinking water facility at Village Islampur 5.00 4. Sanitations and drinking water facility at Village Meghot Halli 5.00 5. Assistance to self help group 5.00 6. Health check up camps 6.00

Total 33.00 It is expected that this will improve the socio-economic status of the people and at the same time the popularity of the project proponent will enhance. The local community in the study area desired that the project proponent should take up the following development initiatives for the betterment of the local people.

a) Health camps in project village b) Distribution of books and stationeries to meritorious students in the study area



c) One time donation to the schools for drinking water facilities d) Training camps for skill development

For each activity the funds to be earmarked by the proponent will be decided after discussion with the local authority and the beneficiaries. It has been planned to undertake a concurrent evaluation of the activities to be taken up under the ESR program.

7.11 SUMMARY The public hearing of stone mining project will include after public consultation. Risk assessments will help mine operators to identify high, medium and low risk levels. This is a requirement of the Occupational Health and Safety Act 2000. Risk assessments will help to priorities the risks and provide information on the need to safely control the risks. In this way, mine owners and operators will be able to implement safety improvements. Mining and allied activities are associated with several potential hazards to both the employees and the public at large. A worker in a mine will be able to work under conditions, which are adequately safe and healthy. At the same time the environmental conditions also will not impair his working efficiency. This is possible only when there is adequate safety in mines. Hence mine safety is one of the most essential aspects of any working mine. This mining project has positive impact on social and economic well being of the community because this project provides employment opportunities to local people and many social welfare works done by project proponent. The ESR budget of Rs. 33.00 Lakhs allocated by Project Proponent. There is no displacement of the population within the project area and adjacent nearby area. However, as per the point Xv of LoI the lease holder will deposit 10% of the annual contract money i.e. Rs. 3.25 Crores per annum approx. to the Mines and Minerals Development, Restoration and Rehabilitation Fund. This amount will be spent by lease holder for environmental protection and mineral conservation in the surrounding area of core and buffer zone. The officers of the State Government Haryana will strictly monitor the compliance of lease holder in this regard.



CHAPTER-8 PROJECT BENEFITS

8.0 GENERAL The execution of the project bring overall improvement in the locality, neighborhood and the State by bringing industry, roads, employment and hence improving living standard and economic growth. 8.1 PHYSICAL BENEFITS The opening of the proposed project will enhance the following physical infrastructure facilities in the adjoining areas:

a. Road Transport: There will be improved road communication due to the proposed project and maintenance will also be done time to time.

b. Market: Generating useful economic resource for construction. Excavated mineral will provide a good market opportunity.

c. Infrastructure: Creation of community assets (infrastructure) like provision for drinking water, construction of school buildings, village roads/ linked roads, dispensary and health centre, community centre, market place etc, as a part of corporate social responsibility.

d. Enhancement of Green Cover: As a part of reclamation plan, plantation will be carried along the road sides or near the civic amenities.

e. Green Belt Development: A suitable combination of trees that can grow fast and also have good leaf cover will be adopted to develop the green belt. It is proposed to plant 1250 no’s per annum of native species along with some fruit bearing and medicinal trees during the mining plan period.

f. Local Employment: This project will enhance the opportunities of employment for the local villagers near the lease area due to which their economic status become better

8.2 SOCIAL INFRASTRUCTURE The mining in the area will create rural employment. It has been observed that conditions of the villages around mining areas are better than that of distant villages. The mining activity in the region will have positive impact on the social economic condition of the area by way of providing employment to the local in-habitants; wages paid to them will increase the per capita income, housing, education, medical and transportation facilities, economic status, health and agriculture. A detailed program for socio economic development of the area has been framed. The salient features of the programme are as follows:

i) Social welfare program like provision of medical facilities educational facilities, water supply for the employees as well as for nearby villagers will be taken.

ii) A well laid plan for employment of the local people has been prepared by giving priority to local people.

iii) Supplementing Govt. efforts in health monitoring camps, social welfare and various awareness programs among the rural population.

iv) Assisting social forestry program. v) Adoption of villages for general development. vi) Supply of water to village nearby villages. vii) Development of facilities within villages like roads, etc.

Environmental and Social Responsibility: A budget of Rs. 33.00 Lakhs per annum towards Environmental and Social Responsibility which can be used for welfare of nearby village and will help in improving the socio-economic status of the residents. Description of Budget for Environmental and Social Responsibility (ESR) is given in chapter 7. 8.3 ECOLOGICAL BENEFITS A green belt will be developed along the roads, barren are am surrounding office, rest shelter and other social forestry program. The area for green belt plantation consists of hilly terrain; hence plantation could be made as in road side plantation. Green belt is erected not from biodiversity conservation point of view but is basically developed as a screen to check the spread of dust pollution. It is proposed to plant 1250 No’s of native species along with some medicinal trees during the plan period and a budget of Rs. 10.00 Lakhs per year for plantation is given in EMP. Green belt plantation will be started with the beginning of the mining and will be completed within five years from the beginning.



8.5 SUMMARY

The management will recruit the semi-skilled and unskilled workers from the nearby villages. The project activity and the management will definitely support the local Panchayat and provide other form of assistance for the development of public amenities in this region. The company management will contribute to the local schools, dispensaries for the welfare of the villagers. A suitable combination of trees that can grow fast and also have good leaf cover will be adopted to develop the green belt. It is proposed to plant 1250 No’s per annum of native species along with medicinal trees during the mining plan period. The project proponent has allocated Rs. 33.00 Lakhs per annum for ESR Activities and Rs. 3.25 Crores per annum approx. to the Mines and Minerals Development, Restoration and Rehabilitation Fund. This amount will be spent by lease holder for the protection of environment in the nearby surrounding area. The officers of the State Government Haryana will strictly monitor the compliance of lease holder in this regard. Other than this social development of village will be considered as per social activities.


Document No. 2016 _ VM_10117_Final EIA Page |169 (Chapter-9)

CHAPTER-9

ENVIRONMENTAL COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS 9.0PROJECT COST

After making exhaustive study, it is considered desirable that the mining project may be implemented. Project cost for the proposed stone is Rs. 22.00 Crore as capital investment.

Table 9.1 Financial Pattern Major Heads Value Production Capacity 75,24,225 Tons Per Annum Production Cost of Mineral Rs 130 Per Ton Sale Value of Mineral Rs 135 Per Ton Profit Rs. 5.0 per Ton Estimated Profit per Annum Rs. 3,76,21,125 /- Per Annum approx

The estimated Profit margin is Rs. 3,76,21,125 /- Per Annum approx

9.1 ENVIRONMENT COST ANALYSIS The Environment cost for this proposed mining includes Environmental Management Plan, Environmental and Social Responsibility, Occupational Health and Safety and Conservation Plan which is likely to come Rs. 94.50 Lakhs per annum. The detailed cost for Environmental Expenses is given in Table 9.2 The profit from this project will be 3,76,21,125- 94,50,000 = 2,81,71,125/-. Table 9.2 Environmental Cost Analysis

S.No. Major Heads Expenses per annum (Lakhs)

1. Environmental Management Plan 40.00 2. Environmental and Social Responsibility 33.00 3. Occupational Health and Safety 20.00 4. Conservation Plan 1.50 5. Total 94.50

From the above table it is clear that the Environment and social cost will be Rs. 9.50 Lakhs per annum whereas the profit to client from this project will be Rs. 3,76,21,125 /- Per Annum approx. Total profit for ten years will be Rs. 37,62,11,250/- Per Annum approx. Hence this stone mining project is financially and technically viable. 9.2SUMMARY It is considered desirable that the mining project may be implemented. Project cost for the proposed Stone along with associated minor mineral of “Bakhrija Plot-4” over an area of 34.64 ha. falling in Village-Bakhrija, Tehsil-Narnaul, District- Mahendergarh (Haryana) is Rs.22.00 Crores. The estimated profit will be 3,76,21,125 /- Per Annum approx whereas cost for Environmental and Social Responsibility is Rs.33.00 Lakhs Per Annum. Therefore, proposed activity is viable financially.



CHAPTER-10

ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN 10.0 INTRODUCTION The mine development in the ML area needs to be intertwined with judicious utilization of natural resources within the limits of permissible assimilative capacity. The assimilative capacity of the study area is the maximum amount of pollution load that can be discharged in the environment without affecting the designated use and is governed by dilution, dispersion and removal due to natural physicochemical and biological processes.

The environmental management must be integrated into the process of mine planning so that ecological balance of the area is maintained and adverse affects are minimized. An Environmental Management Plan (EMP) is a site specific plan developed to ensure that the project is implemented in an environmentally sustainable manner. An effective EMP ensures the application of best practice environment management to a project. The purpose of an EMP is to:

i. Assists proponent in the preparation of an effective and user friendly EMP. ii. Improve the contribution that an EMP can make to the effectiveness of the environmental

management process. iii. Ensure a minimum standard and consistent approach to the preparation of EMP’s. iv. Ensure that the commitments made as part of the project’s EIA are implemented throughout the

project life. v. Ensure that environment management details is captured and documented at all stages of a project.

The design of EMP for operational phase has been aimed to achieve the following objectives: i. To ensure adoption of state of art technological environmental control measures and implementing

them satisfactorily. ii. Effectiveness of mitigatory measures in mitigation of impacts.

iii. Description of monitoring program of the surrounding environment. iv. Institution arrangements to monitor effectively and take suitable corrective steps for

implementation of proper EMP. v. An Environmental Management Cell (EMC) should be set up to take care of all environment

aspects and to maintain environmental quality in the project area. The detailed hierarchy and responsibilities of Environment Management Cell is discussed in Chapter-6.

Figure 10.1: Flow Chart of EMP

10.1 LAND USE PATTERN Deviation from planned mining procedure can lead to soil erosion/cutting and thereby degradation of land, causing loss of properties and degradation surrounding of landscape. Thus for environmental friendly major mining the following control/abatement measures will be followed:

i. Mineral will be mined out in from the proposed lease area and sufficient safety barrier should be taken during mining.

ii. Land use plan of mine lease area should be prepared to encompass pre-operational, operational and post operation phases and submitted.



10.2 AIR ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT Mitigative measures suggested for air emission control will be based on the baseline ambient air quality monitoring data. From the point of view of maintenance of an acceptable ambient air quality in the region, it is desirable that the air quality needs to be monitored on a regular basis to check it vis-à-vis the NAAQS prescribed by MoEF&CC and in cases of non-compliance, appropriate mitigative measures will be adopted. In order to minimize impacts of mining on air and to maintain it within the prescribed limits of CPCB/ SPCB, an Environmental Management Plan (EMP) has been prepared. This will help in resolving all environmental and ecological issues likely to cause due to mining in the area. During the course of mining no toxic substances are released into the atmosphere as such there seems to be no potential threat to health of human beings. In the mining activities, the source of gaseous emissions is engines of vehicles, Operation of mining machinery/ loading operations, drilling and blasting. The reasons may be quality of fuel, improper operation of the engine, etc; proper maintenance of engines will improve combustion process and brings reduction in pollution. 10.2.1 Control of Gaseous Pollution In mining activities, the only source of gaseous emissions is from blasting and the engines of Heavy earth moving machines (HEMM). Blasting of explosive results in increase of nitrogen oxides, which is dispersed by the wind. Controlled blasting and optimization of use of explosive energy will help in reducing the above emissions. The emissions from the diesel engines of the machinery can be controlled by proper maintenance and monitoring of machines. . 10.2.2 Control of Dust Pollution The main pollutant in air is PM10, which is generated due to various mining activities. However to reduce the impact of dust pollution the following steps have been taken during various mining activities. a) During drilling operations

i. Sharp drill bits will be used for drilling and regrinding is done periodically to reduce generation of dust.

ii. The drill machines will be kept leakage free and equipped with wet drilling arrangements.

iii. Drill operator and his helper will be equipped with personal protective equipment (ear plugs/ear muffs).

b) During blasting operation All essential steps will be taken to prevent any person entering in the mine site during blasting operations. The drill holes will be charged by certified blaster and in supervision of Mining Engineer/ Mines Manager. The holes will be blasted by certified blaster. Before blasting the warning siren will be blown and men and machinery will be taken out from the safety zone. During blasting all the statutory requirements as per MMR- 1961 will be strictly followed. i. The use of ‘water ampoules’ will be done to arrest dust.

ii. Blasting will be done in controlled manner with the use of latest technology like use of millisecond delay detonators, cord relay to control and prevent the dust to get air borne and to limit the fly rocks within 50–60 m.

iii. Overcharging of blast holes will be avoided. iv. Rock Breakers will be used to avoid secondary blasting. v. With the good blasting system, dozing of broken rocks will be less and hence dust due to dozing

will be less. vi. Competent persons carry out blasting and all the precautions lay under MMR, 1961 Act are

followed. Time to time scientific studies regarding ground vibration, noise level, flying rocks and other blasting hazards will be conducted through experts of the subjects.

c) During loading operation i) Latest loading equipment like hydraulic excavators will be used with dumpers. This reduces the

number of buckets to fill from height and thus have comparatively less dust generation. The propagation of this dust is confined to loading point only and does not affect any person both the operators of excavator and dumpers who will sit in closed chamber and will be equipped with dust mask.

ii) Skilled operators will operate excavators.

iii) Avoid overloading of dumpers and consequent spillage on the roads.



iv) The operator’s cabin in the drills, dumpers will be provided with dust free enclosure and persons working at high dust prone areas will be provided with dust mask.

d) During Transport operation i) All the haulage roads including the main ramp be kept wide, leveled, compacted and properly

maintained and watered regularly during the shift operation to prevent generation of dust due to movement of dumpers, and other vehicles.

ii) Mineral carrying trucks will be effectively covered by Tarpaulin to avoid escape of fines to atmosphere.

iii) Regular Compaction and grading of haul roads to clear accumulation of loose material.

iv) Air quality will be regularly monitored both in the core zone and the buffer zone. c) Plantation work carried out

In order to reduce air pollution in the surroundings, green belt will be developed around mines office, mine approach road. The plantation will be done around the lease boundary.

d) Monitoring of air pollution Periodic air quality survey will be carried out to monitor the changes consequent upon mining activities

as per the norms of Haryana State Pollution Control Board.

10.3 NOISE AND VIBRATION ENVIRONMENT The ambient noise level monitoring carried out in and around the proposed mine lease area shows that ambient noise levels are well within the stipulated limits of MoEF&CC.

There is drilling and blasting for mineral extraction. Noise pollution due to drilling, blasting & transportation will cause some problem to the inhabitants of this area because there is human settlement in close proximity to the link roads in lease area. Effective steps will be taken to keep the noise level well below the DGMS prescribed limit of 85 dBA. 10.3.1 Noise Abatement and Control

i. All the machineries including transport vehicles will be properly maintained to minimize generation of noise.

ii. Silencers in the machineries will be provided to reduce generation of noise. iii. Drilling with sharp edges bits will minimize generation of noise. iv. Control blasting will be done with proper charge of explosive to minimize noise during blasting. v. Attenuation between source and receive points will be incased.

vi. Dense plantation in mining area will also reduce propagation of noise outside the core zone. vii. Optimal blast hole geometry charge will be reused.

viii. Rock breakers will be used instead of secondary blasting. ix. Blasting will be avoided under unfavorable atmospheric conditions x. Periodical monitoring of noise will be done to adopt corrective actions wherever needed.

xi. Plantation will be taken up along the approach roads. The plantation minimizes propagation of noise and also arrests dust.

10.3.2 Vibration Abatement The blasting operations in the proposed mine will be carried out by deep hole drilling and blasting using delay detonators, which reduce the ground vibrations. Further, the ground vibrations will be controlled by using shock tubes with nonelectric delay detonators. The measures that are generally followed and currently proposed for abatement of ground vibration, air blast and fly rocks are detailed below.

i. Blasting will be performed strictly as per the guidelines specified under MMR, 1961; ii. Proper design of blast with correct spacing, burden and optimum charge/delay;

iii. Supervision of drilling and blasting operations to ensure blast design geometry as per planning; iv. Sub-drilling will be kept adequate to eliminate toe formation; v. Blasting operations will be carried out only during day time as per DGMS guidelines;

vi. Proper warning signals will be used; vii. Adequate safe distance from habitation as per standards from centre of blasting will be

maintained; viii. Drilling parameters like burden, depth, diameter and spacing will be properly designed to ensure

proper blast; ix. Effective stemming of the explosives will be done in the drill holes.



10.4 WATER MANAGEMENT There will be no wastewater generation from the mining operations. Only wastewater generation will be sanitary wastewater, which will be treated in septic tank followed by subsurface dispersion. 10.4.1 Surface Water Management

i. As such no surface water body exists within the lease area, no adverse impacts are envisaged on the same.

ii. Proper mitigative measures will be taken up to control the pollutants within prescribed standards and limiting the emissions to site only.

iii. Garland drains will be provided to prevent the entry of rainwater into the mining pit. 10.4.2 Ground Water Management

i. Mining will not intersect the ground water table of the area. So it will not disturb water environment.

ii. Natural pits will be used for rainwater conservation and harvesting. iii. Rain water harvesting practices shall be done which will lead to ground water recharge. iv. At the end of the life of mine artificial water reservoir has been proposed in mining plan

10.4.3 Waste Water Management No waste water is generated from the mining activity of minor minerals as the project only involves lifting/excavation of Stone and transportation directly to the consumers. 10.4.4 Water Conservation The project do not consume any process water except for drinking, dust suppression and plantation. Plantation is proposed, which will increase the water holding capacity and help in recharging of ground water. No artificial rainwater harvesting is proposed for the present project.

10.5 SOLID WASTE AND TOP SOIL MANAGEMENT Waste Management As stated in mining method, there will be no OB/ waste generation and there will not be any OB/ waste dumps. Top Soil Management Top soil of 0.15m depth mixed with scree is present in the lease area which will be removed before mining activity and stacked separately in boundary barrier .Total volume of top soil removed will be 41580 m3 and this will acquire an area of 2.079 Ha. In statutory barrier having 2.0 m depth it will be used for plantation within the year of commencement of mining activity.

10.6 GREEN BELT DEVELOPMENT The proposed green belt in the lease area is to be developed taking into consideration the availability of area as the efficiency of green belt in pollution control mainly depends on tree species, its width, distance from pollution sources, side of the habitat from working place and tree height. The proposed green belt has been designed to control PM10, gaseous pollutants, noise, surface run off and soil erosion etc. While considering the above aspects due care will be taken for selecting the suitable characteristics plant species such as fast growing, locally suitable plant species, resistant to specific pollutant and those which would maintain the regional ecological balance, soil and hydrological conditions.

10.6.1 Plantation Program Under the afforestation plan, plantation in nearby villages and connecting roads will be undertaken. The implementation for development of greenbelt will be of paramount importance as it will not only add up as an aesthetic feature but will also act as a pollution sink. The species to be grown in the areas should be dust tolerant and fast growing species so that a permanent greenbelt is created. Plantation in the barrier zone and roads is necessary as these areas will contain fine particulates resulting from mining operation and vehicle movement Plantation will also be carried out as social forestry programme in village, school and the areas allocated by the Panchayat/State authorities. Native plants like Neem, Peepal, Khejri and other local species will be planted. A suitable combination of trees that can grow fast and also have good leaf cover shall be adopted to develop the greenbelt. It is proposed to plant 1250 No’s of native species along with some fruit bearing and medicinal trees per year during the plan period. The greenbelt development programme is given in Table 10.1 and table 10.2. No artificial rainwater harvesting is proposed for the present project. Objective of Plan: The main purpose of this plan is to develop greenbelt and landscape at project site so that following specific purpose is met with after completion of the project:

a. General pollution abatement.



b. Air pollution attenuation. c. Dust absorption.

As envisaged in the National Forest Policy 1988 that one third of the total area should be under green cover to maintain ecological balance in the country. It is very difficult target to attain agricultural state like Haryana but their enormous scope for attaining this target under the developmental projects where the project is designed as fresh and there is change of land use from agriculture primarily to other uses. Therefore, to attain the target as envisaged under State Forest Policy and National Forest Policy, the provision of green belts/avenue plantations is made under developmental projects. The species proposed should be long rotation, ornamental, evergreen, hardy, wind firm. The species proposed should be long rotation, ornamental, evergreen, hardy, wind firm. The species suitable for urban areas should have capacity to combat pollution. The project will be implemented on an area of 34.64 Ha (3,46,400 m2). The detail of the areas proposed under various components is given below:

1. Plantation along the Lease Boundary = 7.5*3333.70288=25002.7716 m2 2. Plantation in the Mine Premises= 318781.7351m2 3. Plantation along the Haul Road starting from core area to mettled road= 3*3639.993= 10919.98m2 4. Plantation at suitable location from Second Year to Fifth Year along the worked out |mine

benches, such that, it does not affect working of mine. Total plantation area = 354704.4867 m2

Total no. of plants to be planted: 6250 Nos. A green belt will be developed along the boundary of the mining lease area. The area for green belt plantation consists of undisturbed soil; hence plantation could be made as in any garden or road side plantation. Green belt is erected not from biodiversity conservation point of view but is basically developed as a screen to check the spread of dust pollution. A green belt, 7.5m in width will be developed around the core zone. Green belt plantation will be started with the beginning of the mining and will be completed within five years from the beginning. Following precaution will be taken: • To raise seedlings for plantation in the green belt a nursery will be developed. • Seedlings of only local species, suitable for green belt plantation will be raised in this nursery. • All the representative plant species of the region were found to grow in and around the study site. • Care will be provided against grazing and browsing. • Timely watering during the initial stages of survival and provision will be made for the allocation of funds as well. • During the running of mine, flora will be regenerated in different stages and the area having matured Afforestation will be properly fenced so as to avoid cutting, browsing and hacking of branches and pruning of trees • Creating awareness among villagers residing on the periphery of the mines regarding the use of plantations. • Plantation of indigenous species, fodder and fruit bearing tree species which can also act as habitats for wild life. • Plantation of fruits bearing trees like Karonda, Zizyphus, Awala, Gular, Timbru, Lasoda, Aam and other Ficus species will attract sloth bear population. • For increasing hare population turfing on the ground on both sides of nallahs by grasses will provide a suitable habitat which is most sought food for hares. Plantation in Buffer zone Trees will be planted in the buffer zone also. This plantation will be done at selected places only and only local species will be used in the plantation. Some of the tree species included will be Saja (Terminalia tomentosa), Baheda (Terminalia bellerica), Bija (Pterocarpus masupium), Bargad (Ficus benghalensis), Peepal (Ficus religiosa), Mahua (Madhuca latifolia), Sal (Shorea robusta), Ficus recimosa, Pongamia glabra etc. Care will be taken to include some fruit bearing trees like Gular (Ficus glomerata), Aonla (Emblica officinalis), Aam (Mangifera indica) and such trees to provide food to the herbivores which in turn will be the food source of the carnivores. Water, particularly during drier seasons, becomes the most important factor to all types of wild animals including the mammals, birds and reptiles. If water is available safely, then all other factors become secondary for the presence and survival of the wild life in any forested area. Places suitable for mini watersheds will be identified in the core as well as in the buffer zone to store



rainwater. Further, to make water available at all the times, throughout the year, some of these water holes will be recharged through artificial means. Proper slope will be given to approach these water sources so that the wild animals will be able to drink water without any difficulty. Proper cover through vegetation or any other type of even artificial cover will be developed near to these water sources so that the prey species will be able to hide themselves from the predators, at the time of approaching the water sources. To attract the birds, plants yielding food to the birds will be planted on priority basis. If water and food are available to the birds without any anthropogenic disturbances the area can become an ideal place for bird watching.

Table 10.1: Plan for Afforestation Year Target of Plantation Assumed Survival Species Place of Plantation

I 1250 875 Neem, Peepal, Ber, Shisham, Sirish, Babool, Gulmohar, etc and as per DFO Mahendergarh.

Along the roads, in barren area, surrounding office & rest shelter and other social forestry program.

II 1250 875 III 1250 875 IV 1250 875 V 1250 875

Table 10.2: List of Species for Greenbelt Development Scientific Name Common Name Type Effective in Control of

Pollution Azadirachta indica Neem Tree Dust, Air Pollution, Noise

Pollution Tamarindus indica Imli Tree Air Pollution

Zizyphus mauritiana Ber Tree Air Pollution Aegle marmelos Bel Tree Air Pollution, Noise

Pollution Polyalthis longifolia Ashok Tree Dust, Air Pollution,

Ficus glomerata Guler Tree Dust, Air Pollution, Noise Pollution

Source: Guidelines for Greenbelt Development, CPCB, March, 2000

Figure 10.2: Restoration/Reclamation/Rehabilitation Plan from Second year to Fifth Year



Figure 10.3 Plantation Map (Periphery and Haul Road)

10.7 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT 10.7.1 Management Plan for Socio-Economic Environment

i. In general, socio-economic environment will have positive impact due to the mining project in the area.

ii. The deployed laborers will be from nearby villages only as these people are mainly dependent upon such mining activities.

iii. In order to further improve the socio-economic conditions of the area, the management will contribute for development works in consultation with local bodies.

The lessee has already allocated Rs. 33.00 Lakh (As per demand) for Socio-Economic Measures. 10.8 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY Occupational Health and Safety professionals develop and coordinate safety and health systems and strategies within organizations. They identify workplace hazards, assess risks to employee health and safety, and recommend solutions. Increasingly, Health and Safety Professionals are also responsible for many of the environmental aspects of their workplace. As this profession matures there is an increased emphasis on risk management strategy and on the development of workplace culture. Occupational Health and Safety professionals in the minerals industry may perform the following tasks:

i. The collection of minor minerals from the Stone mine does not cause any occupational ill effects. ii. Except dust generation there is no source which can show a probability for health related diseases

and proper dust suppression will control dust generation and dispersion. iii. Dust masks will be provided to the workers working in the dust prone areas as additional personal

protective equipment. iv. The occupational health hazards have so far not been reported. v. Awareness program will be conducted about likely occupational health hazards so as to have

preventive action in place. vi. Any workers health related problem will be properly addressed.

vii. Periodical medical checkup will be conducted. viii. Promote occupational health and safety within their organization and develop safer and healthier

ways of working;



ix. Help supervise the investigation of accidents and unsafe working conditions, study possible causes and recommend remedial action;

x. Develop and implement training sessions for management, supervisors and workers on health and safety practices and legislation;

xi. Coordinate emergency procedures, mine rescues, fire fighting and first aid crews; xii. Communicate frequently with management to report on the status of the health and safety strategy

and risk management strategy, and Develop occupational health and safety strategies and systems, including policies, procedures and manuals.

Table 10.3: Budget for Occupational Health and Safety of the workers (Lakhs) S.No. Items Capital Cost

(Lakhs) 1. Measures to Prevent Accidents during Sand Loading 3.00 2. Measures to Prevent Accidents during minerals Transportation. 3.50 3. Measures to Prevent Accidents due to Trucks/ Dumpers etc. 3.00 4. Measures to Prevent Dangerous Incidents during Inundation/Flooding. 3.00 5. Education awareness and first aid kit 3.00 6. Medical Examination Schedule 4.50

Total 20.00 10.9 COST OF EMP MEASURES Following provisions are proposed to be taken for improving, control and monitoring of environment protection measures.

Table 10.4: Budget for EMP S. No. Particulars Capital Cost

(in Lakh) 1. Pollution monitoring – Air, Water, Noise and Soil 6.00 2. Dust Suppression 8.00 4. Plantation including maintenance 10.00 5. Rainwater harvesting 5.00 6. Haul road and other roads repair and maintenance 8.00 7. Boundary Demarcation 3.00

Total = 40.00 Lakhs 40.00

10.10 REHABILITATION AND RESETTLEMENT (R &R) There is no displacement of the population within the project area and adjacent nearby area and the allotted area is Govt. waste land (Gair Mumkin Pahar). However, as per the point xv of LoI the lease holder will deposit 10% of the annual contract money i.e. Rs. 3.25 Crores per annum to the Mines and Minerals Development, Restoration and Rehabilitation Fund. This amount will be spent by lease holder for the protection of environment in the nearby surrounding area. The officers of the State Government Haryana will strictly monitor the compliance of lease holder in this regard.

10.11 SUMMARY As per above discussion there is no measure impact on the environment due to mining except fugitive emission in the form of dust generated during handling and loading of mineral. The adequate preventive measures will be adopted to contain the various pollutants within permissible limits. Plantation development will be carried out in the mine premises, along the approach roads, around Govt. buildings, schools approx 1250 trees per year. It will prove an effective pollution mitigate technique, and help avoid soil erosion during monsoon season. Employment opportunities will be provided to the locals only as providing extraction of minerals from the mine site is the only prevailing occupation for them for their livelihood. A budget of Rs.33.00 Lakhs per annum for Environment Social Responsibility, budget of Rs. 20.00 Lakhs per annum for Occupational Health and Safety and budget of Rs. 40.00 Lakhs per annum for EMP are incurred by Project Proponent. The lease holder will also deposit 10% of the annual contract money i.e. Rs 3.25 Crores per annum approx. to the Mines and Minerals Development, Restoration and Rehabilitation Fund.



CHAPTER-11

SUMMARY & CONCLUSION 11.0 GENERAL The chapter discuses about the summary of whole EIA/EMP report along with recommendation and conclusion. The proposed mining lease area falls in Survey of India Toposheet (OSM) No. 45M/13, 54A/1, H43/W4. The lease area is located near Village- Bakhrija, Tehsil- Narnaul, District- Mahendergarh, Haryana. The mine lease coordinates are listed below:

Table No. 11.1 Details of the Project A Lease Area Details Lease Area 34.64 Ha.

Type of Land Govt. waste Land (Gair Mumkin Pahar) Topography Flat terrain with some undulations, generally stopping and rocky Site Elevation Range 308 m AMSL to 290m AMSL

B Production Details Proposed production 75,24,225 TPA Mineable reserves 6,93,30,254 MT C Cost Details Cost of the project Rs. 22.00 Crores

Cost for EMP Rs. 40.00 Lakhs Per Year Cost of ESR Rs. 33.00 Lakhs Per Year Cost of OH&S Rs. 15.00 Lakhs Per Year Cost of Conservation Rs. 10.00 Lakhs D Details of Environmental Setting

Ecological Sensitive Areas (National Park, Wild Life Sanctuary, Biosphere Reserve, Reserve/ Protected Forest etc.) within 10 Km radius

No Ecological Sensitive Area, National Park, Wildlife Sanctuary, Biosphere reserve are present in the 10 Km radius of the study area. Only protected forest present within the 10 Km of the project area.

1. Panchnota Protected Forest, 5.2 Km in SW, 2. Minaka Nangal PF, 8.4 Km in S. 3. Balupura PF, 8.1Km in NW

Archaeological Important Place


CRZ areas within 10 Km radius


Nearest Town Narnaul – 17.7 Km in NE Nearest major city with 200000 population

Mahendergarh- 40.8 Km in NE

Nearest Railway Station Nizampur Railway station – 7.0 Km in NW direction Nearest National Highway NH -8, 21.3 Km in East, SH-17, 7.7 Km in NW Nearest Airport Jaipur International Airport, Jaipur – 122.2 Km in SW

Seismic Zone Zone III 11.1 INTRODUCTION As per EIA Notification dated 14th September, 2006 and MoEF&CC Notification dated 15.01.2016 this project falls under Category “B1”, 1(a), as this mining lease area is exceeding more than 25 hectates and less than 50 hectares. The project involves extraction of Stone along with associated minor mineral of Bakhrija Plot-4 at Village- Bakhrija, Tehsil- Narnaul, District- Mahendergarh Haryana. The Letter of Intent (LoI) (dated 21.10.2015) has been issued by Department of Mines & Geology, Haryana in favor of M/s. Gradient Business Consulting Pvt. Ltd. The validity period of the contract is 10 years. The project involves total area of 34.64 ha in Village- Bakhrija, Tehsil- Narnaul, District- Mahendergarh, Haryana.



11.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION The proposed project is for mining of Stone along with associated minor mineral of “Bakhrija Plot-4” by open cast mechanized method over an area of 34.64 Ha. by M/s. Gradient Business Consulting Pvt. Ltd in Village-bakhrija, Tehsil- Narnaul and Distt-Mahendergarh, Haryana with proposed production capacity of 75,24,225 TPA of Stone (Minor Mineral). The climate of the district is characterized by the dryness of the air with an intensely hot summer and a cold winter. The normal annual rainfall of the district, based on the record is 420 mm. The project site falls under seismic zone III which is a moderate damage risk zone (MSK VII). Many part of the state of Haryana are prone to flooding. The total geological reserve is 7,55,30,043 MT and total mineable reserve is 6,93,30,254 MT. The depth of pit up to 92meter (198 m amsl) at the end of 5th year and general water table in the lease area is at 100m bgl below ground level. Mineral Stone will be transported by trucks. It is widely used in construction, buildings, bridges and other infrastructure. Total water requirement for the project is 40 KLD. Total man power requirement for the project is 121. The site facilities like canteen, rest-shelter, first aid facility, water and electricity supply etc. will be provided as per requirement. There is no litigation pending against this project. 11.3 ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES The proposed Minor Mineral Mining Project of Stone along with associated Minor Mineral is a site specific mining project; therefore no alternate site has been selected.

11.4 DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT Environmental data has been collected in relation to proposed mining for Air, Noise, Water, Soil, Ecology and Biodiversity. The generation of primary data as well as collection of secondary data and information from the site and surroundings was carried out during winter season i.e. 1st December, 2015 to 29th February 2016 .The EIA study is being done for the Mine Lease (core zone) and area within 10 Km distance from mine lease boundary (buffer zone), both of which together comprise the study area. The mine lease area consists of slightly undulating with westward slope. The highest point in the lease area is recorded to be 308m RL and the lowest point recorded is 290m RL. The project site falls under seismic zone III which is a moderate damage risk zone (MSK VII). Many part of the state of Haryana are prone to flooding. In flood manual of Haryana, there are 102 vulnerable points in Haryana which need special attention during monsoon. Meteorological station was set-up at site to record surface meteorological parameter during study period.

Table 11.2: Baseline Environment Status Parameters Baseline Status

Ambient Air Quality (1st October 2015 to 31st December 2015)

PM 10 – 44.0 µg/m3 and 81.0 µg/m3 PM 2.5 – 15.0 µg/m3 and 33.0 µg/m3 SO2 – 5.0 µg/m3 and 11.8 µg/m3 NO2 – 11.0 µg/m3 and 32.0 µg/m3

Noise Level Noise Level During Day Time – 46.00 Leq dB and 50.4 Leq dB Noise Level During Night Time – 35.1 Leq dB and 40.7 Leq dB

Water Quality Ground Water: pH (7.48 to 8.03), TDS (.00 to 589.00 mg/L), Total Hardness (192.00 to 264.00mg/L) Fluoride varies from 50 to 79 mg/L Chloride varies from 1.97 to 12.10 mg/L EC varies from 634 to 906 µmhos/cm are found within the permissible limits. Surface Water: pH (6.97 to 7.41), TDS (215.00 to 265.00 mg/L), Total Hardness (148.00 to 168.00 mg/L) EC varies from 327 to 405 µmhos/cm Fluoride varies from <0.01 to <0.001 mg/L Chloride varies from 18.00 to 27.00 mg/L COD varies from 64 to 80 mg/L BOD varies from 21 to 26mg/L are found within the permissible limits.



Soil Quality pH – 6.67 to 7.87, Texture – Silty Loam. Organic Matter – 1.1 % to 1.81 %. Nitrogen- 14.2 kg/hec to 17.8 mg/100gm Phosphorus-0.62 kg/hec to 0.98 mg/100gm Potassium-5.8 kg/hec to 7.6 mg/100gm

Ecology And Biodiversity There is no wildlife sanctuary/biosphere reserve/national parks present within 10 Km radius of the study area. 1 species of schedule-I and 1 species of Schedule-II were observed during study. Subsequently, a budget of Rs 10.00 Lakhs has been earmarked for conservation of wildlife.

The baseline study was conducted for the evaluation of the floral and faunal biodiversity of the terrestrial environment of the study area (10 Km radius from the lease mine area) and it comprises of total 56 villages and its nearby area of Tehsil Narnaul and Kotputali. The primary objective of survey was to describe the floral and faunal communities within the study area. The sampling plots for floral inventory were selected randomly in the suitable habitats. The ecological survey has been conducted for one season. The dominant trees in the study area are Azadirachta indica (Neem), Khejari (Prosopis cineraria), Babool (Acacia nilotica), Mangifera indica (Aam). Total 18 species of trees belong to 10 families and 13 shrub species belong to 13 families are enumerated from the study area. The most of the undergrowth was dried up, except near water logged regions and along the periphery of the village ponds. Total 8 herbaceous species belongs to 7 family (agricultural crops not included) were recorded from the study area. Major crops in the study area are Mustard (Brassica campestris var.) and Wheat (Triticum aestivum). The other corps were grown Maize (Zea mays), and Bajra (Pennisetum glaucum. Among the enumerated flora in the study area, none of them were assigned any threat category by Red data book of Indian Plants. No any reserve or protected forest was observed in the study area.In case of avifauna, the most commonly spotted bird species of this area were; Cattle Egret, Intermediate Egret, Red-wattled Lapwing, Rock Pigeon, Eurasian Collared-Dove, Chestnut-headed Bee-eater, Bank Myna and Common Myna. Francolin and Quail are very common to this place and people used to hunt them for eating. The Indian Peafowl was observed which is listed as schedule –I as per IWPA, 1972 and others listed as schedule IV as per IWPA, 1972. In amphibian group, the toads were sighted during the study period. The reptile, Common Garden Lizard, House Gecko and Fan-Throated Lizard, were observed in the region. Common Mongoose (Herpestes edwardsii) and Jackal (Canis aureus) were observed which are protected under schedule II and Nilgai (Boselaphus tragocamelus) is Schedule-II animal as per Wildlife Protection Act 1972. None of the sighted animal species can be assigned endemic species category of the study area. The implementation of this mining project will generate both direct and indirect employment. Mahendergarh district in which the mine contract area falls is an agriculturally based district. All the basic facilities like road and rail network, medical facilities, post and telegraph, market, drinking water facilities and education facilities are available. The project will also provide impetus to industrialization of the area and mining would be boon for the district as it will not only result in employment opportunity but also infrastructure development and overall growth of the area. At present agriculture is the main occupation of the people as more than half of the population depends on it. With the implementation of the proposed mining project the occupational pattern of the people in the area will change making more people. It was found that most of the parameters were within the limits as per the Indian Standards. In general, there is no major threat to the quality of these parameters. Similarly, the study for the biotic factors was conducted. Hence it can be concluded that the present environment status of the study area is good enough for the project activity. Adoption of adequate pollution control measures will protect the surrounding environment.

11.5 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES The proposed mining operations are not anticipated to raise the concentration of the pollutants beyond prescribed limits. However, the measures are suggested to mitigate any harmful impacts of pollutants like plantation of trees along haul roads, specially near settlements, to help to reduce the impact of dust on the nearby villages; planning transportation routes of mined material so as to reach the nearest paved roads by shortest route; regular water sprinkling on unpaved roads to avoid dust generation during drilling, blasting and transportation etc. Some of impacts may be due to increase in the PCU/hr which is 627 PCU/hr. Transportation of stone should be minimized in the morning and evening and cannot be done in night. Access roads will not encroach into the riparian zones. Fugitive emission from drilling, blasting and vehicle movement will form a layer in leaves thus reducing the gaseous exchange process. The impact on the



present noise levels due to mining operations will be restricted to the work zone areas only. The impact on the ambient noise levels will not be felt at the settlement areas due to masking effect with the existing noise levels. There is drilling and blasting envisaged in the stone mining so there is a impact of vibration due to this project. Hence, the noise levels and vibration impact due to the proposed mining operations will be restricted to the work zone areas only. The soil removed from mining area will be stacked separately. There will be no impact on water environment due to mining since there is no intersection of water table due to mining activity. There will be no waste water generation from the proposed mining activity except sanitary waste water generation that will be treated in septic tanks and will be used for plantation purpose. The mine worker will generate municipal solid waste of about 30.25 Kg per day which will have adverse impact on human health. There will be 4 Nos. of garbage provided for domestic waste collection. There is no overburden generate due to mining activity. The mining activities will be done in a systematic manner by maintaining the road infrastructure and vehicle transport which will be protective measure for preserving the topography and drainage in the area. The ownership will not be changed as the land has been taken on contract which will be returned as it is after the contract period is over. No human settlement should be permitted in the lease mining or nearby area. No mining will be carried out during the rainy season to minimize impact on aquatic life. There are 1 species of Schedule I and 3 species of Schedule II are observed during study period hence, for the same conservation plan was prepared and will be duly submitted to Chief Conservator, Forest, Panchkula, Haryana. Subsequently, a budget of Rs. 10.00 Lakhs has allotted for the conservation of wildlife species. The mining of stone is likely to increase the per capita income of local people by which the socio-economic status of the people will be improved. The local people have been provided with either direct employments or indirect employment such as business, contract works and development work like roads, etc. and other welfare amenities such as medical facilities, conveyance, free education, drinking water supply etc. Except dust generation, there is no source which can show a probability for health related diseases. Regular water sprinkling will be done with sprinkle mounted tankers and dust masks will be provided to the workers. All workers will be subjected to medical examination as per Mines Rule 1955 both at time of appointment and at least once in a year. Medical camps will be organized for this activity. Insurance of all employees as per the rules will also be carried out. R&R issues are not involved with this project. As per the point xv of LoI, the lease holder will deposit 10% of the annual contract money i.e. approx. Rs. 3.25 Crores Per Year to the Mines and Minerals Development, Restoration and Rehabilitation Fund. The lease holder is bound to expend this fund every year for Restoration and Rehabilitation at the project site and surrounding area and this amount also used for the protection of environment, mineral conservation in the surrounding area of core and buffer zone.

11.6 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM The environmental quality within the stipulated standards, regular monitoring of various environmental components is necessary which will complied as per conditions. For this the lessee M/s Gradient Business Consulting Pvt. Ltd., has taken decision to formulate an Environment Policy of the mine and constitute an Environmental Management Cell and committed to operate the proposed mine with the objectives mentioned in approved Environment Policy. EMP may also require measurement of ambient environmental quality in the vicinity of a sit using ecological/biological, physical and chemical indicators. Monitoring may include socio-economic interaction, through local liaison activities or even assessment of complaints. Regular Monitoring of all the environmental parameters viz., air, water, noise and soil as per the formulated program based on CPCB and MoEF&CC guidelines will be carried out every year. The location of the monitoring stations was selected on the basis of prevailing micro meteorological conditions of the area like; wind direction and wind speed, relative humidity, temperature. A budget for monitoring of Air, water, Noise and Soil will be Rs. 4.00 Lakhs as capital cost and Rs. 2.00 Lakhs as recurring cost to be incurred by the project proponent for undertaking pollution prevention measures during the mining activity.

11.7 ADDITOINAL STUDIES The public hearing of stone mining project will include after public consultation. Risk assessments will help mine operators to identify high, medium and low risk levels. This is a requirement of the Occupational Health and Safety Act 2000. Risk assessments will help to priorities the risks and provide information on the need to safely control the risks. In this way, mine owners and operators will be able to implement safety improvements. Mining and allied activities are associated with several potential hazards to both the employees and the public at large. A worker in a mine will be able to work under conditions, which are adequately safe and healthy. At the same time the environmental conditions also will not impair his working efficiency. This is possible only when there is adequate safety in mines. Hence mine safety is one of the



most essential aspects of any working mine. This mining project has positive impact on social and economic well being of the community because this project provides employment opportunities to local people and many social welfare works done by project proponent. The ESR budget of Rs. 33.00 Lakhs Per Year allocated by Project Proponent. There is no displacement of the population within the project area and adjacent nearby area. However, as per the point xv of LoI the lease holder will deposit 10% of the annual contract money i.e. Rs. 3.25 Crores Per Year approx. to the Mines and Minerals Development, Restoration and Rehabilitation Fund. This amount will be spent by lease holder for environmental protection and mineral conservation in the surrounding area of core and buffer zone. The officers of the State Government Haryana will strictly monitor the compliance of lease holder in this regard.

11.8 PROJECT BENEFIT

The management will recruit the semi-skilled and unskilled workers from the nearby villages. The project activity and the management will definitely support the local Panchayat and provide other form of assistance for the development of public amenities in this region. The company management will contribute to the local schools, dispensaries for the welfare of the villagers. A suitable combination of trees that can grow fast and also have good leaf cover will be adopted to develop the green belt. It is proposed to plant 1250no’s per annum no’s of native species along with medicinal trees during the mining plan period. The project proponent has allocated Rs. 33.00 Lakhs per annum for CSR Activities and Rs. 3.25 Crores Per Year approx. to the Mines and Minerals Development, Restoration and Rehabilitation Fund. This amount will be spent by lease holder for the protection of environment in the nearby surrounding area. The officers of the State Government Haryana will strictly monitor the compliance of lease holder in this regard. Other than this social development of village will be considered as per social activities.

11.9 ENVIRONMENTAL COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS

It is considered desirable that the mining project may be implemented. Project cost for the proposed Stone along with associated minor mineral of “Bakhrija Plot-4” over an area of 34.64 ha. falling in Village- Bakhrija, Tehsil- Narnaul, District- Mahendergarh (Haryana) is Rs. 22.00 Crores. The estimated profit will be Rs. 3,76,21,125 /- Per Annum approx.

11.10 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN There is no measure impact on the environment due to mining except fugitive emission in the form of dust generated during handling and loading of mineral. The adequate preventive measures will be adopted to contain the various pollutants within permissible limits. Plantation development will be carried out in the mine premises, along the approach roads, around Govt. buildings, schools approx 1250 trees per year. It will prove an effective pollution mitigate technique, and help avoid soil erosion during monsoon season. Employment opportunities will be provided to the locals only as providing extraction of minerals from the mine site is the only prevailing occupation for them for their livelihood. A budget of Rs.33.00 Lakhs for Environment Social Responsibility, budget of Rs. 20.00 Lakhs for Occupational Health and Safety and budget of Rs. 40.00 Lakhs for EMP are incurred by Project Proponent. The lease holder will also deposit 10% of the annual contract money i.e. Rs 3.25 Crores approx. to the Mines and Minerals Development, Restoration and Rehabilitation Fund.

11.11 CONCLUSION From the baseline study and various discussion on probable impacts of all the operational activity, it has been concluded that this project will more positive impact and will generate the revenue and employment in the area. On the above facts and baseline study, the proposed activity is recommended for the commencement with proper mitigation measure as suggested.



CHAPTER-12

DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANT ENGAGED 12.0 Introduction Vardan EnviroNet, established on 16th August 2012, is an accredited organization by Quality Council of India/NABET (National Accreditation Board for Education and Training) certificate no. NABET/EIA/1316/IA001. The updated list of accredited consultant is also available online at http://nabet.qci.org.in/environment/pop.asp?file=documents/Annexure7.pdf&heading=Accredited%20EIA%20Consultant%20Organizations%20with%20accredited%20sectors. We have our in-house Environmental Laboratory named “Vardan EnviroLab” at Village Samaspur, Opposite Amity International School, Sector 51, Gurgaon (Haryana) approved by National Accreditation Board for Testing and Calibration Laboratories, Govt. of India (NABL). 12.1 Deceleration I, hereby, certify that I was a part of the EIA team in the following capacity that developed the above EIA. EIA Coordinator: Mr. S.K. Sharma

Signature Date: 15.06.2016 I, hereby, certify that I was a part of the EIA team in the following capacity that developed the above EIA. Team Member: Mr. Ansul Yadav

Signature Date: 15.06.2016 12.2 List of Functional Area Experts

# Name of Person FAE/FAA/TM Area of Expertise 1. Mr. S. K. Sharma FAE AP, WP, SHW and SC

2. Mr. R.S. Yadav FAE HG and GEO 3. Dr. Ashok Kumar FAE EB and WP 4. Mr. Asif Hussain FAE AQ and NV

5. Mr. Kuldipak Ahuja FAE RH 6. Mrs. Shilpa Mishra FAE SE 7. Mr. Joshua Anand FAE LU 8. Mr. Bhagwan Sahay FAA LU and SE

http://nabet.qci.org.in/environment/pop.asp?file=documents/Annexure7.pdf&heading=Accredited%20EIA%20Consultant%20Organizations%20with%20accredited%20sectors

http://nabet.qci.org.in/environment/pop.asp?file=documents/Annexure7.pdf&heading=Accredited%20EIA%20Consultant%20Organizations%20with%20accredited%20sectors

MINERALS OF “BAKHRIJA PLOT-4”...

Documents

Transcript of MINERALS OF “BAKHRIJA PLOT-4”...